Beginner's Course in Topology: Geometric Chapters [1 ed.] 3540909702, 3540909931, 3540135774, 0387135774

This book is the result of reworking part of a rather lengthy course of lectures of which we delivered several versions

249 39 9MB

English Pages xii,519 [542] Year 1984

Report DMCA / Copyright

DOWNLOAD PDF FILE

Table of contents :
Cover
Title Page
Copyright Page
Preface
Contents
Notation
Chapter 1 - TOPOLOGICAL SPACES
§1 - Fundamental Concepts
§1.1 - Topologies
§1.2 - Metrics
§1.3 - Subspaces
§1.4 - Continuous Maps
§1.5 - Separation Axioms
§1.6 - Countability Axioms
§1.7 - Compactness
§2 - Constructions
§2.1 - Sums
§2.2 - Products
§2.3 - Quotients
§2.4 - Glueing
§2.5 - Projective Spaces
§2.6 - More Special Constructions
§2.7 - Spaces of Continuous Maps
§2.8 - The Case of Pointed Spaces
§2.9 - Exercises
§3 - Homotopies
§3.1 - General Definitions
§3.2 - Paths
§3.3 - Connectedness and K-Connectedness
§3.4 - Local Properties
§3.5 - Borsuk Pairs
§3.6 - Cnrs-Spaces
§3.7 - Homotopy Properties of Topological Constructions
§3.8 - Exercises
Chapter 2 - CELLULAR SPACES
§1 - Cellular Spaces and their Topological Properties
§1.1 - Fundamental Concepts
§1.2 - Glueing Cellular Spaces from Balls
§1.3 - The Canonical Cellular Decompositions of Spheres, Balls, and Projective Spaces
§1.4 - More Topological Properties of Cellular Spaces
§1.5 - Cellular Constructions
§1.6 - Exercises
§2 - Simplicial Spaces
§2.1 - Euclidean Simplices
§2.2 - Simplicial Spaces and Simplicial Maps
§2.3 - Simplicial Schemes
§2.4 - Polyhedra
§2.5 - Simplicial Constructions
§2.6 - Stars. Links. Regular Neighborhoods
§2.7 - Simplicial Approximation of Continuous Maps
§2.8 - Exercises
§3 - Homotopy Properties of Cellular Spaces
§3.1 - Cellular Pairs
§3.2 - Cellular Approximation of Continuous Maps
§3.3 - K-Connected Cellular Pairs
§3.4 - Simplicial Approximation of Cellular Spaces
§3.5 - Exercises
Chapter 3 - SMOOTH MANIFOLDS
§1 - Fundamental Concepts
§1.1 - Topological Manifolds
§1.2 - Differentiable Structures
§1.3 - Orientations
§1.4 - The Manifold of Tangent Vectors
§1.5 - Embeddings, Immersions, and Submersions
§1.6 - Complex Structures
§1.7 - Exercises
§2 - Stiefel Amd Grassman Manifolds
§2.1 - Stiefel Manifolds
§2.2 - Grassman Manifolds
§2.3 - Some Low-Dimensional Stiefel and Grassman Manifolds
§2.4 - Exercises
§3 - A Digression: Three Theorems from Calculus
§3.1 - Polynomial Approximation of Functions
§3.2 - Singular Values
§3.3 - Nondegenerate Critical Points
§4 - Embeddings. Immersions. Smoothings. Approximations
§4.1 - Spaces of Smooth Maps
§4.2 - The Simplest Embedding Theorems
§4.3 - Transversalizations and Tubes
§4.4 - Smoothing Maps in the Case of Closed Manifolds
§4.5 - Glueing Manifolds Smoothly
§4.6 - Smoothing Maps in the Presence of a Boundary
§4.7 - General Position
§4.8 - Maps Transverse To a Submanifold
§4.9 - Raising the Smoothness Class of a Manifold
§4.10 - Approximation of Maps by Embeddings and Immersions
§4.11 - Exercises
§5 - The Simplest Structure Theorems
§5.1 - Morse Functions
§5.2 - Cobordisms and Surgery
§5.3 - Two-Dimensional Manifolds
§5.4 - Exercises
Chapter 4 - BUNDLES
§1 - Bundles Without Group Structure
§1.1 - General Definitions
§1.2 - Locally Trivial Bundles
§1.3 - Serre Bundles
§1.4 - Bundles with Map Spaces As Total Spaces
§1.5 - Exercises
§2 - A Digression: Topological Groups and Transformation Groups
§2.1 - Topological Groups
§2.2 - Groups of Homeomorphisms
§2.3 - Actions
§2.4 - Exercises
§3 - Bundles with a Group Structure
§3.1 - Spaces with F-Structure
§3.2 - Steenrod Bundles
§3.3 - Associated Bundles
§3.4 - Ehresmann-Feldbau Bundles
§3.5 - Exercises
§4 - The Classification of Steenrod Bundles
§4.1 - Steenrod Bundles and Homotopies
§4.2 - Universal Bundles
§4.3 - The Milnor Bundles
§4.4 - Reductions of the Structure Group
§4.5 - Exercises
§5 - Vector Bundles
§5.1 - General Definitions
§5.2 - Constructions
§5.3 - The Classical Universal Vector Bundles
§5.4 - The Most Important Reductions of the Structure Group
§5.5 - Exercises
§6 - Smooth Bundles
§6.1 - Fundamental Concepts
§6.2 - Smoothings and Approximations
§6.3 - Smooth Vector Bundles
§6.4 - Tangent and Normal Bundles
§6.5 - Degree
§6.6 - Exercises
Chapter 5 - H0M0T0PY GROUPS
§1 - The General Theory
§1.1 - Absolute Homotopy Groups
§1.2 - A Digression: Local Systems
§1.3 - Local Systems of Homotopy Groups of a Topological Space
§1.4 - Relative Homotopy Groups
§1.5 - A Digression: Sequences of Groups and Homomorphisms, and π-Sequences
§1.6 - The Homotopy Sequence of a Pair
§1.7 - The Local System of Homotopy Groups of the Fibers of a Serre Bundle
§1.8 - The Homotopy Sequence of a Serre Bundle
§1.9 - The Influence of Other Structures upon Homotopy Groups
§1.10 - Alternative Descriptions of the Homotopy Groups
§1.11 - Additional Theorems
§1.12 - Exercises
§2 - The Homotopy Groups of Spheres and of Classical Manifolds
§2.1 - Suspension in the Homotopy Groups of Spheres
§2.2 - The Simplest Homotopy Groups of Spheres
§2.3 - The Composition Product
§2.4 - Information: Homotopy Groups of Spheres
§2.5 - The Homotopy Groups of Projective Spaces and Lenses
§2.6 - The Homotopy Groups of Classical Groups
§2.7 - The Homotopy Groups of Stiefel Manifolds and Spaces
§2.8 - The Homotopy Groups of Grassman Manifolds and Spaces
§2.9 - Exercises
§3 - Homotopy Groups of Cellular Spaces
§3.1 - The Homotopy Groups of One-Dimensional Cellular Spaces
§3.2 - The Effect of Attaching Balls
§3.3 - The Fundamental Group of a Cellular Space
§3.4 - Homotopy Groups of Compact Surfaces
§3.5 - The Homotopy Groups of Bouquets
§3.6 - The Homotopy Groups of a K-Connected Cellular Pair
§3.7 - Spaces with Prescribed Homotopy Groups
§3.8 - Eight Instructive Examples
§3.9 - Exercises
§4 - Weak Homotop Y Equivalence
§4.1 - Fundamental Concepts
§4.2 - Weak Homotopy Equivalence and Constructions
§4.3 - Cellular Approximations of Topological Spaces
§4.4 - Exercises
§5 - The Whitehead Product
§5.1 - The Class Wd(M,N)
§5.2 - Definition and the Simplest Properties of the Whitehead Product
§5.3 - Applications
§5.4 - Exercises
§6 - Continuation of the Theory of Bundles
§6.1 - Weak Homotopy Equivalence and Steenrod Bundles
§6.2 - Theory of Coverings
§6.3 - Orientations
§6.4 - Some Bundles Over Spheres
§6.5 - Exercises
Bibliogrpaphy
Index
Glossary of Symbols
Recommend Papers

Beginner's Course in Topology: Geometric Chapters [1 ed.]
 3540909702, 3540909931, 3540135774, 0387135774

  • 0 0 0
  • Like this paper and download? You can publish your own PDF file online for free in a few minutes! Sign Up
File loading please wait...
Citation preview

Fuks Rokhlin Beginner’s Course in Topology

Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo

NUNC C O G NOSCO EX PARTE

THOMAS J. BATA LIBRARY TRENT UNIVERSITY

Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2019 with funding from Kahle/Austin Foundation

https://archive.org/details/beginnerscourseiOOOOrokh

Universitext

D.B. Fuks

V.A. Rokhlin

Beginner’s Course in Topology Geometric Chapters

Translated from the Russian by A. lacob With 17 Figures

Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo 1984

Dmitrij Borisovich Fuks Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry Moscow State University, Moscow, USSR Vladimir Abramovich Rokhlin Department of Mathematics and Mechanics Leningrad State University, Leningrad, USSR Andrei lacob Department of Theoretical Mathematics. The Weizmann Institute of Science. Rehovot 76100, Israel

Title of the Russian original edition: Nachal’nyj Kurs Topologii: Geome tricheskie Glavy. Publisher Nauka, Moscow 1977 This volume is part of the Springer Series in Soviet Mathematics Advisers: L.D. Faddeev (Leningrad), R.V. Gamkrelidze (Moscow)

AMS Subject Classification (1980): 54-01, 54A 05, 54Bxx, 54Cxx, 54Dxx, 54Exx, 55Pxx, 5 5 Qxx, 55Rxx, 57-01, 57M xx, 57Nxx, 57Rxx, 57Sxx, 58Axx, 58C 25, 58D10, 58D15, 58E 05

ISBN 3-540-13577-4 Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo ISBN 0-387-13577-4 Springer-Verlag New York Heidelberg Berlin Tokyo

Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data. Rokhlin, V. A. Beginner’s course in topology. (Springer series in Soviet mathematics) (Universitext) Translation of: Nachal’nyi kurs topologii / V. A. Rokhlin, D. B. Fuks. Bibliography: p. Includes index. 1.Topology. I. Fuks, D. B. II.Title. III. Series. QA611.R6513 1984 514 84-10657 ISBN 0-387-13577-4 (U.S.) This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically those of translation, reprinting, re-use of illustra­ tions, broadcasting, reproduction by photocopying machine or similar means, and storage in data banks. Under § 54 of the German Copyright Law where copies are made for other than private use, a fee is payable to "Verwertungsgesellschaft Wort” , Munich. © Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 1984 Printed in Germany Printing and bookbinding: Beltz Offsetdruck, Hemsbach 2141/3140-543210

Preface

This book is the result of reworking part of a rather lengthy course of lectures of which we delivered several versions at the Leningrad and Moscow Universities.

In these lectures we presented an

introduction to the fundamental topics of topology:

homology theory,

homotopy theory, theory of bundles, and topology of manifolds.

The

structure of the course was well determined by the guiding term elementary topology, whose main significance resides in the fact that it made us use a rather simple apparatus.

^n this book we have retained

ihose sections of the course where algebra plays a subordinate role. We plan to publish the more algebraic part of the lectures as a separate book. Reprocessing the lectures to produce the book resulted in the profits and losses inherent in such a situation:,,

the rigour has

increased to the detriment of the intuitiveness, the geometric descriptions have been replaced by formulas needing interpretations, etc.

Nevertheless, it seems to us that the book retains the main

qualities of our lectures: pedagogical features.

their elementary, systematic, and

The preparation of the reader is assumed to be

limited to the usual knowledge of set theory, algebra, and calculus which mathematics students should master after the first year and a half of studies. exercises.

The exposition is accompanied by examples and

We hope that the book can be used as a topology textbook. The most essential difference between the book and the

corresponding part of our lectures is the arrangement of the material: here we have followed a much more orderly succesion of topics.

However,

from our experience, a lecture course in elementary topology which exaggerates in the last respect is rather tedious and less efficient than one which mixes geometry with algebra and applications.

This

remark may serve as a warning to the teacher who would like to use our book as a guide. in its order;

In fact, it is by no means necessary to read the book

a reader who is interested in getting to the homotopy

groups or to any other topic sooner, can easily do so.

VI

Concerning the terminology and notation, we have tried to stick to standard usage, and have permitted ourselves only a few reforms.

For example, we do not use the terms "simplicial complexes"

or "CW-complexes", but simplicial spaces and cellular spaces?

not

"cofibrations", but Borsuk pairs;

not "fiber bundles"

products"), but Steenrod bundles.

There is even one term which we do

not use in the generally

accepted way:

(or "fibered

for us, a connected space

refers to what usually is called a linearly connected (or path-connected) space (we do not have a special name for the spaces which are usually called connected).

Furthermore, we have avoided using non­

standardized notations for standard objects.

In fact, in the majority

of cases, our notation is just an abbreviation of the corresponding term and can be understood by itself: projection, skeleton,

in - for inclusion,

for example,

pr

dim - for dimension,

stands for ske - for

bs - for base, etc. Topology requires a very precise set-theoretic language, and

this compelled us to devote a special attention to this language; is illustrated by pp. 1 “ 4.

this

we emphasize that on these pages we only

list the terms and notations, assuming that the objects themselves are known. In this book we rarely refer to the history of topology.

We

have even departed from the tradition that some theorems bear the names of their real or imaginary authors.

In return, we willingly have used

names of topologists in the terminology and notations. The organization of the text and the system of references may be briefly described as follows.

Each Chapter is divided into Sections,

each Section - into Subsections, each Subsection - into Numbers.

The

chapters, sections and subsections have numbers and titles, while the numbers are denoted only by their numbers.

Each fact announced without

proof is called Information, and is distinguished from the rest of the text by this title.

To refer to a section, subsection, or number

within the same chapter, we do not indicate the number of the chapter, and references within a section or subsection are similarly abbreviated. Examples:

the entries

§1.2

(Section 2 of Chapter 1), Subsection 1.2.3

(Subsection 3 of Section 2 of Chapter 1), and 1.2.3.4

(No. 4 of Sub­

section 3 of Section 2 of Chapter 1) are abbreviated, within Chapter 1, as § 2 , Subsection 2.3, and 2.3.4, respectively; entries is abbreviated within §1.2 is abbreviated within §1.2 respectively.

the second of these

as Subsection 3;

the third entry

and Subsection 1.2.3 as 3.4 and 4,

The Authors

Contents

Set-Theoretical Terms and Notations Used in This Book, but not Generally Adopted.................................

Chapter

1

TOPOLOGICAL

§ 1.

§3.

................................................................................................................

5

5 8 10

Topologies............................................. M e t r i c s ............................................... S u b s p a c e s ............................................. Continuous M a p s ....................................... Separation Axioms ..................................... Countability Axioms ................................ Compactness...........................................

21

CONSTRUCTIONS.............................................

26

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

26 27

Sums................................................... Products............................................... Q u o t i e n t s ............................................. G l u e i n g ............................................... Projective Spaces .................................... More Special Constructions............................ Spaces of Continuous M a p s ............................ The Case of Pointed Spaces............................. E x e r c i s e s .............................................

11 15 19

31 34

38 42 46 49 55

HOMOTOPIES.................................................

56

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

General Definitions ................................ P a t h s ................................................. Connectedness and k-Connectedness .................... Local Properties...................................... Borsuk Pairs........................................... CN RS-Spaces........................................... Homotopy Propertiesof Topological Constructions ... E x e r c i s e s .............................................

56 60 61 65 66 70 72 78

S P A C E S ...........................................................................................................................

81

CELLULAR SPACES AND THEIR TOPOLOGICAL PROPERTIES...........

81

Fundamental Concepts.................................... Glueing Cellular Spaces from Balls....................

81

Chapter CELLULAR

§1.

SPACES

FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS....................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

§2.

1

1.

2.

2

86

VIII

§2.

3. The Canonical Cellular Decompositions of Spheres, Balls, and Projective Spaces................ 4. More Topological Properties of Cellular Spaces . . . . 5. Cellular Constructions ............................... 6. Exercises..............................................

88 89 94 98

SIMPLICIAL SPACES..........................................

99

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. §3.

Euclidean Simplices................................... Simplicial Spaces and Simplicial Maps................. Simplicial Schemes .................................... Polyhedra.............................................. Simplicial Constructions ............................. Stars. Links. Regular Neighborhoods................... Simplicial Approximation of Continuous Maps........... Exercises..............................................

99 101 105 106 107 114 118 119

HOMOTOPY PROPERTIES OF CELLULAR SPACES ...................

120

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Cellular P a i r s ........................................ Cellular Approximation of Continuous Maps............. k-Connected Cellular Pairs ........................... Simplicial Approximation of Cellular Spaces........... Exercises..............................................

120 123 126 130 132

Chapter 3 SMOOTH MANIFOLDS ...............................................

133

§1.

133

FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS ...................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

§2.

§3.

§4.

Topological Manifolds................................. Differentiable Structures............................. Orientations.......................................... The Manifold of Tangent Vectors....................... Embeddings, Immersions, and Submersions............... Complex Structures .................................... Exercises..............................................

STIEFEL AMD GRASSMAN MANIFOLDS ...........................

133 141 150 156 161 166 171 171

1. Stiefel Manifolds...................................... 2. Grassman Manifolds .................................... 3. Some Low-Dimensional Stiefel and Grassman Manifolds ............................... 4. Exercises..............................................

171 177

A DIGRESSION: THREE THEOREMS FROM CALCULUS ...............

187

1. Polynomial Approximation of Functions................. 2. Singular Values........................................ 3. Nondegenerate Critical Points.........................

187 191 194

EMBEDDINGS. IMMERSIONS. SMOOTHINGS. APPROXIMATIONS . . . . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Spaces of Smooth Maps.................................. The Simplest Embedding Theorems....................... Transversalizations and Tubes......................... Smoothing Maps in the Case of Closed Manifolds . . . . Glueing Manifolds Smoothly ...........................

185 186

197 197

200 202 205 208

IX

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Smoothing Maps in the Presence ofa Boundary.......... General Position...................................... Maps Transverse to a Submanifold..................... Raising the Smoothness Class of aManifold............ Approximation of Maps by Embeddings and Immersions....................................... 11. E x e r c i s e s ............................................

214 219 225 228

THE SIMPLEST STRUCTURE THEOREMS...........................

239

1. 2. 3. 4.

Morse F u n c t i o n s ...................................... Cobordisms and Surgery................................ Two-dimensional Manifolds ........................... E x e r c i s e s ............................................

239 243 255 263

BUNDLES..........................................................

265

§1 .

BUNDLES WITHOUT GROUP STRUCTURE...........................

265

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

General Definitions................................... Locally Trivial Bundles............................... Serre Bundles......................................... Bundles With Map Spaces asTotal Spaces................ Exercises.............................................

265 267 269 273 276

A DIGRESSION: TOPOLOGICAL GROUPS AND TRANSFORMATION GROUPS.....................................

276

1. 2. 3. 4.

Topological Groups ................................... Groups of Homeomorphisms............................. Actions............................................... Exercises.............................................

276 282 285 296

BUNDLES WITH A GROUP S T R U C T U R E ...........................

297

§5.

233 237

Chapter 4

§2.

§3.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. §4.

Spaces With F-Structure............................... Steenrod Bundles ..................................... Associated Bundles ................................... Ehresmann-Feldbau Bundles............................. Exercises..............................................

297 299 304 308 311

THE CLASSIFICATION OF STEENROD BUNDLES ...................

311

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. §5.

Steenrod Bundles and Homotopies....................... Universal Bundles..................................... The Milnor B u n d l e s ................................... Reductions of the StructureGroup...................... Exercises..............................................

VECTOR B U N D L E S ........................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

General Definitions................................... Constructions......................................... The Classical Universal Vector Bundles ............... The Most Important Reductions of the Structure Group................................... Exercises..............................................

311 316 319 321 323 324 324 331 336 34 3 345

X

§6.

SMOOTH B U N D L E S ........................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Fundamental Concepts ................................. Smoothings and Approximations......................... Smooth Vector Bundles................................. Tangent and Normal Bundles ........................... D e g r e e ............................................... Exercises.............................................

346 350 353 359 364 371

H0M0T0PY GROUPS.................................................

373

§1.

THE GENERAL T H E O R Y .......................................

373

1. 2. 3.

37 3 378

Chapter

5

4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10. 11. 12. § 2.

Absolute Homotopy Groups............................. A Digression: Local Systems ......................... Local Systems of Homotopy Groups of a Topological Space............................... Relative Homotopy Groups............................. A Digression: Sequences of Groups and Homomorphisms, and ^-Sequences....................... The Homotopy Sequence of a P a i r ..................... The Local System of Homotopy Groups of the Fibers of a Serre Bundle......................... The Homotopy Sequence of a SerreB u n d l e ............. The Influence of Other Structures Upon Homotopy Groups................................. Alternative Descriptions of the Homotopy Groups . . . Additional Theorems ................................. E x e r c i s e s ...........................................

THE HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF SPHERES AND OF CLASSICAL MANIFOLDS ................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

§3.

380 38 4 390 398 402 4 05 4 11 416 420 423 424

Suspension in the Homotopy Groupsof Spheres ......... The Simplest Homotopy Groups ofSpheres................ The Composition Product............................... Information: Homotopy Groups ofSpheres................ The Homotopy Groups of Projective Spaces and Lenses..................................... 6 . The Homotopy Groups of Classical Groups............... 7. The Homotopy Groups of Stiefel Manifolds and S p a c e s ................................. 8 . The Homotopy Groups of Grassman Manifolds and S p a c e s ................................. 9. Exercises..............................................

4 24 429 4 33 43 6

HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF CELLULAR SPACES .......................

445

The Homotopy Groups of One-dimensional Cellular Spaces....................................... 2. The Effect of Attaching Balls......................... 3. The Fundamental Group of a Cellular Space............. 4. Homotopy Groups of Compact Surfaces................... 5. The Homotopy Groups of Bouquets....................... 6 . The Homotopy Groups of a k-Connected Cellular Pair......................................... 7. Spaces With Prescribed Homotopy Groups ............... 8 . Eight Instructive Examples ........................... 9. Exercises..............................................

438 439 44 1 443 444

1.

445 446 448 45 1 45 3 45 5 459 45O

4^2

XI

§4.

WEAK HOMOTOP Y EQUIVALENCE................................. 1. 2. 3. 4.

§5.

THE WHITEHEAD PRODUCT..................................... 1. 2. 3. 4.

§6.

Fundamental Concepts ................................ Weak Homotopy EquivalenceandConstructions............ Cellular Approximations ofTopological Spaces......... Exercises.............................................

The Class w d ( m , n ) .................................. Definition and the SimplestProperties of the Whitehead P r o d u c t ............................. Applications......................................... Exercises.............................................

CONTINUATION OF THE THEORY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

463 463 468 472 478 478 478 482 484 486

OF BUNDLES.....................

487

Weak Homotopy Equivalence andSteenrod Bundles . . . . Theory of Coverings.................................. Orientations......................................... Some Bundles Over Spheres............................ Exercises.............................................

487 49 0 500 501 503

BIBLIOGRAPHY ...................................................

5 06

INDEX............................................................

508

GLOSSARY OF SYMBOLS.............................................

517

Set-Theoretical Terms and Notations Used in this Book, but not Generally Adopted

Mathematicians manage with a surprisingly modest collection of set-theoretic terms and notations, which can be roughly divided into three groups.

The first contains terms and notations which have attained

general recognition.

The terms and notations in the second group are

equally well-known, but can be understood differently or have varying connotations. The third group consists of terms and notations used less frequently. There is no need todefine terms from the first example, the notations

X U Y, X fl

Y,

X, x .. . x x I n the notations

and

union, intersection, and product of sets, or Imf

group.

For

for the f: X + Y,

and

fI : A -* Y for a map, its image, and its restriction are i^ understood in the same way by all people. The same is true for the notation

x e X

and the terms one-to-one (injective) map and map onto

(surjective map). For the sake of precision, we must usage set by

of terms and notations from the second group. 0.

i.e., the

We understand the notation equality

term countable set: sets.

say a few words about our

X c Y

X = Y is not excluded. we

The identity map

We denote the empty

in the broadest sense, The same is true for the

use it both for infinite countable and finite of the set

there is no ambiguity about

X

is denoted by

X, simply by

id.

id X ,

or, when

We shall say that a map

is invertible if it has an inverse, i.e., it is simultaneously injective and surjective. the set

X

We let

{x E X | ...}

denote the set of points

x

of

which satisfy the condition appearing instead of the three

dots. A family X^ with y £ M,

-*-s a maP a set M onto a set of objects defined by the formula p ^ X ^ .

Next our main task is to list the

terms and notations

appearing in this book and belonging to the third group.

2

Maps If X

may

denote

it by

eachmap

in: A -> X.

write If A f:

x h- f (x) , to

is a subset of a set

be considered as the map

we simply

f

A

Y

then the inclusion of

defined by the formula

xx .

If there isno ambiguity about

in. is a subset of

X

X,

such that

X and

B

f (A) ^ B

A

is a subset of

induces a map

A

in

We and

Y,

X,

then

ab f : A -* B,

and called here the abridgment (or compression) of the map

A,B.When there is no ambiguity

ab finstead of

ab f : A -> B .

usual restriction of

f

to

If B = Y,

where

(respectively,

Y),

(tp: X such that cp^ =

A and

B, one can write

then ab f

is just

the

A.

By a map of a sequence (Y,B1 ,.../Bn ) ,

about

(X,A ^ ,...,A^) (B^, ...,B^)

into a sequence are subsets of

X

we mean a sequence of maps A 1 -s-

Y , tp-Li ab cp .

tpn : An -►Bn )

Wedenote such a map by

(cp/cp^f •••/cp^):

(X ,A^ ,. ..,A^) ->(Y ,B^ , . ..,B^ ) .

If thesubsets

A, ,...,A and Bn,... ,B are fixed, then the map I n 1 ' n ^ f = (cp,cp^,. ../ X x x

make the

is closed if and only if

Obviously, every product

X

is

(obvious) remark is Hausdorff.

f^ x ... x fn : X^ x

Y. x ... x y of continuous maps f .: X „ Y ., ...,f : X 1 n ^ 1 1 1 n n continuous. Moreover, f^ x ... x f^ is open whenever

... x

x^

Y n

is are

open. 6 . If

X

is a metric space, then clearly

(dist (x^j ,x£) - dist(x 1 ,x2)| £ dist (x jj,x ^ ) + dist(x 2 ,x2>for any points x^,x 2 ,x^,x2 G X. This inequality shows that the function dist: X x X

IR

is continuous.

Properties of Products 7.

Every product of

T^-spaces is a

of Hausdorff spaces is Hausdorff. regular.

T -space.

Every product

Every product of regular spaces is

29

The first and second assertions are immediate. a product of

T3-spaces

X 1 ,...,Xn

T 3 ~space.

is a

We show that

Let

U

be a

(x^,...»x n)

in X^ x ... x x . Pick neighborhoods U ,...,U of the points x.,...,x , such that U„ x ... x u c: u, i n I n 1 n and fix neighborhoods V.),.. .,Vn of the same points with Cl V 1 c U , ■■•/ClVn cUn . Since C1(V 1 x ... x Vn ) = Cl V 1 x ... x cl Vn (see 3), one has Cl (V. x ... x v ) c: U . \ n neighborhood of

INFORMATION. normal; see [14]. 8.

S 1f...,S are dense sets in the spaces I n c x... x sn is obviously densein X^ x ... x x .

S1

then

There are product of normal spaces which are not

If

X „ ,...,X , 1 n Consequently,

a product of separable spaces is separable. If

, . . . , are bases of

xu

U 1 x ...

1 n X 1 x ... x x .

X ^ , . . . then the sets

EF form a base of the space n n ^ Consequently, a product of second countable spaces is

with

U

1

£ T

1

U

second countable. If now

r„,...,r are bases of X„ ,...,X at the points i n I n x.,...,x ,then the sets U. x ... x u with U. £ T U £ F , i n 1 n l i n n form a base of X^ x ... x x^ at the point (x^ ,...,x^) . Consequently, a product of first 9.

countable spaces is first countable.

Every product of metrizable spaces is metrizable.

In fact, we can say more: if then the formula

X ^ ,...,XR

dist ((x^ , ...,x^) , (x^ ,...,x^) ) = [£

defines a canonical metric on the product 10.

are metric spaces, (dist(x^,x|))2]

X^ x ... x x .

Every product of compact spaces is compact.

It suffices to consider a product of two spaces. and

Y

X x y.

be compact topological spaces, and let Consider an arbitrary refinement

sets of the form homeomorphic to x e X, A all

U x V Y

and

(see 1.1.13). Y

a finite collection

which covers

x

i = 1,...,n(x).

x y

of

be an open cover of

T

T,

consisting of open

Since the fibers

Ax = (U^x)

x v^x)}*?^

x x Y

are

of elements of

(see 1.7.2); one may assume that X,

X

is compact, one can find, for each point

Since the sets

cover the compact space

A

So let

Ux =

U± (x)

x £ U^x)

for

are open and

there exists a finite collection

A is a cover U ,...,U covering X. It is clear that A 1 = U™ x. x^ 3 D-l x. 1 m J of X x y. Finally, replacing each set W £ A' by a set of r containing

W,

we produce a finite subcover of

r.

30

11.

Every product of locally compact spaces is locally compact.

PROOF.

Let

ke neighborhoods of the points

E

EX. Then U . x ... x u is a neighborhood of (x.,...,x ) n n 1 n ^ I n X ^ x ... x x^. Furthermore, its closure Cl (U^ x ... x u^) is just ...,x

Cl

x ... x clU

(see 3), and so is compact whenever

Cl

, in

, ...,C1

are compact (see 1 0 ) .

An Application: A Method for Constructing Continuous Maps 12.

Proposition 14 below allows us to establish continuity

a map in some situations similar to those treated by Theorem 1.4.3, but where the latter is not applicable. 13 (LEMMA).

Suppose that the

and transforms the fiber

x^

into

x q

compact, then given any neighborhood is a neighborhood PROOF. Xq

U

of_

Xq

W

f (U x

with

Suppose that

is a subset of X, g: Y

->

for each

X

B

X,Y,Z

is a closed subset of

continuous map

g(B) c A.

: Y \ B + Q,

I_f

Q

themap

q

)

,

there

fix a neighborhood

Q

are continuous maps such that x E A, and

f(x^ x

f(U^. x v^) c=w.

and

Q is

c w.

Q)

compact, one can cover it with a finitecollection s set U = (1. i U . i=1 q± 14.

iscontinuous

If the space

of the point

q E Q,

of q

+ z

f: X x Q

a point.

such that

Given any point

and a neighborhood

map

Since

V ^1

of

1

,...,V ^

Q

is

. Now b

are topological spaces,

A

Y,

and

and

f (x x

f: X

x q

z

reduces to a point

Q)

is compact, then for each h: Y +

Z

given by

f (g (y) ) , (y) ) , for

y E Y \ B,

f (g (y)

y E B,

h (y) = x Q) ,

for

is continuous. PROOF. Y \ B;

The map

h

is clearly continuous at the points of

let us verify its continuity at the points

of Lemma 13, given any neighborhood a neighborhood

U

of

the point

last inclusion shows that is a neighborhood of y.

W

g(y)

y E B.

of the point such that

h(g” 1 (U)) c W,

f(U

By virtue

h(y), x

Q)

there is c:

w.

and finally note that

The g~ 1 (U)

31

Information 15.

The notion of a product of an infinite number of

topological spaces can be defined in a natural way; in

[3 ] for details.

product of compact spaces remains compact; see

3. 1. of

The quotient set

its partitions

X/p

p

thiscase too a

Quotients X/p

of a topological space

Equivalently, a subset of

X/p

pr: X -> X/p

is open.

is closed if its preimage is closed.

This topology is called the quotient topology,

and the set

the quotient topology is the quotient space of

thespace

pr: X -* X/p

X

with

by its

is continuous.

In the special case of a partition of

X/p

p. It is clear that

single

by any

is equipped with a natural topology: asubset of

is open if its preimage under the map

partition

X

set

A

the space X 2.

partitions

and the points of by

A

X \ A,

and

q,

and is denoted by

a

called the quotient

X/A. X

and

and a continuous map

into elements of

whose elements are

X/p is

Given two topological spaces p

p

Y

f: X

Y

which takes the

elements of

p

continuous.

This is a straightforward consequence of the definition of

the quotient topology. f

-1

(pr

-1

(U))

If

Indeed, if

is open in

= pr ^((factf)

^ (U) ) q

q,

the map

with respective

U -* Y / q

factf : X/p

is open, then the set

X, and so the identity

implies that

(factf)

is the partition of

Y

is

Y/q

^(U)

f

-1

-1

(pr

(U)) =

is open in

X/p.

into single points, then

= Y and p r : Y -* Y / q is the identity map. In this case, f h- factf defines a one-to-one correspondence between continuous maps

Y/q

X

Y

which are constant on the elements of the partition

continuous maps 3. continuous map

X/p

p,

Y.

In particular, the discussion above shows that given a f: X -* Y,

its injective factor

factf : X/zer(f) + Y

is continuous too.

The converse is also true: every map f : X Dr fact f be represented as the composition X --- ► X/zer(f) ------- ► Y, f

is continuous whenever 4.

and

factf

Y

can

and so

is continuous.

A continuous map whose injective factor is a homeomorphism

will be referred to as a factorial map (or a quotient map).

32

An equivalent definition: a map

f

of a topological space

X

into a topological space Y is factorial if f(X) = Y , and the preimage _i f (B) of a set B c: Y is open if and only if B is open. If we substitute closed sets for open ones, we obtain another equivalent definition. Obviously, the composition of two factorial maps is factorial, and any injective factorial map is a homeomorphism. plain that if then the map

f g

is factorial and the composition is continuous.

factorial imply

Moreover, it is

g

Also,

f

g ° f

is continuous,

continuous and

g ° f

factorial.

The projections onto quotient spaces form the main class of factorial maps. f (X) = Y

to be factorial is that 5.

f

a map

be an open or a

X

and

(X/p)/p'

p*

is a partition of

X/p,

X

projection

X -> X/p.

with

closed map. p

is a

then the quotient

is canonically homeomorphic to X / q ,

partitions

into the preimages of the elements

where

of

p'

q

under the

This canonical homeomorphism is defined as the

injective factor of the composite map

X

X/p

(X/p)p!,

a homeomorphism, because this composition is factorial 6.

the space

f : X-> Y

Taking quotients is a transitive operation: if

partition of space

A crude necessary condition for

If the sets X , then

A

and

B

and is truly

(see 4).

constitute a fundamental cover of

fact [in:A -> X] : A/AflB -> X/B is a homeomorphism. Given an open subset to show that

V = [pr: X -+ X/B]

U _i

of the quotient (fact in(U))

A/ADB,

is open in

it is enough X.

But this

is a consequence of the equalities V fl A = [pr: A -> A/ADB ] “ 1 (U) and B,

if

pr (A fl B) € U,

',

if

pr (A fl B) t U.

V fl B =

Properties of Quotient Spaces 7.

Obviously, a qutient space

and only if the elements of the partition

p

X/p

are closed.

satisfies axiom Also,

X/p

T^

i

33

is Hausdorff if and only if any two distinct elements of

p

disjoint saturated neighborhoods.

T^-space

Similarly,

(T^-space) if and only if for any element closed

subset

B

closed

subsetsA

of X

A

of p

and any saturated

(respectively, for any saturated,

and

B

of

X) such that

disjoint saturated neighborhoods in if and

is a

X/p

have

A fl B = 0,

A

and B

have

X.

Moreover, it is readily seen that X/p is second countable only if there isa countable collection of open saturated sets

in X such that any saturated set can be expressed as the of its subcollections.

union of one

It is immediate from 1.6.6 that a quotient of a separable space is separable. Similarly, 1.7.8 implies that a quotient of a compact space is compact.

Closed Partitions 8.

A partition

is a closed map.

of the space

p

is closed if

X

pr: X

X/p

An equivalent condition: saturations of closed sets

are closed. Obviously, a partition which has only one element that is not reduced to a point is closed if and only if this element is closed. 9. T^-space.

The quotient of a

T^-space by a closed partition is a

The quotient of a normal space by a closed partition is

normal. Since the first assertion is straightforward, all we have to show is that the quotient p

is a

T^-space.

subsets of

X.

neighborhoods.

Let

Since

of a

X/p

F^ X

and

T^-space

F^

by a closed partition

be disjoint, saturated, closed

is normal,

Furthermore, since

X

F^ p

and

F^

have disjoint

is a closed partition, the

saturations of the complements of these neighborhoods are closed, and now it is clear that the complements of these saturations are disjoint saturated neighborhoods of

F^

and

F^•

Open Partitions 10. is an open map. open.

A partition

p

of the space

X

is open if

pr: X

X/p

An equivalent condition: saturations of open sets are

34

If

p

is an open partition and

the saturation of

IntA

A is a saturated set,

is open, and hence

complements, we see thatthe saturation of

equals Int A ;

Cl A

is just

then

passing to

Cl A .

Therefore, in the case of an open partition, the interior and the closure of a saturated set are saturated. As it follows from 1.6.6, the quotient of a first countable (second countable)

space by an open partition is first countable

(respectively, second countable). 11. spaces

X

Let p

and

be open partitions of the respective

q

and Y. The product

morphic to the quotient

(X/p)

x

is canonically homeo-

(Y/q)

(X x Y)/(p x q ) .

The injective factor of the map

pr x p r : X x y

(X/p)

definesthis canonical map, which is a homeomorphism because

x (Y/q)

pr x pr

is open (see 2.5).

4. 1.

Glueing (or pasting) topological spaces is a composite

operation which consists quotient.

of taking a sum andsubsequently passing

More precisely, suppose

topological spaces and

p

hy_ (or according to) p.

xv is termed the setsimmv (Xy ) f: X/p Y, if and

that

{

X/p

to a

isa family of

is a partition of the space

we say that the quotient space Xy

Glueing

X =

J Lxu •

Then

is obtained by glueing the spaces

The composite map

X JE2U X/p v-th immersion and is denoted by yield a fundamental cover

where

Y

imm^ .

of X/p,

Clearly, the

and a map

is an arbitrary topological space, is continuous

only if all the compositions

f 0 imm^

are continuous.

Unions 2. Let that for each pair . In addition,suppose

be a family of topological spaces. (y,y’) £ M x m there is given a subset A that for

each pair(y,y')

an invertible map (i) (ii)

, , = Xy

and

cf>^, (Auy ,fl h v v „)

€ Mx m

there

Suppose c X UP’ y is given

such that:

y = id Xy ,

forany

= Ayly flA y ) y l (

y £M;

and the

diagram

35

is commutative for every ii the subset of

X ^ AVy * J L V

J

[x^

The sets

y,y',p" £ M.

For

x £ | |x , y

consisting of all the points

Bx

in^ (cj)^ (x) ) ,

B x where

are pairwise disjoint and define a partition of

The corresPonding quotient space is called Xy by (or a l o n g ) the maps ^yy»-

spaces

denote by

the union of the

This construction is a special case of glueing, when all the immersions cj)^,

i^y

are injective.

Moreover, assuming that all the maps

are homeomorphisms and that the sets

closed, we see at once that all the maps In the general case, a union of

Au u » i™^

are aH

open or all

are embeddings.

T^-spaces is clearly a

T^-space. 3.

Often the union construction is employed when all the

spaces ^

X„ are subsets of a set X and cover X, while A . and y yy ’ are given by Ayy> = Xy n Xy » and ^yy• = id- In this situation, conditions 2 (i) and 2 (ii) are automatically fulfilled, and one may describe the union of the

X y ’s

the following topology: a set the intersection any

C n X^

simply as the set

C c: X

X

equipped with

is open (closed) if and only if

is open (respectively, closed) in

X^

for

y E M. We devote some special attention to the case where the

topology of each set X.

X

is induced by some topology already given on

Then our construction produces a new topology on

X.

It is clear

that the sets open (closed) in the old topology remain open (respectively, closed) in the new topology. X

n X ,

are open in their sets

then the new topology on set

X ;

y

Moreover, if all the intersections

X

X

y

(endowed with the initial topology),

induces the initial topology back on each

the same holds whenever all the intersections

closed in their sets

X

y

Xy.

Limits and Filtrations 4.

Let

X q ,X ^ ,...

be topological spaces, and let

fl X ,

y

are

36

V

X.j, ^

xo

-> X ^ , ___

be embeddings. t>ki (Xk i) f

k-1

Set if

k ' < k'

if

k’ ^ k,

if

k1 = k,

A.

kk'

V and ab (cj)k - 1 id Xk'

^kk'

o ... o rf)k )] - 1 ,

[ab ((¡)^,

The union of the spaces

if

is well-defined because

conditions 2(i) and 2 (ii) are obviously satisfied. the limit of the sequence

k 1 > k,

and

denoted by

This union is called limiX^.,^)

or

limX, • k A specific property of the limit construction is that the maps imm, : X, + lim X, K

Xk

K

K.

are embeddings: indeed, every closed subset

is the preimage under

imm^

of some closed subset of

A

of

limX^ ,

for

example, of imn^, (Clx (4>k . « 1 ° ••• ° 4>k (A) ) k

U .*=k+1

Obviously, if then all the sets imm^ix^)

°Pen (closed) in + i f°r aH are open (respectively, closed) in

k'

lim(Xk ,(J)k ) . Suppose that ^ Xk + 1^ another sequence of topological spaces and embeddings, and that for each k there is given a continuous map

fk : Xk

X£ ,

so that all the diagrams f,

X,

xk vk k +1

k+1

are commutative. continuous map

Then the rule

f(imm, (x)) = imm, (f, (x)) K K K f: lim(Xk ,k ) -+■ limiX^,^) (see 3.2); f

the limit of the sequence 5. of

limX^

k +1

Ijf

f^,^,...,

X 0 ,Xr ...

are

and is denoted by

defines a is called lim f^ .

T.^-spaces, then every compact subset

is contained in one of the sets

imm^(X^) .

37

This is a consequence of 1.7.6. 6.

in

Xk + 1

If_

are normal spaces and

for every PROOF.

k,

then

X^j

x -| x

=i ^ (x., ) ,cp(Xl ,x2 ,1 ) = in2 (x2) .

that the quotient space of x2) ^ (X^ U X2)

may be alternatively defined

jc

is given by

(pr(x,x n ,t)) = ((1 -t)jc A

x £ (... (X1 * X0) * X,)...)* X I J n— I multiplication of a point of con X^ x . . .

where

A

I

.

n-1

x n

£X, n x conXn_^

(x),pr(x n ,t)),

and by

t £ I; 1 -t

the

is

defined by the rule (1 -t)(pr(x 1 ,t1 ),...,pr(xn- 1 /tn_1)) = = (pr (x1 , (1 -t) t j , ...,pr (xn - 1 , (1 -t) tn-1) ) . Clearly, the image of the embedding

jc 1,‘''

{ (pr(x.,t.) ,...,pr (x ,t )) £ con X. x 1 1

n n

... x con X

I

n

v n

is precisely

I t.+...+t \

n

= 1},

which allows us to identify the iterated join (...((X 1 * x2) * X )...) * Xn 5. the two joins morphic.

with this set.

The ^-operation is associative, meaning, as usual, that (X^ * X2) * X^

* (X2 * X^)

and

The canonical homeomorphism

are canonical homeo-

(X^ * X 2) * X^ -* X^ * (X2 * X^)

is the composition of the canonical homeomorphism x

* (X2 * X^)

(X2 * X^) * x -| with the suitablecompression

canonical homeomorphism + con X 2

X con X^

con X 2

x con X^

of the

x con X^

X con X 1 .

A consequence of the associativity of the ^-operation is that the multiple join spaces

X 1 * ... * X r

is meaningful for any topological

x ^ /.../Xn . 6.

The product

con X^

x ... x con Xn

is canonically

44

homeomorphic to

con(X^ * ... * Xr ).

The canonical homeomorphism con(X, * ... * X ) + con X. x I n i

... x con X

n

is defined as pr(jc“ 1 1 '*

(pr(x1 ,1^) , . . . ,pr(xn ,tn ) ) ,t) ~

n

(pr(x^,tt^ /max ( , ..., 7.

* and

con Sm

and

su Sm

)), ...,pr (x^,tt^/max (t ^ , ...,t^ ) ) ) .

are canonically homeomorphic to

D™

o m+1 S

The canonical homeomorphisms

Dm 1

con Sm

and

su Sm -> Sm

are defined by the formulas pr((X l ,...,Xm + 1 ) ,t) H. (tX l ,...,tXm + 1 )

and pr ( (x f . . . ^x m+1 ) / t ) 8.

The join

»

X * D°

(X1 Sin Tit f . . . /Xm+1 s i n TTt ,COS 771) .

is canonically homeomorphic to

con X .

The join X * S is canonically homeomorphic to su X . The join k k+ 1 X * S is canonically homeomorphic to the iterated suspension su X; m^ m2 m +m2 +1 in particular, S * S is canonically homeomorphic to S The canonical homeomorphism pr(x,0,t) *+ pr(x,t).

con X

The canonical homeomorphism

given by the formulas *+ pr(x,(1-t)/2).

X *

pr(x,1,t)

*+

pr (x, (1 +t )/2) ,

is given by

X *

su X

is

pr(x,-1,t) h-

Finally, the canonical homeomorphism

X * Sk

suk +1 X

is the composite map k V— i v n 1■ sur_1X * su Sk_r

-> sur_1X * Sk_r * S°

- sur"1X * S° * Sk"r - surx * Sk"r . 9.

Combining the canonical homeomorphisms constructed in

6 -8 , we obtain the composite homeomorphisms

m

s

m

* ...

* s

m

s

m

* ...

*s

n

m * s n

+m +1 n -

...

^

“ '1

iun

D

x ... x D

m - —i

x

m -i~1 -> con (S * ... * s and

m D

m1 - 1

0

ml - ^ -*■ con S

m _1

*D * . . . * S n

-* COn(S

m i_1

n * D * ...

0 con D

X

X

...

X

X D

x

...

n»1 Th er e fo re , the jo in S * and the jo in Dml * . . . * m.+ . . . +m +n-1 S 1 n the b a l l respectively.

m -1 * ... * con S n n

* D -*■ i~ 1

* S

n m _1 * D * s n ) ->-

mn - 1 - ^ con S

m. m D x l x . . . x D n m1 1 m D

... x con S n

m 1+. ..+m -1 m. + .-.+m ) ->■ con S n -*■ D n

m -1 -*■ con S

m * ... * D

S

m -

-*■ con S

n m -1 con D x con S n -*

X

m x I x D n -> m

x D n

x D

m,+...+m +n-1

x D n - >- D

n

m m1 m . . . * S , the product D x ... x d n, Dmn are c a n o n i c a l l y homeomorphic t o the sphere m + . . . +m m1+...+ m +n-1 D n , and the b a l l D 1 n ,

The Mapping Cylinder and the Mapping Cone 10. attaching the

Let

f :X ^ ->

product X^ x I

be a continuous map. to X^

(x,1 ) ►>f (x),is called themapping Cyl f .

cylinder of imm2 (X2)

The sets

imm^ (X^ x 0)

and

Cyl f ,

and the sets

imm^(x

bases of

generatrices. and

by the map

X2 #

x

f, and isdenoted by x € X^

are its X^

and they are usually identified with these two spaces; the

a canonical retraction

rtf : Cyl f -> X2 ,

rtf (imm^(x,t)) = imm^(x,1) [ = f (x) ] . map X, ^ 2 —

f.

X^ x 1 4

Clearly, the bases are canonically homeomorphic to

generatrices are canonically homeomorphic to

equals

of

are the lower and upper

with

I)

The result

cyl £

x2

I.

Moreover, there is

defined on

imm^ (X x I)

as

It is evident that the composite

46

If

X2 = X 1

and

f = id X^ ,

homeomorphic to the cylinder over 11. the space conf ,

con X ,

defined in 1).

Let

topological space B^,...,Bn

is canonically

X^ x i.

denoted by

f: X^

X^

(do not confuse it with Conf

= Cyl f/X^ .

Spaces of Continuous Maps

C(X,Y) X

Con f

Equivalent definition:

7.

e C (X,Y )

Cyl f

The mapping cone of the continuous map

X^

1.

X^,

then

be the set of all continuous maps of a

into a topological space

such that

Y.

(p(A^ ) c B ^ , ...,cf)(A^) c B^ ,

are given subsets of

C (X ,A ^,...,A ^ ;Y ,B ^,...,B^) .

X

and

Y,

The set of all maps where

A 1,...,A^

and

respectively, is denoted by

It may be interpreted as the set of all

continuous maps

(X,A. , ... ,A ) -+ (Y,B. , ...,B ) . I n I n We equip C(X,Y) with the compact-open topology: by definition,

this is the topology with the prebase consisting of all sets with

A

compact and

B

open.

C(X,A^ ,...,A^ ?Y ,B ^ ,...,Bn ) If

Y

Together with

C(X,Y),

all the sets

become topological spaces.

is a point, then

C(X,Y)

reduces to a point.

is discrete and consists of the points

x„,...,x , then I n canonically homeomorphic to the product Y x ... x Yof n the space

Y;

this homeomorphism is given by

To each there

pair of continuous maps

corresponds a mapping

(j) h- g o 0 o f .

C(X,A;Y,B)

C(X,Y)

cf>-+ ($

C(X,Y)

X is

copies

of

(x^) , ..., (x )) .

f: X ’ -> X

+ C(X',Y'),

If

and

g: Y -> Y 1

given by therule

This mapping is continuous, and we shall denote it by

C(f,g). 2.

I_f

Y

Indeed, if such that

is a Hausdorff space, (p,ip E C(X,Y)

(J)(x) ? ^(x). Let

and

U and V

$

then sois

C(X,Y).

^ \jj, then

there is

be disjoint neighborhoods of

the points (x) and i|;(x). Then C(X,x;Y,U) and disjoint neighborhoods of the points $ and \p. 3.

If

is metrizable.

X

is compact and

Moreover, if

Y

Given

$ £C(X,Y),

a finite number of balls (see 1.7.11).

is metrizable,

are

then C(X,Y)

defines a metric on

the set

0(X )

C(X,Y),

can be covered

of an arbitrarily small radius

It is clear that

neighborhood of the point

Y

C(X,x;Y,V)

is equipped with a metric, then

dist ((J>,ip) = suPxex dist ((x ) , ip (x) ) compatible with its topology. PROOF.

x £X

$,

0/

= il®= 1 C (X ,“1 (U±) ;Y ,Ui)

is a

contained in the ball of radius

2e

by e

is

47

centered at 4). Therefore, every ball in hood of its center. On the other hand, if with

0(A) cz B,

then

Dist((j>(A),Y \ B)

A c X

C(X,A;Y,B)

centered at

C(X,Y)

contains a neighbor­

is compact and

B c Y

is open,

contains the ball with radius

(J) (see 1 .7.15) .

Therefore, every

neighborhood of Z .

To prove the first assertion, pick a point set

and

[ V (x)] (y) = cj)(x,y)

C(Y,Z) be a continuous mapping, and

is Hausdorff and locally compact.

= [^(x)](y)

and

X q € X,

Then it is enough

a compact

to exhibit a

(pV (U) c: C(Y,B;Z,C).For each point

of

x^

and

ch(U x v ) c C, and then extract a finite cover ^ Y Y from the collection {Vy y } t 0r s0 . It is clear that

y V

such that

,...,V of B s s U = H _L-iy. ._1 U is a 1

48

neighborhood of

xQand that

(f>(U x B) c= U ? *

cj>(U

1

remains to remark that the inclusion

6

(U

x

b)

cz

x v ) C(X,C(Y,Z))

defined by the r

X, Y

and

The continuity of the mapping just

Assume that

Hausdorff and locally compact. and a point A

Q

of

X x Y,

q E Q.

q x Cl Vq ) - t|j is continuous. It is readily see that the mappings V A h- (j) and ip ip are inverses of one another.

49

A Surprising Application 8.

Let

f: X ->• X 1

be a factorial map.

Hausdorff and locally compact, then the map is factorial.

fxidY:XxY-*X'x

One can assume that X' = X/zer(f) and that projection X -> X/zer(f) . Consider the projection p r : X x Y ->• (X x Y)/(zer(f) Pr V : x

x zer (id Y) ) .

C (Y , (X x Y)/(zer(f)

of the partition

zer(f),

fact prV : X 1

If the space

f

Y

Y

is the

The mapping

x zer (id Y) )

is constant on the elements

and hence it induces continuous mappings C (Y , (X x Y) / (zer (f) x zer(idY))

and (fact prv)A : X' x y -+ (X x Y)/(zer(f) x zer(idY)). It it clear that the second of these mappings is the inverse of the injective factor of factor of

f x i d Y : X x Y ^ X ' 9.

and f x

f x i d Y i X x Y + X '

Let

f: X

X'

g :Y ->• Y 1

Yare Hausdorff and locally compact, g:

x x Y -+ X' x y'

Thus the injective

is a homeomorphism.

x y

and

x y.

be factorial

maps.

If

X1

then the map

is factorial»

In fact, one can express

fx g

as the composition

f x id . id x q X x Y — ---- — >X' x Y ------ X' x Y' and recall that a composition of factorial maps is again factorial.

8. 1.

The Case of Pointed Spaces

In the sequel, the class of topological spaces equippe

with a simple additional structure - a distinguished point (i.e., topological pairs

(X,xQ ),

where

xQ

is a point) will play an

important role; we call these spaces pointed spaces, and call the distinguished point a base point.

The constructions described in the

previous subsections must be naturally modified when applied to such spaces.

For some of these construction, the modification entails

merely the addition of a base point to the resulting space: for example, the quotient space of pointed space

(X,xQ)

has the natural base point

50

PIt (Xq ),

the product of the pointed spaces

the natural base point from map

X

(x^,...,x ),

x

yQ ,

has

and the space of continuous maps

into a pointed topological space

const: X + Y,

(X^ ,x^ ),..., (X^x^) (Y,Yq )

contains the constant

and hence has the natural base point

const.

Other constructions such as the sum, suspension, and join need more serious modifications. We shall describe these modified constructions below, and also introduce a new one - the tensor product of pointed spaces.

In every

case, pointed spaces produce pointed spaces, and base point-preserving maps again produce base point-preserving maps. factf ,

C(f,g),

and

f^ * ... x fR

We remark that the maps

preserve base points whenever the

initial maps have this property. We use the symbol

bp

as a general notation for the base

points.

Bouquets and Tensor Products 2.

The construction below replaces the sum construction f

pointed spaces. Let

be a family of topological spaces with base

points . The quotient space of the sum J Lye^ Xy ky the subset consisting of all points in^(x^) is called the bouquet (or the wedge) of the spaces the numbers

,

and is denoted by

1,...,n,

^

^

consists of

we also write

(X. ,x1 ) V ... V (X ,x ) . The point II n n c pr ° in^(x^) E V(X^,x^) does not depend on v; it iscalled the center of the bouquet V(X ,x ), and is taken as its base point. The bouquet

V(X ,x ) y

y

is obviously a union of the spaces ^

(see 4.2), and so there exist the embeddings maps

Prv : V^Xy'xy)

,

imm^:X^

V(X

,x ).

X

y

The

defined by xv ,

if

v ’ / v,

x,

if

v 1 = V,

prv (immv ,(x)

are specific to the bouquet construction. and pr^ ° imm^, = const if v 1 f v. If

M

Clearly,

pr

V

° imm

also indexes another family of pointed spaces

and a family of continuous maps

f^: X^

Y^

such that

then the map fact y ) : V(Xy ,xy) + V(Yy ,y ) continuous; we denote it by V f y

V

= id X

v

(Y ,v ) y

y

f (x ) = y ,

is well-defined and^

51

3.

Let

x »(x,x2,- ..,xr )

(x^

,x^

( x ^ ,x^)

[x £ X^] , ...

definecanonical embeddings in^,...,in^.

be pointed spaces.

, x » (X l ,... /xR_1,x )

The

rules

[x € X ],

X„ -► X„ x ... x x , .... X -*X x ... x x ! 1 1 n' n 1 n1 Moreover, the rule x (pr^ (x) , ...,prn (x))

denoted

by

defines

a canonical embedding

(XwX. ) V . . .V (X ,x )-> X. x ... x x , 1 1 n n 1 n which allows us to regard the bouquet (X„,x ) V ... V (X ,x ) as a I t n n subspace of X x ... x x . Clearly, in .: X . -► X. x ... x x is the I n 1 1 1 n composition of the embedding imm.: X. -+ (X.,x.) V ... V (X ,x ) with 1 1 1 1 n n the inclusion (X ,x.) V ... V (X ,x ) -+■ X.x ... x x , while the 1 1 n n 1 n projection pr : (X ,x. ) V ... V (X ,x ) -v x . is the restriction of i l l n n 1 p r .: X . x ... x x ■> X .. I 1 n 1 The quotient space is called the by

(X. x ... x x )/[(X.,x.) V ... V (X ,x )] I n i l n n tensor product of the spaces X^,...,X , and is denoted

( X . , x . ) ® ... ®

II £ (X^/x^) ® ...

(X ,x ) . The pointpr[ (X.,x ) V ... V (X ,x )] £ n n II n n ® (X^/X^) is called the center of the tensorproduct

(X ,x ) ® ... ® (X ,x ), and is taken as its base point. I I n n The tensor product is a commutative and associative operation: there are obvious canonical homeomorphisms ■> (X2/x 2) ® (X^x^)

and

(X^,x^) 0 (X2 ,x2) -*

(X^ ,x^ ) ® [ (X2 ,x2) ® (X3 ,x3),bp] ->

t(X^/X^) ® (X2 ,x2),bp] ® (X^,x^); the more general equality

this is also the way we understand

[(X^,x^) ® ... ® (X^_^,x^_^),bp] ® (xn 'xR ) =

- (X1 ,x1 ) 0 . .. ® (Xn ,xn ) . If

(Y.,y.),..., (Y ,y ) are other pointed spaces and 1 1 n n f : X ^ -> Y ^ , ...,f^ : X^ -* Y^ are continuous, base point-preserving maps, then the map

fact(f. x ... x f ): (X.,x.) ® ... ® (X ,x ) -> 1 n 1 1 n n (Y^,y^) 0 ... ® (Y^^y^) is well defined and continuous; we denote it c

by

f . 0 ... 0 f . 1 n

Cones, Suspensions, and Joins 4.

The cone over the pointed space

quotient of the usual cone is denoted by

con(X,xQ).

con X -> con(X,xQ) base point.

con X

by its generatrix

The image of

is the vertex of

con(X,xQ),

The image of the base of

con X -* con(X,xQ)

is the base of

pr(xQ x I) con X

con(X,xQ);

(X,x^)

is defined as

pr(xQ x I),

and

under the projection

and is taken as its

under the projection this projection carries

the first base onto the second one, and thus allows us to identify the base of

con(X,x^) with X. If (Y ,y q ) is another pointed space and

f: X

Y

is

52

continuous, with f (xQ ) = y 0 ' then the maP fact con f : con(X,xQ) con(Y,yQ) is well defined and continuous, and we denote it simply by con f . Equivalently, one may describe space of the cylinder 5.

X x I

by

con(X,xQ)

(X x 0) U (x^ x I).

The suspension of the pointed space

as the quotient of the usual suspension pr(xQ x I),

and is denoted by

under the projection

suX

as the quotient

su X

su(X,xQ) .

su(X,xQ)

(X,x^)

is defined

by its generatrix

The image of this generatrix

is the vertex of

su(X,xQ )

and

is taken as its base point. If

(Y, y^)

continuous, with s u (Y,Yq )

is another pointed space and

f(Xg)

= yQ , then the map

f: X

Y

is

fact su f : su(X,xQ ) -+

is well defined and continuous, and we denote it simply by

su f . Equivalently, we may decribe of the cylinder

X x I

by

su

(X x (0 U 1)) U (xQ x I),

(X,Xq ) 0 (1/(0 U 1) ,bp) = (X,Xq ) ® (s\ort^). description:

as the quotient space

(X,X q )

i.e., as

Another equivalent

su(X,Xg) = con(X,XQ)/X.

6.

The join

of the pointed spaces

(X^ ,x^ )

and (X^fX^)

defined as the quotient space of the

usual join X^ * X^by its

generatrix

denoted by (X^,x^)

image of

pr(x^ x x^

xxi) , and is

pr (x^ x x^ x

* (X2 ,x 2 ) as its base point. -+ (X^,x^)

If f^ : X^ -* Y^

is the center of

(Y^,y^) and

(Y 2 ,y 2)

and

f2 : X 2

(X^x^)

and is taken

The canonical homeomorphism (su (X1 ,x1) ,bp) V (su (X2 fX2) ,bp)

(X^x^)

=

(X2 ,x2),

the

su((X^,x^) V (X2 ,x2 ),bp)

is given by [x € X± ,

m su(S ,ort^) ,

are canonically homeomorphic to respectively.

and

is canonically homeomorphic

immi (pr (x,t) )

m con(S ,ort^) ,

f ^ (x^ )

the maP fact(f 1 * f2> : ( X ^ x ^ * (X2 ,x2) -> d^fined and continuous, and we denote it

bouquet (su(X^,x^) ,bp) V (su(X2 , ^ 2 ) 'bp) to su((X1 /x 1) V (X2 /X2 )/bp).

8.

* (X2 ,x2),

are another pointed spaces, and

For any two pointed spaces

pr (immi (x) ,t)

->

Y 2 are continuous maps such that

= y 1 and f 2 (X 2 ^ = Y 2 'then (Y-j/Y-j) * simply by f^ * f2 . 7.

* (X^,x^ ) • The

under the projection X^ * X 2

I)

is

Dm+1,

and

s m+1,

i = 1,2].

(Sm ,ort1) * (Sn ,ort ) and

s m+n+1f

The canonical homeomorphism su(Sm ,ort

) -+■ Dm+1

is defined

pr ((x1 ,. ..,xm+1) ,t) h- (tXl + (1 -t) ,tx2 ,. ..,txm+1) .

as

Sm+1

The canonical homeomorphism su (Sm ,ort.j ) the generatrix passing through the point XT\^

S

if

with center x = ort^) ;

pr(x,t)

as

(ort^ + x)/2 t

x G Sm onto the circle on

(which degenerates to the point

varies from

0

1,

to

xm+>| ^ 0

ort^

the image of the point

moves uniformly on this circle, starting from

continuing into the half space

transforms

ort^ ,

and

(see Fig. 1). First base

s m+n+1

Finally, the canonical homeomorphism

(Sm ,ort^) * (Sn ,ort^) +

j_s defined on the bases

by the formulas

/

»

(x1 '* * *,Xm+ 1 ) and

and

and maps

/

/-v

a

^

, U , . . . , U ,

x /3 x 2 t• • • r

the generatrix joining the points

the arc of the great circle on x 1,

sn

3x1+1 x /3 x /3 /3(1-x ) 1 ^ m*t" l 1 ( 4 ' ~2 '**•' 2 /0 /---/0 , 4 ) 3X.+1

( x^/ » » * / X^ +^ ) H ' (

and

Sm

sm+n+

x E S™

2

\

/1 /J(xr 1) 9 4 and

'

x 1 E Sn onto

which joins the images of

x

in such a way that the lengths are linearly transformed (see

Fig. 2). 9.

Since

con(Sm ,ort^) = (Sm ,ort^) ® (1,0) (see 4), and A su(Sm ,ort1) = (S (Ort^ 0 (S jort.j) (see 5), the homeomorphisms con(Sm ,ort1) -> Dm+1 n ^ 1

and

su(Sm ,ort.|) -> Sm+1 ,

to the canonical homeomorphisms

defined in 8 , lead for

54

and Dn = (S1 ,ort.) 0 ... 0 (S^ort.) 0 (1,0). v------ ]-----v-----------n- 1 Now one can define the maps id ® ... ® id ® pr: Dn = (S ,ort^) ® ... 0 (S ,ort^) ® (I/O)

->

(s\ort^) ® ... (s\ort^) ® (1/(0 U 1) ,bp) = Sn , and (pr ® ... ® pr ® id I) ° pr:

In = I x ... x i -v

(1/(0 U 1) ,bp) 0 ... 0 (1/(0 U 1) ,bp) 0 (1,0) We denote them by Int Dn whileID

homeomorphically onto

and

fact DS : Dn /Sn ^

Sn

the quotient space

The Mappings

DS

Dn /Sn ^

base point-preserving mapping

Z

in ^

and

preserving mapping, and suppose that ^

n ^ 1 Sn .

C(Y,y0 ;Z,zQ)

X

and

(Z,Zq )

be pointed topologica

is continuous and preserves base = C (X,xQ ;C (Y,y0 ;Z/z0) ,const) given

bythe formula

$ »

(see 10)

^

is continuous.

If

X

and

Y

are Hausdorff and compact, then this mapping is a homeomorphism and its inverse is given by the formula The preimage of under

the mapping

which

shows that

$ h- C(X

(Y,yQ),bp;Z ,zQ)

X

Y , Z)

ip w*

and ip »

ipA ,

and the vertical arrows the composite mappings C(X,xQ ;C(Y,y0 ;Z,z0),const)

in

« C (X,C(Y,yQ ;Z,zQ)) C(ld X,in) ->

---- > C (X,C(Y,Z)) and C ((X,xQ) 0 (Y,y0) ,bp;Z,z0 )

in

> C((X,xQ) ® (Y,yQ> ,Z) ---- ►

C (pr,id_Z) ^ c ^x x Y ,Z). Since this diagram is commutative, the fact that is an embedding implies the continuity of h- » y x E X.

Every

(or connecting f.

f

A map homotopic

to a constant map is also said to be null homotopic. Often a homotopy continuous maps (0 £ t £ 1).

ft : X -* Y,

F:

X x I

related to

Y is interpreted as F

via

ft (x ) = F(x,t)

Acoording to 2.7.6, the continuity of

this family is continuous as a map of thesegment

a family of

I

F

implies that

into

C(X,Y).

Moreover, if X is Hausdorff, then the continuity of the family is equivalent to that of the map F. Obviously, the constant homotopy f: X + Y, given by

F'(x,t) = f (x) ,

connects

F of a continuous map f

to

f;

if the

f

57

homotopy

F

connects

f

to

f',

F' (x,t) = F(x, 1 -t) ,

defined by

F connects f to then their product

then the inverse homotopy, F', connects

f'

f' and the homotopy F ", defined as

to

F'

f;

if the homotopy

connects

F ( x ,2t ),

for

t £ 1/2,

F'(x,2t-1),

for

t ^ 1/2,

f'

to

f",

F M (x, t)

is a homotopy connecting

f

to

f".

Thus homotopy is an equivalence

relation, which yields a partition of called homotopy classes. 2. and

f'

We denote the set of these classes by

be continuous maps of a space x £ X

contained in f

into equivalence classes,

Anexample is the rectilinear homotopy.

If for each from

C(X,Y)

f',

Namely, let

into a subspace

the segment joining

Y, then

to

X

f(x)

F(x,t) = (1-t)f(x)

to

f'(x)

+ tf'(x)

Y

of

f IRn .

is entirely

defines a homotopy

referred to as rectilinear.

Obviously, any two maps of an arbitrary space into Dn

tt(X,Y).

IRn

or

are rectilinearly homotopic. 3.

Let the maps

continuous maps g o f' o h

g: Y -> Y'

be homotopic.

and

X,

h: X'

Then given any

the maps

g o fo h

and

are homotopic. In fact, let

Then

f ,f ': X ■+ Y

g ° F 0 4.

F: X x I -* Y

(hx id I)

be a homotopy from

is a homotopy from

As3 shows, the mapping

induced by two continuous maps

X

homotopy classes into homotopy classes. fact C (h,g) : tt(X,Y) + tt (X',Y ')

g ° f ° h

C(h,g)

h: X 1

f to

: C(X,Y)

and

g: Y

to

f*.

g ° f' ° h.

CiX'/Y1) Y'

transforms

The resulting mapping

is denoted by

ir(h,g),

that it depends only on the homotopy classes of

h

and

and

3

implies

g.

Stationary Homotopies 5. F : X x I ■+ Y A-homotopy if

Let

A

be a subset of the space

is said to be stationary on F(x,t)

= F(x,0)

for all

A

X.

A homotopy

or, simply, to be an

x € A

and

t € I.

Two maps

which can be connected by an A-homotopy are A-homotopic. As with usual homotopy, A-homotopy defines an equivalence relation, dividing the set of continuous maps A

with a given map

f: A + Y,

X

Y

which coincide on

into equivalence classes.

The latter

are called A-homotopy classes or, in full, homotopy classes of continuous

58

extensions of the map

f

to

X.

We denote the set of these classes by

7T (X, A; f ) . Notice that a rectilinear homotopy from is stationary on the set of points where

f

and

f g

to

f*

(see 2)

agree.

If one wants to specify that a certain homotopy is ordinary, i.e.,

not stationary, then one says that it is free.

Homotopy Equivalence of Spaces 6.

continuous map id X

A continuous map f: X -* Y

f ° g

is a homotopy inverse of the g ° f

is homotopic to

is homotopic to id Y .

Acontinuous

has a homotopy inverse is called a homotopyequivalence.

there is a homotopy equivalence Y

X

if the composition

and the composition

map which

g: Y

X

Y,

is homotopy equivalent to the space

If

then one says that the space X.

The following are obviously homotopy equivalences: the identity map of any space, a map which is a homotopy inverse of a homotopy equivalence, and the composition of two homotopy equivalences. Thus, homotopy equivalence among topological spaces is an equivalence relation.

It divides the topological spaces into classes called

homotopy types (instead of saying that one says

also that

X and

Y

Y

is homotopy equivalent to

X,

have the same homotopy type) .

Every homeomorphism is clearly a homotopy equivalence. 7.

If one of the continuous maps g o f: x

and their composition

Z

f: X -> Y

and

g: Y ^ Z,

are homotopy equivalences, then

the other map is also a homotopy equivalence. Indeed, let that of

f g.

h

be a homotopy inverse of

is a homotopy equivalence. Similarly, if

homotopy inverse of 8.

g: Y + Y'

and

7T(X,Y)

g

f o h

and suppose

is a homotopy inverse

is a homotopy equivalence, then

h ° g

is a

f. is a homotopy invariant.

f : X -* X 1

Evidently, if

That is to say, if

are homotopy equivalences, then

7r(f,g): tt(X,Y) -> tt(X',Y')

inverse of inverse of

Then

g ° f,

is invertible. f'

(respectively,

f (respectively, of Tr(f,g).

g) ,

g')

is a homotopy

then the map

tt(f 1 ,g ')

is the

59

Contractible Spaces 9. to a constant map. ]R

and

A space Dn

X

is contractible if the map

id X

is homoto

are examples of contractible spaces (see 2).

10-. A space is contractible if and only if it is homotopy equivalent to a point. If f: D

-> X

id X

is homotopic to a constant map

taking the value

(p(X) ,

inverses of one another: indeed, If now

f:

one another, then 11 .

X

id X

_If

X

and the map

f ° g = (J) and

and

g: X

then the map

g: X

are homotopy

g ° f = id

.

are homotopy inverses of

is homotopic to the constant map

fog.

is contractible, then any two continuous maps of

an arbitrary topological space into id X

cf),

X

are homotopic.

is homotopic to any constant map

X

In particular,

X.

This is a straightforward consequence of 10 and 8 .

Deformation Retractions 12. its subspaces

Aretraction A

p

of a topological space

onto one of

(see 1.4.10) is called a deformation (strong

deformation) retraction if the composition homotopic

X

(respectively, A-homotopic) to

X ■ p-> A id X .

— ►X

If the space

is X

admits

a deformation retraction (a strong deformation retraction) onto A, then A is called a deformation retract (respectively, a strong deformation retract) Obviously, p

of X. if p : X

and the inclusion

A

X

A

is a deformation retraction, then

are homotopy equivalences, each being a

homotopy inverse of the other.

It is clear also that any space which

admits a deformation retraction onto one of its points is contractible, and that every point of a contractible space is a deformation retract of the ambient space.

Relative Homotopies 13.

Let

sequence of subsets

X

(respectively

Y)

be a space with a distinguished

(respectively,

B 1 ,...,Bn >.

A map

60

F: (X x I ,A 1 x I,...,An x I) -> (Y ,B ^ ,. .., connecting the continuous maps if

abs F

is

is evidentthat

connecting the maps

B^.

abs f 1 .

and

In

is a homotopy

Moreover, it is

(X x I,A^ x I,...,An x I) ->

yield an equivalence relation.

This relation divides

into homotopy classes forming a set denoted

tt(X ,A ^ ,...,A ^ ;Y ,B ^ ,...,B^) .

the map

abs f

ab abs f , ab abs f 1 : A_^

C (X ,A ,...,A^ ;Y ,B ^ ,...,B^) by

the maps

ababsF: A^ x I -+ B^

readily seen that the homotopies (Y,B,j,...,B )

is called a homotopy

f,f! : (X ,A^ ,. ..,A^) -* (Y ,B ^ , .. .,B^)

a homotopy connecting

this case, it

)

We may give an analogous definition of

7i(h,g)

from 4. A continuous map

g:

(Y,B^ , .. .,B^) ->

(X ,A^ ,.. .,A^)

to be ahomotopy inverse of the continuous map (Y,B^ ,..., B ^ )

if

g ° f

homotopic torel id Y.

is homotopic to

A continuous map

is called a homotopy equivalence. ( Y , B^,...,B^)

f:

is said

(X,A ^ ,♦..,Ar ) ■>

rel id X

and

fog

is

possessing a homotopy inverse

Two sequences

(X,A^ ,.. .,A ^ )

are said to be homotopy equivalent, or to have

and

the same

homotopy type, if they are related by a homotopy equivalence. Propositions 7 and 8 , as they stand, apply to the case of relative homotopy. 14. X

and Y

The situation discussed in 13 encompasses the case whe

are pointed spaces (in this case

A^and

B

are points,

n = 1 , and the homotopies defined in 13 are just the homotopies stationary at

A^) .

Moreover, the definition of a contractible space

given in 9 extends to pointed spaces (however, the homotopy from to a constant map must be stationary at the base point).

The

true for theorems 1 0 an 1 1 , as well as for the definitions of

id X

same is a

(x and must have the same base point, and the homotopy from the composition deformation retraction and deformation retract, given in 12

X —

A —— — > X

to

id X

must be stationary at this point) .

A

Also,

the remarks in 1 2 remain valid, while the definition of strong deformation retraction is entirely unaffected by the presence of a base point.

2. 1.

Paths

A path in a topological space

of the closed unit interval

I

into

X.

The points

are called the origin and the end of the path termed loops. Given a path

s,

the formula

s.

t k s(1-t)

X s(0)

is any continuous ma and

s(1)

Closed path are also defines a new path,

61

called the inverse of with

s

and denoted by

s 1 (1 ) = s 2 (0 ),

s

_1

.

s^ (2 t ) ,

for

t £ 1 /2 ,

s2 (2 t- 1 ),

for

t ^ 1 /2 ,

s1s2 * Since

of a map

D

Obviously,

I =x i f

-+ X.

and

the formula

defines a path, called the product of the paths denoted by

s1

Given two paths

(s~ 1 ) ” 1 = s

s^

and

s2 ,

and

( s , ^ ) " ^ s2 1 s”1.

and

any path can be considered as a

homotopy

If one adopts such an interpretation, then the

inverse path becomes the inverse homotopy, while the product of paths becomes the product of homotopies. On the other hand, every homotopy between two continuous maps f,f'

: X -> Y

defines a path in

C(X,Y),

joining

f

and

f*

(see

2.7.6), and again the inverse path corresponds to the inverse homotopy, and the product of paths to the product of homotopies.

If

X

is

Hausdorff and locally compact, then a homotopy connecting two maps f,f": X

Y

may be even defined as a path in

C(X,Y)

joining

f

and

f '. 3.

Since any path is a continuous map, it can be also

subjected to homotopies.

Unfortunately, the generally accepted

terminology for such homotopies is not in complete agreement with our definitions in subsection 1 (which are also generally accepted). precisely, when we consider paths,

More

the homotopies and the homotopy

relation are understood always as (0 U 1 )-homotopies (i.e., homotopies stationary at the extremities of the interval relation, respectively.

I) and (0 U 1 )-homotopy

Moreover, a free homotopy of a loop is

understood always as a usual free homotopy whereby the path remains a loop all the time (i.e., as a continuous map F (0,t ) = F (1,t)

for all

3. 1.

F: I x I

X

such that

t £ I).

Connectedness and k-Connectedness The properties of topological spaces we study in this

subsection represent weaker versions of the contractibility in the absolute case, and of deformation retractability in the relative case.

62

Connectedness 2.

A topological space is connected (see the Preface) if

each pair of its points can be joined by a path. connected if the set Since

tt(D°,X)

tt(D°,X)

every

X

is

contains just an element; see 2.2.

is a homotopy invariant, connectedness is

a homotopically invariant property. spaces are connected.

Equivalently,

In particular, all contractible

For example,

3Rn

and

Dn

are connected for

n. For

n > 0,

Sn

is also connected: any two points of

can be joined by a path, which in fact is contained in

S

Sn \ p,

where

p

is a third point (recall that the punctured sphere Sn ^ p is n 0 homeomorphic to 1 ). S is not connected: a path joining -1 and [0 ,1 ],

would be a continuous function on

1

taking two distinct values

but no intermediate ones. The only connected subsets of the real line

are the empty

JR

set, the finite or infinite intervals, the finite or infinite semi­ intervals, and the closed intervals.

Indeed, if

a

exact lower and upper bounds of a connected subset contains the interval 3.

A

of

are the

IR,

then

A

(a, 6).

Given an arbitrary topological space

being joined by a

6

and

X,

the property of

path defines a relation between its points, which

obviously satisfies all the requirements for an equivalence relation . This relation defines a partition of maximal connected subsets of

X,

X

into subsets which are the

and are called the components of

Clearly, the set of components may be identified with denote it by

We

comp X .

Every continuous map

f: X

fact f

= 7T(idD^,f) : comp X -+ comp

replace

f

whenever

(D ,X) .

tt

X.

Y

induces the map

Y .

This map does not change

by an arbitrary homotopic map, and

f

factf

is invertible

is a homotopy equivalence (see 1.4 and 1.8).

plain that if

f(X) = Y,

then

factf (comp X)

= compY .

It is also In particular,

the image of a connected space under a continuous map is connected. 4. subsets

X A2

A^ and Indeed,

contains

also 5.

can be written as the union of two connected with

A^ fl A^ ^ 0,

a component of

A^

and

A^r

X

i.e.,

Consider a partition of

connected subset of

X

then

X

is connected.

which contains a point contains X

x Q € A^n A 2

X.

into open sets.

Then every

is contained in one of the elements of this

whenwe

63

partition.

In particular, every subset of a connected space which is

both open and closed is either empty or the whole space PROOF.

Let

A

be a connected subset of

an element of the partition, such that f: X

which takes

continuous,

f(A)

U

into

1

X,

U n A f 0.

and

X \ U

and let

U

be

Consider the map

into

f(A) = 1

is connected, whence

X.

-1.

Since

f

is

A c u.

and

k-Connectedness r The following properties of a continuous map

6.

with

r ^ 0

are equivalent:

(i)

f

(ii)

is homotopic to a constant map; f

(iii) S

r— 1

f: S

extends to a continuous map the compositions

-homotopic,

where

DS+

and

D

r +1

X;

f ° DS+ , f ° DS_: Dr DS_

X

are the embeddings of

are D

r

in

r S ,

defined by 2

2 1/2

DS+ (x1,...,x )

= (x1 ,...,xr , (1—x 1 — ..>-xr )

DS_ (x ,...,xr)

= (x1 ,... ,xr ,— ( 1 - x ^ ..*“X r)

)

and

(iv)

f

2

2

1/2

);

i_s ort^-homotopic to a constant map.

The proof follows the following scheme: (i) ! l V (iv)

^ (ii)

(iii)

^>"7

(i) =*> (ii) .

A homotopy F: Sr x I

map takes the upper base

of the cylinder

Consequently,

F

Sr x I ■+ Dr + \

defined by

S x I

from

f

to a constant

into one point.

may be expressed as the composition of the map

and a continuous map clear that

X

((x^ ,...,x^ +^) ,t ) h- (x^ (1 -t) ,...,x^ +^ (1 -t)), Dr 1

g:

X

(see 2.3.4 and 1.7.9), and it is

= f.

g

sr (ii) => (iii) continuous extension of ((x^ /• •• and

and f.

) ,t)

(ii) => (iv) .

Suppose

g: D

r +1

X

Then the formulas g(x^,...fxr f(1 ” 2 t)( 1 -x^-... -xr )

)

is a

64

((x1 ,. -./Xr+1) ,1 ) ^ g(t+( 1 -t)x1 , (1 -t)x2, ..., (1 -t)xr + 1 ) define an Sr ^-homotopy an ort^-homotopy

Dr x I -> X

Sr x I -+ X

(iii) =* (ii) . to

from

f

f ° DS +

to

f ° DS_,

and

to a constant map.

f : Dr x I -> X from f ° DS + r takes every generatrix of the cylinder S x i into one

f ° DS_

point. Dr x I

from

An Sr ^-homotopy

Consequently, F can be expressed as the composition of the map Dr + 1 , defined by ((x1 , ...,xr) ,t) n- (x1 , ...,xr , (2 1 — 1 ) (1 -x^— •• •-x^) 1 /' 2 ) ,

and some continuous map clear that

r+ 1 g: D -* X

(see 2.3.4 and 1.7.9), and it is

= f. sr The implication (iv) => (i) is trivial. g

7.

A nonempty space

(0 £ k £ °°) ,

if any continuous map

S

X

is said to be k-connected

X

with

to a constant map, i.e., satisfies condition 6 (i).

r £ k

is homotopic

Theorem 6 shows that

this definition has three more equivalent formulations, based on conditions 6 (ii) , 6 (iii) and 6 (iv). r maps D X which agree on f: Sr

X

such that

f ° DS+ = f

Moreover, since for any continuous r~ 1 S there is a continuous map and

f ° DS_ = f ^ r

we conclude that

a nonempty space X is k-connected if and only if any continuous maps r r” 1 r~ 1 f^,f2: D -* X, r ^ k, which agree on S are S -homotopic. Obviously, for nonempty spaces O-connectedness is nothing else but connectedness. connected.

The

1-connected spaces are usually called simply

Note that a 0-connected space is simply connected if and

only if any two paths with common extremities are homotopic. The homotopy invariance of the sets

tt (S

,X)

implies that a

space which is homotopy equivalent to a k-connected space is itself k-connected.

In particular, every contractible space is ^-connected.

The Relative Case 8.

The following properties of a continuous map

f: (Dr ,Sr ^) -> (X,A) (i)

f

with

r > 0

are equivalent:

is homotopic to a constant map;

(ii) abs f into a subset of A ;

is S

r— 1

-homotopic to a map which carries

D

r*

65

PROOF. homotopy from

f

(i) =* (ii).

If

F: (Dr

l,sr

x

x

I ) -> (X,A)

is a

to a constant map, then the formula

F(x/dist(0 ,x),2 (1 -dist(0 ,x))),

if

dist(0 ,x) 5 (2 -t)/2 ,

F(2x/(2-t) ,t) ,

if

dist(0,x) s; (2-t)/2,

(x,t) H-

r~ 1 2T defines an S -homotopy D 'x 1 -> carries Dr into a subset of A. (ii) => (i) . S

r—1

from

abs f

consider the map

If

G: Dr

X

from

I -> x

x

to a map which

is a homotopy stationary on 2T D into a subset of A,

to a map which carries F: Dr x I -> x

abs f

given by G ((x1 ,...,xr ),2 t),

if

t i

G( (2x1 (1-t) ,...,2x (1-t) ,1) ,

if

t 5 1/2

Then rel F : (Dr x I,Sr ^ x i) constant map.

(X,A)

is a homotopy from

f

1 /2 ,

to a

9. A pair (X,A ) is k-connected (0 £ k £ °°) if for any map r r— 1 r— 1 f: (D ,S ) -* (X,A) with r £ k, abs f is S -homotopic to a map whose image is contained in It is clear

A.

that the pair

if each component of the space

X

(X,A)

is 0-connected if and only

intersects

A.

If

k > 0,

then

(X,A) f:

is k-connected if and only if every continuous map r r— 1 (D ,S ) -* (X,A) with r £ k is homotopic to a constant map; see 8 . A pair which

k-connected.

As a consequence,

deformation retract of (X,A) X,

X,

the

we see that when A pair

is homotopy equivalent to

the pair of

is homotopy equivalent to a k-connected pair is

(X,A)

(X,A) is “-connected;indeed,

(X,X).

It will be clear later that

is already ^-connected if

or even when the inclusion

is a strong

A + X

A

is a deformation retract

is a homotopy equivalence;

see 5.1.6.5.

4. 1. point

A topological space

Xq € X

neighborhood

Local Properties

if each neighborhood V

of

to the constant map

x^

U

of

X x^

such that the inclusion

V -> x^.

is locally contractible at the contains.another V

U

is homotopic

A topological space is locally contractible

if it is locally contractible at any of its points.

66

If we replace in these definitions the homotopies by XQ-homotopies, the we get the definitions of a space strongly locally contractible at the point locally contractible space IRn , Dn

and

x^,

X

which is

and of a strongly

X.

Sn

are examples of strongly locally contractible

spaces. 2. Xq E X V

of

U.

A topological space

if each neighborhood Xq ,

U

X

is locally connected at the point

of

Xq

contains another neighborhood

such that any two points in

V

can be joined by a path in

A topological space is locally connected if it is locally connected

at any of its points. It is clear that a locally contractible space is locally connected.

As an example of a connected space which is not locally 2

connected we may take the subset of m^x^ + m 2 x 2 ' 3. of

with

m -j

an(^

m2

]R

consisting of the lines

integers.

A space is locally connected

its open sets are open.

if and only if the components

In particular, in a locally connected space

every neighborhood of an arbitrary point contains a connected neighbor­ hood of this point. PROOF. subset of Then in

U V

X,

A

Suppose that

X

a component of

is locally connected, U,

contains a neighborhood

V

can be joined by a path in

and of

U.

Xq E A Xq

Hence

U

is an open

an arbitrary point.

such that any two points V c A

and

x Q E IntA .

This proves that in a locally connected space the components of the open sets are open.

5. 1.

A topological pair

topological space

Y,

(A,B)

f |^'

Let

is a Borsuk pair if given any f: X -+ Y,

there is a homotopy

and any homotopy X x i -* y

is a topological triple such that

are Borsuk pairs, then 2.

(X,A)

(X,A,B)

(X,A)

any continuous map

F: A x I Y of the map which extends F. If

Borsuk Pairs

(X,A)

(X,B)

be a topological pair. X x i.

(X,A)

f

and

is obviously a Borsuk pair.

to be a Borsuk pair it is necessary that

a retract of the cylinder is also sufficient.

of

When

A

Then in order for (X x 0) U ( A x i)

be

is closed, this condition

67

PROOF OF THE NECESSITY. in: X = X x 0 -> ( X x O )

u

Any homotopy of the map

(Ax I )

in: A x I (X x 0) U (A x I) onto ( X x O ) U (A x I).

which extends the homotopy is a retraction of the cylinder X x I

PROOF OF THE SUFFICIENCY. be a retraction. map f: X -* Y, composition

G

p:XxI+(XxO)U

Then given any topological space and any homotopy

X x I -P-* ( X x O ) where

Let

F: A x I

y

Y,

(A x I)

any continuous

of the map

^[a *

the

U (A x I) -iL, y,

is defined by f(x) ,

if

t = 0,

F (x ,t) ,

if

x G A,

G(x,t)

is a homotopy of 3. way.

I_f

f

which extends

The following statement completes Theorem 2 in an essential

X

is Hausdorff, then the assumption that

is a retract of the cylinder closed. that

X x I

(X x 0) U

(A x I)

implies automatically that

A

is

Indeed, it suffices to note that the above hypothesis implies

(XxO)

U ( A x I)

isclosed in

is the preimage of this 4. Xand

F.

setunder the

If the sets

(A,A

fl B)

A

and

B

X x I (see1.5.5), map X

X x

i,

and that

x *+ (x,1).

form a closed cover of the space

is a Borsuk pair, then

(X,B)

is also a Borsuk pair.

This is a consequence of 2; in fact, any retraction p:

I -> [ A

A x

x 0] U

[

(Afl B) x

x i

(x x 0)

'p(x, t) ,

if

x e A,

(x,t),

if

x e b.

defines a retraction

X

I]

U (B x

i) by

(X,t)

5. (Z x x ,Z x a )

If

(X,A)

is a Borsuk pair and

A

is closed, then

is a Borsuk pair for every topological space

PROOF.

If

p

is a retraction of the cylinder

Z.

X x I

onto

(X x 0) U (A x i), then id Z x p is a retraction of the cylinder (Z x X) x I = Z x (Xxl) onto [(Z x X) x 0] U [ (Z x A) x I] = = Z x [ (X x 0) U (A x I) ] .

A

68

Borsuk Pairs and Deformation Retractions 6.

If

(X,A ) is

a Borsuk pair and theinclusion

ahomotopy equivalence, then

A

is a deformation

7T: X

A

be a homotopy inverse of

PROOF.

Let

A

retract

X is

of X . the inclusion

A X. Extend the homotopyfrom 71 |^ “ 71 ° in: A A to id A to a homotopy of the map tt ; this yields a homotopy from tt to a retraction of X

X

onto

A,

which we denote by

A —— — > Xis homotopic to

is also homotopic 7. (X

to A

lf_

xI , (x x 0) U

id X ,

f: X x i X

x

(x x 1 ))

p

X —

A— ^ — >X

is adeformation retraction. X

and

is a Borsukpair,

then

A

is a

X.

p : X -> A

be a homotopy from

A — — — > X.

, thecomposition

and thus

strong deformation retract of Let

id X

Since the composition

is a deformation retract of

(A x i) u

PROOF.

p.

be a deformationretraction, id X

and let

to the composite map

Define a homotopy

g: [(X x 0) U (A x i) u (X x 1 )] x i

x

by f x, g((x,t1 ),t2) =

|f(x,(1-t2 )t1), I f(P(X),1-t2),

and extend it to some homotopy G :

if

t1 = 0 ,

if

x E A,

if

t 1 = 1,

(X x I) * I -> X

f: X x i ->■ x. It is clear that (x,t) h- G((x,t),1) A-homotopy Xx I ->• x fromid X to in ° p. 8.

I_f

(X,A) is

retract of the space equivalence. PROOF.

a Borsuk pair and B

A, then the map

rel: (X,B)

Consider a B-homotopy from

of a strong deformation retractionA -> B

id A

of the map yields

is a strong deformation (X,A)

Now extend it to a homotopy

G of

(X,A) -+ (X/B),

is a homotopy inverse of

x » G(x,1),

is a homotopy

to the composition

and the inclusion

id X .

an

B

-»■A.

It is clear that the map rel.

69

Local Characteristics of Borsuk Pairs 9. Y

Suppose that

is any topological space, and

given

anyhomotopy

there is an

is a Borsuk pair with f: X

Y

Let G

f

(x,t) *-> G(x,tct>(x))

be a homotopy

of

U

to a map which

(X,A)

of_

A

takes

is distinguishable

U

Then

of

A,

F. f

extending

X\ U, A.

F, and let

Then the formula

defines an (X^U)-homotopy of

I_f

neighborhood

normal,

is any continuous map.

extending

be anyUrysohn function for the pair

10.

X

F of the mapand any neighborhood

(X^ U )-homotopy of

PROOF.

(J)

(X,A)

f

extending

F.

is a Borsuk pair, then there exists a such that the inclusion

U

into a subset of

(in particular, if

X

U

A.

X

.is A-homotopic

Iif Xis normal

is metrizable and

and A

A

is

closed), then this condition is also sufficient, i.e., the converse of the above statement is valid. PROOF

OF THE NECESSITY.

a retraction, then the set a(x,1) € A x (0,1]

U

If

of

all

a: X x i

(X x 0) U (A x I)

points x E X

is

with

is open, and the composition pr

U

x I —

— > X X I

— £-* (x X 0) U

is an A-homotopy from the inclusion into a subset of PROOF let

(J): X

I

distinguishes

U X

I)

---- -— > X

— » X X I

to a map which takes

U

A. OF THE SUFFICIENCY.

A-homotopy such

(AX

that

F(x,0) = x

Let and

:

F

f(x,1) E A

be a Urysohn function for the A

(see 1.5.9).

Ux I

x

be an

for all x E U, pair

A,X

^ U,

and which

The formula

fF (x ,min (t/c{) (x) ,1 )) ,

if

x E U ^ A,

if

x E A,

G (x ,t) = < x, defines amap continuous. H: X x I

G:

U x I -> X ,

This in X x I

and Theorem

2.2.14 shows that

G

is

turn implies the continuity of the map

defined by (G (x ,max (0 ,t-(|> (x) )) ,max (0 ,t-2(J)(x) )) ,

if

x E U,

H (x ,t ) =

(x ,0) , It is readily seen that

if

x E X \ U.

H(X x I) = (X x 0) U (A x I)

and that

70

(x x0) U (A x i)

ab H :X x i

11. Let

(X,A )

is a retraction.

be a topological pair such that

A

is a

strong deformation retract of one of its neighborhoods.

If

normal and

is metrizable

and

A

is distinguishable (in particular, if

Ais closed), then

(X,A)

X

X

is

is a Borsuk pair.

This is a corollary of 10. 12. If V

of A,

(X,A)

there is another neighborhood

and the inclusion a subset of

W -> V

A-homotopy W

F:

x E U. in

x

W c= V, the

U

W

of

A,

W c= v

such that

is A-homotopic to a map which takes

W

into

A.

PROOF. By all

is a Borsuk pair, then given anyneighborhood

10, there exists a neighborhood U

U x I -+ X

such that

F(x,0)

= x

and F(x,1)

Now 2.2.13 shows that every point with

F(W x i)

F(W x I) c V. x c v, and that

inclusion W -> I 13.

I_f

X

Set

of

x E U

Aand an EA

for

has a neighborhood

W =U

W . It is clear that xEA x ab F : W x I -> v is an A-homotopy from

to a map which takes

W

into A.

isa topological space and

EX

issuch

that

(X,x)

is a Borsuk pair, then

If

is normal and locally contractible at a distinguishablepoint

X

then

(X,x)

X

x

is strogly locallycontractible

at

x. x,

is a Borsuk pair.

This is a consequence of 12 and 10.

6 . CNRS-spaces

1.

A subset

A

neighborhood retract of hoods in X.

of atopological space X

if

A

X is said

tobe a

is a retract of one of its neighbor­

The retracts and the open sets are trivial examples of neighborhood retracts. 2.

rf

A

is aneighborhood

neighborhood retract of Indeed, let in

Xt

A,

then

p: U -> A

and let a: V -* B

X and

B

is a

is a neighborhood retract of

be a neighborhood retraction for

be a neighborhood retraction for

Then a° (p |w): W B, where retraction for B in X. 3.

B

retract of

w = p_1 (V) ,

B

in

X. A A.

is a neighborhood

A topological space is a CNRS-space or, simply, a CNRS,

if itis compact

and can be embedded in a Euclidean space (of a certain

71

dimension) as a neighborhood retract; CNRS is the abbreviation of compact neighborhood retract of a sphere. Dn

and

Sn

4.

A compact neighborhood retract of a CNRS is a CNRS.

This is

are obvious examples of

CNRS’s .

a resultof 2.

5. The image of any embedding of a CNRS in a normal space is a neighborhood retract. PROOF. normal space g(X)

Let

Y,

f: X +

Y

and let g: X + TRn

is a neighborhood retract of

f ^ = [abf: X

f (X) ]

and

g ° f .^: f(X) ^ nRn is clear that

f^

° g^

U= h

-1

(V)

f(X)

into

X

in the

such that p : V -> g (X)

is closed (see 1.7.9), h: Y + JRn

is a neighborhood of f(X)

> 0 such that any two maps,

e

X

and let

U

f

(see 1.5.12).

,

and that

onto

Given anycompact neighborhood retract

a number Y

Since

CNRSX

Further, consider

o p o [abh : U -> V ] is a retraction of 6.

space

JRn .

extends to a continuous map

1

It

be an embedding of

g^ = [abg: X + g (X) ] ,

be a neighborhood retraction.

is

be an embedding of the

and

f (X) .

X

of

JRn ,

there

g,

of an arbitrary

which satisfy

sup^EY dist(f(y),g(y)) < e are homotopic. set where

f

Moreover, one may choose a homotopy stationary on the and g

PROOF. that one

agree.

Let

may take

e

a: U + X

be a neighborhood retraction. We show

to be the

distance between

X

and

HRn ^ U

(which is positive by 1.7.15). Let f,g: Y X be continuous and satisfy SUPyEY dist extremities maps

Y —

(y) '9 (y) ) < f(y) and g(y) X —^ — > U

and

Y —2-» x —— — > U

F: Y x I -* u,

rectilinear homotopy a ° F : Y x i + x

For anY Point y C Y, the segment with the lies in U. Consequently, thecomposite

7.

if

and it is plain that

is a homotopy from

is stationary on the set where A

f

can be connected by a

f

and

to g

g.

Furthermore,

a ° F

is

agree.

is a neighborhood retract of

a CNRS

X,

then

(X,A)

is a Borsuk pair. PROOF.

Let

o:

U+ A

X

as a neighborhood retract of

V

the neighborhood of

for which

A

in

dist (x,a (x) ) < e,

be a neighborhood retraction. Consider ]Rn X

and pick

e

as in 6 .

Denote by

consisting of all the point

and let

be the composition

x E U

72

CM tt V Then

>A

— ► X.

dist ((J)(x) ,x) < c

the inclusion

V

X

for

x £ V,

and

is A-homotopic to

G(x,1),

id X

Let us check that

Consider the homotopies

rel fact G : ( (X/A)

x l,pr(A) x I ) -*

Thefirst connects the maps

rel id X, rel g : (X,A) + (X,A) while the second connects the maps rel id (X/A) , rel fact g: (X/A,pr(A)) -+(X/A,pr(A)). It is clear that = [relfactg:

[rel g : (X,A)

(X/A,pr(A))

(X,A)]

[ rel fact g : (X/A,pr (A) ) = [relpr:

(X,A)

(X,A) ] = ° [relpr : (X,A)

(X/A,pr(A))]

and

(X/A,pr (A) ) ] =

(X/A,pr(A))] o [relfactg:

(X/A,pr(A)) -> (X,A)].

Attachings 8.

I_f

homotopic, then the spaces equivalent. f: X 2

(X^ ,C) X^

is a Borsuk pair and X^

and

X^ U , X^

such that the following diagram is commutative:

imm. X,

2

PROOF. maps

are homotopy

Moreover, there is a homotopy equivalence

X^ ■+ X^ U , X ^

and let

(a2 (t1 ,t2)) = G (f o F(y,t2 ),t1);

2

p2

with

a^(0 ,1 ) = A 2,

Further, for

y E Y

Y

76

J

dime. dime, |_(D 1 X D 2)

= (2 )

dim e dime, , 1 v ^ 2 = (J |_D 1) x (J [D ) ~Cha • * Cha- > Xl x x2 , where the first map is the sum of the canonical homeomorphisms dim(e^xe2)

dime^

D

D

dim e 2 x d

1

(W),

.

Since

p^

and

P2

satisfy condition

2

the maps cha and cha are factorial (see 1.3). Furthermore, dim e 2 since | |D and X are locally compact (see 4.3), the map cha

1

2

x cha

is factorial too (see 1 .2 .7.9), which in turn implies that

the composite map (2) is factorial. x P2

Therefore, the decomposition

has property (W ) . 4 (INFORMATION). X2

X^

and

of

cells, then

If every point of each of the cellular spaces

has a neighborhood which intersects only a countable family X. x 1

c

X, = X. x Z

x, ; see z

1

[6 ] for

aproof.

Attaching 5.

Consider two cellular spaces X^

and

X2 ,

a subspace C

of X ^ , and a cellular map tp: C + X^- According to 1 .2 .4 .8 , X2 U(p X 1 is a well-defined topological space, while 2.3 and 1.2.4.9 imply that X 2 Ucp X 1

and

imm2 e 2 ,

norma-*-where e^

respectively, and put

Now decompose X 2 X^ into the sets imm^e^ and e 2 run over the cells in X^ \ C and X2 ,

dim(imm^e^)

= dim e^

and

dimiimir^^)

= dim e 2 •

This is a cellular decomposition: as a characteristic map for

imnue^

one may take the composition of an arbitrary characteristic map

chae i

with imm^e^

imitK.

Clearly, the only cells that the closure of the cell

intersects are either

intersecting

Cl e^ ,

or

imm^e^,

imir^^'

where

where e^

is a cell in is a cell in

X2

X^

96

intersecting

(p(Cle^

fl C) .

Moreover, we see that

Cl imm2 e 2

intersects only the cells imm2 f:2 , where is X 2 “ a ~ cell in “ “2 Consequently, our decomposition has property (C). intersecting Cl e 2 To see that it has property (W) too, let F be a subset of X,2 Utp X,1 The having closed intersections with all the cells in X U X,

- X^ , (j) : X^ limit

lim(Xk ,(f)k )

Xq,X^,...

X2 ,...

X^ \

into the sets ),

are cellular embeddings.

By 1.2.4.4, the

is a well-defined topological space, which is also

normal (see 2.3 and 1.2.4.6 ). lim (X^, (f)^)

are cellular spaces and

Now consider the decomposition of

imm^e^,

k = 0 ,1 ,...,

where

e^

is a cell in

dimiimm^e^ ) = dim e, . If we k take the composition of an arbitrary characteristic map cha with ek imm^ as a characteristic map for the cell imm^e^, we see that this

decomposition is cellular. and (W) ,

lim(X^,c()k )

and put

Since it obviously satisfies conditions

becomes a cellular space, and

imm^

(C)

become

cellular embeddings. Notice that this definition of the limit includes as a special case the inductive process of glueing a cellular space from balls that we discussed in subsection 2 .

97

More Special Constructions 7. and

Inti

Since decomposing the segment makes

I

0, 1 ,

X;

see 2 and 3.

X x I

The bases of

are cellular subspaces (in the sense of 1.9); hence when we pass

to the quotient space su X

into the cells

into a finite cellular space, the cylinder

is cellular for any cellular space X x I

I

of

con X ,

con X

of

X x I,

and then to the quotient space

we find ourselves in the situation covered by the

construction 5. Therefore, the cone and the suspension over a cellular space are also cellular spaces. If

f: X^

which transform

X^

is a cellular map, then the attaching processes

X^ x I

into

Cyl f , and

again into the category described in 5.

con X^

into

Con f

fall

Therefore, the mapping cylinder

and the mapping cone of a cellular map are cellular spaces. 8 .The

and

X2

X^

X^

of

[(X. X

X,)

two cellular spaces

is defined as X- * 1

where

cellular join

(p:[ (X1

c

X = (X.I 2

|X_) U

1 -— L 2

(p

C

Z

cp(x1 ,x2 ,1) = in2 (x2);

cellular, the space

*c X 2

According to 3, when topologically the same as

x I],

xc x2> x 1 ] ^ x -\ I Ix 2

xc X 2) x 0] U [ (X^

(p(x1 ,x2 ,0) =

1

is g iven by

cf. 1.2.6.3.

Since

ip is

is cellular. is locally finite,

X^

X^ * X2 -

X 1 *c X 2

is

In general, the cellular

decomposition of X^ *c X 2 is cellular for X 1 * X 2 too, and so the cellular weakening of the topology of X^ * X 2 yields X^ *c X 2> However, this process does not affect the topology of the compact subsets of

X^ * X2 ;

cf. 2 .

The Case of Pointed Spaces 9.

Suppose that

X

that we take as a base point. su(X,Xq)

are quotients of

they are cellular spaces.

is a cellular space and The cone

con X

and

c o n ( X , x Q)

su X

xQ

is a 0-cell

and the suspension

by subspaces, and as such

Similarly, the bouquet of a family of

cellular spaces with 0 -cells as base points is the quotient of the sum of this family by a subspace, and hence is a cellular space.

98

Finally, we define the cellular cellular join of the cellular spaces and

x^taken as

base points,as

( X 1 Xc X 2 ) / f

respectively.

(X1

tensor product and the and

X 2 withthe 0 -cells

x^

the quotient spaces

x x2)

u (x1 X x2)]

and

(X1 * c

X2 ) / / ( x 1 *

X2 ) f

(X^,x^) ®c (X2 ,x2>

These are cellular spaces, denoted by

and

(XwX.) * (X„ ,x ) . If X. is locally finite, then they are 1 1 C 2. 2. 1 identical with (X1 ,x1) ® ° * Thus ' ®c (X2 'x 2> and (X ^ ,x ^)*c (X2 ,x2) arise from the cellular

weakening of the topologies of (X^,x^) * (X2 ,x2),

(X^,x^) 0

respectively,

and it

(X2 ,x2) and is clear that

this process

does not affect the topology of the compact subsets of (X1 ,x^)

® (X2 /X2) and (X^,x ^)

6.

1.

Show

arbitrary point

x

Exercises

that given an arbitrary cellular space

X

£ X,there exists a cellular space

together with

a cellular homeomorphism 2.

* (X2 ,x2>.

f: X + Y

Show that the sphere

such that S°°

Y

and an

f(x) E ske^Y.

and the ball

D°°

are homeo-

morphic to cellular spaces. 3.

Show that every connected, locally finite cellular space

can be topologically embedded in 4.

CO

IR .

Show that every connected, finite dimensional, locally

finite cellular space can be embedded in 3R^, 5.

for large enough

Show that every finite cellular space admits a cellular

embedding in a cellular space homeomorphic to

,

for large enough

INFORMATION. Every finite celular space of dimension be embedded in a cellular space homeomorphic to D 2n+\ 6.

q.

Consider the bouquet

space (see 5.9) homeomorphism.

B = Vt ^

and show that the map

(I =i,0)

id: B x^b

n

as a cellular

B x b

is not a

q. can

99

§2.

1.

(r ^ 0)

SIMPLICIAL SPACES

Euclidean Simplices

1 . Let A be a subset of ]Rn consisting of r +1 points which are not contained in any (r-1)-dimensional plane. The

convex hull of

A

(i.e., the smallest convex set containing

called the Euclidean simplex spanned by The points of number

r

A

Esi A

Obviously, a point of Esi A

A, and is denoted by

are the vertices of the simplex

is its dimension.

Esi A ,

is

EsiA .

and the

is also called a Euclidean r-simplex.

Esi A

is a vertex if and only if

contains no nondegenerate segment whose midpoint falls on the

given point.

Therefore, the set

A

Every simplex spanned by the simplex for any

EsiA .

is uniquely determined by a subset of

It is clear that

A

EsiA .

is called a face of

Esi A^ DEsi A^

= Esi(A^ D A^) ,

A^ ,A^ cz A. Two faces spanned by complementary subsets

A

A)

are said to be opposite. pr (x1 ,x2 ,t)

A^

and

A^

of

In this case, the formula

(1-t)x^ + tx 2

x 2 £ Esi A^ ,

(x^ € Esi A^ ,

Esi A^ * Esi A^

t € I)

defines a homeomorphism of

the join

onto Esi A .

Thus,

every Euclidean simplex is

canonically homeomorphic to the join of any

of the pairs of its opposite faces. Since with

p +q = r - 1

the spaces

Esi A

Dr

is canonically homeomorphic to any join

(see 1 .2 .6 .9), a trivial induction proves that both and

Drare homeomorphic to a join of

r+1

We conclude that every Euclidean r-simplex is homeomorphic to It is clear that the boundary of the simplex

Esi A

points. D . in the

r-plane that it determines is precisely the union of its (r-1 )-faces. Usually, this boundary and its complement in

EsiA

to as the boundary and the interior of the simplex 2.

are simply referred EsiA .

We may equivalently describe the simplex

set of all sums

£a£A t&a ,

where

t& ^ 0

there is no (r-1)-plane containing uniquely for any point

x =

A,

^aa?

and

as the

l a £ A t& = 1. Since

the numbers ^a

EsiA

ta are determined ca-*-^ec^ ^he a-th bary -

100

centric coordinates of x and is denoted by bar a (x). — . —.— -- -—. . Obviously, a face Esi B of the simplex Esi A in the barycentric coordinates of for

a E A \ B.

Moreover, if

EsiA

by the equations

EsiB EsiA

i.e., equal to

is the center of the simplex

and takes

3.

A map

A

into

Esi A B.

-+ Esi B

EsiA .

is called simplicial if it is affine

It is clear that such a map takes each face of

simplicially into a face of

Esi A

onto the interior of the simplex which is its image. Obviously, every map Esi A

Esi B .

bar a (x)

coincide for all a E B. having all barycentric coordinates equal,

Esi A

map

bar^ (x) = 0

x E Esi B , then the coordinates

computed in EsiA and The point of 1/(r+1),

is defined

Esi B ,

A -+ B

If the given map

then its simplicial extension

Esi A

and takes the interior of

extends uniquely to a simplicial A

B

Esi B

is injective (invertible), is an embedding

(respectively, a homeomorphism). 4. ordered.

EsiA issaid to be an ordered simplex

Since the subsets of

if the set

A

is

an ordered set inherit a natural order,

all the faces of an ordered simplex are ordered simplices. If orders of

A

EsiA and

and B

EsiB

are ordered r-simplices, then the

define an invertible map

simplicial homeomorphism

EsiA

-* EsiB .

A + B,

and hence a

Consequently, all ordered

Euclidean simplices of the same dimension are canonically simplicial homeomorphic. 5.

The simplex spanned by the points

is called the unit r-simplex and is denoted by

ort ,...fOrt^ Tr .

of

r +1 3R

This simplex is

notable due to the fact that its barycentric coordinates are the usual r +1 T" coordinates in IR . The given order of its vertices transforms T into an ordered simplex, and thus every ordered Euclidean r-simplex is canonically simplicial homeomorphic to

T .

Mote that given an ordered simplex Esi A , the homeomorphism r EsiA -+ D discussed in 1 is now canonical. The canonical homeor r morphism T -* D and its inverse are denoted by TD and DT, respectively. That TD maps the boundary (the interior) of r— 1 r S (respectively, onto IntD ) is plain.

Tr

onto

Topological Simplices 6.

of dimension

A topological space r

X

is an ordered topological simpl

(or an ordered topological r-simplex) if there exists

101

a homeomorphism of the simplex

Tr -> X; X,

of the simplex. ball

D

jc

this is called a characteristic homeomorphism

while

X

is sometimes referred to as the support

For example, all ordered Euclidean r-simplices and the

are ordered topological r-simplices; see 5. The standard way to detroy an order is to introduce

simultaneously all possible orders. topological space

X

Accordingly, we say that the

is a topological simplex of dimension

r

(or a

topological r-simplex) if there are given (r+1 )! homeomorphisms r r T -> X , which can be transformed into each other by simplicial homeor r morphisms T -+ T . The terms characteristic homeomorphism and support are employed in this situation too; however, now we have at our disposal (r+1 )!

equally rightful characteristic homeomorphisms. If

X

is a topological r-simplex (an ordered topological

r-simplex), and X

Y

Y

transforms

is a topological space, then every homeomorphism Y

into a topological r-simplex (respectively, into

an ordered topological r-simplex). image of a Euclidean r-simplex

Consequently, every homeomorphic

(ordered Euclidean r-simplex) is a

topological r-simplex (respectively, an ordered topological r-simplex). The vertices, faces, boundary, interior, barycentric coordinates, center, and simplicial maps are defined in an obvious fashion for topological simplices.

The faces of a topological simplex

(ordered topological simplex) are topological simplices (respectively, ordered topological simplices).

As with a Euclidean simplex, a

topological simplex becomes an ordered one as soon as we fix an order of its vertices.

2.

Simplicial Spaces and Simplicial Maps

1 .

A triangulation of a set

X

topological simplices such that: (i) every face of an arbitrary simplex in simplex in

A

of

is again a

A

A;

(ii) A,

is a cover

if a simplex in

A

is contained in another simplex of

then the first is a face of the second; (iii) the intersection of the supports of two overlaping

simplices of

A

A set

is again the support of a simplex in X

A.

endowed with a triangulation is known as a

simplicial space; the simplices of the triangulation are called simplices of the space, and the O-simplices are its vertices.

The

smallest simplex in the triangulation which contains a given point

X

by

102

x E X

is denoted by si x . According to 1.2.4.3, a triangulation transforms the given set

into a topological space, and 1 .2 .4.1 shows that the supports of the simplices of the triangulation yield a fundamental cover of this space. Since the intersection of two simplices in the triangulation is closed in each of them, the simplices in the triangulation keep the same topology when considered as subspaces of this topological space (see 1 .2.4.2) . Let

a

be a vertex of the simplicial space

X.

Then the

a-th barycentric coordinate

bar (x) is well defined for any point x a belonging to any simplex which has a as one of its vertices (see 1 . 2 and 1.6), and we obtain a continuous function bar (x) = 0 a not have a

for those points

x G X

bar : X -> IR if we set a contained in simplices which do

bar_ is called the a-th barycentric function. a Given two arbitrary distinct points x,y E X, there obviously is a

vertex

a

as a vertex.

such that

bar_ (x) f bar_ (y). a a

Consequently, every simplicial

space is Hausdorff. When a set

X

endowed with a triangulation already has a

topology, it is useful to find conditions ensuring that the topology defined by the triangulation is identical with the initial one. have an immediate necessary and sufficient condition:

We

the topology of

each simplex in the triangulation coincides with the topology induced by the initial topology of

X,

and the cover of

X

by the supports of

these simplices is fundamental in the initial topology.

If this

condition is satisfied, then the given triangulation is said to be a triangulation of the initial topological space

X.

Example: the cover

of a topological simplex by all its faces is a triangulation of this simplex. A simplicial space is ordered if its simplices are ordered in such a way that the orders of the faces of any simplex agree with the order of the simplex itself.

In particular, this holds whenever the

order of the simplices is induced by some order on the set of all vertices of the given space, which incidentally shows that a simplicial space can be always ordered. 2.

We shall presently describe a fundamental class of

simplicial spaces.

Given an arbitrary nonempty set

A,

we let

Si A

denote the set of all nonnegative, finitely supported functions $: A IR such that with the subset of Si A

^ = ^ ^ B c: a , then we identify consisting of all functions £ Si A

such that

x £ A \ B.

(x) = 0

elements, then

Si A

for

If

A

is finite and has

Si B

r +1

is obviously a topological simplex: indeed,

Si A

103

is a subset of the (r+1)-dimensional Euclidean space of all functions A + JR.

Moreover, corresponding to the

(r+ 1) i

homeomorphisms

(x^ ,.. ./xr + ■ Y

Every injective simplicial map is a

ske^Y Y.

f: X ^ Y

is uniquely defined

from the set of vertices of

A map

ske^X ->• ske^Y

X

into

extends to a

if and only if it carries the vertices of each

into the vertices of a simplex of

Y.

is injective (invertible) if and only if

A simplicial map ab f : ske^X

ske^Y

is injective (respectively, invertible). Two simplicial spaces which can be transformed one into another by a simplicial homeomorphism are said to be simplicial homeomorphic. 6.

A simplicial map

f: X

simplicial spaces, is monotone if a

and

b,

of X

Y,

where

f(a) < f(b)

X

and

Y

are ordered

for any pair of vertices,

which belong to the same simplex and satisfy

a < b.

Every simplicial map between simplicial spaces can be made monotone by suitably ordering the spaces.

Moreover, if

X

and

Y

are

105

simplicial spaces and simplicial map

Y

is ordered, then one can transform a given

f: X -+ Y

into a monotone one my suitably ordering

X;

indeed, it suffices to order arbitrarily the preimage of each vertex of Y,

and then order the simplices of

f(a) < f(b)

or

f(a) = f(b)

3. 1. M

A

is a set and

and

contains, along with each set scheme that map

(M',S ')

(,0)

by $ .

of

Obviously,

the scheme d> and

into

(p: M

( M ^ S 1)

$

($,$)

all the parts of

M'

(M,S)

(A) £ S'

for all

into

AGS.

is invertible and

is called an isomorphism.

(M,S)

If

0(S) = S',

Two simplicial schemes

which can be related by an isomorphism are isomorphic. A simplicial scheme (M ',S 1 )

scheme

complete if

if

A G S ’

2. simplices of A

and

X

X

A c= M

S c=s'. imply

and the cover of

For example, the scheme of The map X*

A

(M,S) is

AGS.

ske^X

Si A

ske^X

of a

by the 0-skeletons of the X

(see 2.2)

and is denoted by consists of the set

by all its finite subsets.

ab f : skeQX + skeQX'

induced by a simplicial map

takes the 0-skeleton of each simplex of

0-skeleton of a simplex of sch X * ,

The subscheme

is termed the scheme of the space

and of the cover of

f: X

and

is a subscheme of the simplicial

The simplicial scheme given by the skeleton

simplicial space sch X .

M c M'

(M,S)

X*.

X

into the

Hence it defines a map of

called the scheme of the map

f

and denoted by

schX schf .

into The

discussion in 2 . 5 implies that a simplicial map is uniquely determined by its scheme, that every map of some simplicial map

X -* X',

sch X

into

sch X '

is the scheme of

for any simplicial spaces

X

and

X*,

and that a simplicial map is invertible if and only if its scheme is an isomorphism.

In particular, two simplicial spaces

simplicial homeomorphic if and only if their schemes

X

and schX

X’ and

are sch X '

are isomorphic. 3.

If

X

is a subspace of the simplicial space

X',

then

106

sch X

is a subscheme of

if

is complete.

X

sch X 1

s c h X 1 ,and

sch X

is complete if and only

Moreover, it is clear that every subscheme of

is the scheme of a subspace of X*. In particular, let (M,S) bean arbitrary simplicial

and consider the simplex schSiM,

and so

(M,S)

SiM .

Obviously,

(M,S)

scheme,

is a subscheme of

is the scheme of a subspace of

Si M .

Thus,

every simplicial scheme is the scheme of a simplicial space.Moreover, given an arbitrary simplicial space scheme of

X

A simplicial scheme

orders of the subsets of a < b.

(M,S)

and

X

to be the can be

Si ske^X . (M,S)

are ordered and the order of each set schemes

we may take (M,S)

and conclude that every simplicial space

simplicially embedded in 4.

X,

A.

(M',S!)

is ordered if the sets of is compatible with the

A f. S

A map

(,$)

S

between ordered simplicial

is monotone if

by

■ { ij=! i S ' i

" 1



All that remains is to verify that if x = (x„,...,x ) and cf 1 q +1 X' = (x^,...,x’+1) belong toskenT4 and f(x) =f (x'), then x = x ’. Since each of the points x and x' lies in an n-dimensional face of q T , at most n+1 ofthe numbersx. ,... ,x ., and n+1 ofthe numbers 1 q+ 1 xi x'+ r are different from zero. Consequently, no more that 2n+2 numbers

x^-x^,...,x^+^-x^+^

j-,'••• »j2n +2

positive integers x-j = X'

for

j f

j,

i =

= °' Jr

The determinant of the matrix x. = x * . Dr

for

i|:]

i 1 «}

{

1 = 0 ,...,2 n+ 1 .

L 1 —U

r = 1 f...f2 n +2 f

3 (INFORMATION).

f 10 —

r- 2n+2

I

and finally

For any

n

does not vanish, and x = x*.

there are n-dimensional

polyhedra which cannot be topologically embedded in is

and

1 ,..., 2 n + 1 , we have

j r (xi Jr

so

such that

j2nt2.

¡? :i

for

are different from zero, i.e., there are

ske T2n+2; n

An example

see [10] for a proof.

5. 1.

IR2n.

Simplicial Constructions

Many of the topological and cellular constructions

described in§ 1.2

and Subsection 1.5

can be replaced by parallel

constructions which produce simplicial spaces out of simplicial ones. The simplest examples are the

J

and

V

operations: a sum of

simplicial spaces and a bouquet of pointed simplicial spaces with vertices as base points are obviously simplicial spaces.

There are also

more elaborate constructions, the more important ones being discussed below.

The main one is the barycentric subdivision construction, which

refines triangulations and has no analogs in § 1.2 and Subsection 1.5. 2(LEMMA). space

X by

Let

T

be a fundamental cover of the topological

triangulated subspaces.

the intersection

A 0 B

Suppose that for any

is a complete subspace of both

(considered as simplicial spaces) and inherits from

A

A,B €

r

A

and

B

and

B

the

108

same triangulation.

Then there exists a unique triangulation of

relative to which the elements of This triangulation of

r X

X

become simplicial subspaces.

is simply the union of the

triangulations of the elements of

r.

One may check directly that this

union satisfies conditions (i), (ii), and (iii) in 2 . 1

[the completeness

of the intersections

Uniqueness is

A n B

is necessary for (iii)].

also evident.

Barycentric Subdivision 3. baX , X

The construction below produces a new simplicial space,

from any simplicial space

X,

such that

b aX

is identical to

as a topological space, but has a finer triangulation, called the

barycentric subdivision of the initial triangulation. Consider first a Euclidean simplex numeration

a,*,...,a O r

of the vertices of

{x E X I bar

a_

(x) £ bar

0

a„

X,

X.

For an arbitrary

form the set

(x) X .

a correct definition, i.e., the triangulation of

X

This is clearly

thus obtained does

not depend on the choice of the simplicial homeomorphism the (r+1 )! available ones. Finally, let consider the cover of

X X

Tr ,

Tr

X

among

be an arbitrary simplicial space, and by its simplices, each subdivided as above.

It is easy to verify that this cover satisfies the conditions of Lemma 2, and hence we obtain a new triangulation of

X,

which is precisely

the barycentric subdivision of the initial triangulation of

X.

109

We note that the barycentric subdivision transforms a finite (locally finite) simplicial space into a finite (respectively, locally finite) one.

Moreover, if

4.

X

is a polyhedron, then so is

The set of vertices of the space

the set of centers of

the simplices of

X.

ba X

baX .

equals exactly

The centers of the simplices

S1'**‘'Sm °f X are the vertices of a simplex of ba X if and only if S1'*‘*'Sm Can be reindexed to form an increasing sequence. This observation enables us to give a concise description of the barycentric subdivision in the language of schemes: sch ba X = (S,ba S) , finite parts of

S

where

ba S

if

sch X = (M,S),

is precisely the collection of those

that can be ordered by inclusion.

we obtain a canonical

order of

whenever the simplex (of with center a ’.

ba X : if

X) with center

X*.

ba X 1

is a complete subspace of Indeed,

sch ba X

a

sch ba X

whenever

X

f: X

ba X'

X* = t \

f (ort^ ) = ort^ , f (ort^) = f(ort^) = ort^) . sch X'

naturally induces a map ba X

ba f

monotone.

and is clearly always rf

X

of the simplices of

ba X *

X

times

ba X

the map

.

take

2

X = T ,

However, the sch ba X

Thelatter is

sch ba X ', denoted by

does not exceed the maximal diameter

n/(n + 1) ,

It is enough to show that if bigger than

X',

sch ba X ’.

is a polyhedron, then the maximal diameter of the

simplices of the polyhedron

with vertices

is a subspace of

is not simplicial (the simplest example:

and hence a simplicial map

5.

shows that

is clearly a complete subscheme of

f: ba X

sch f : sch X

a < a1

then

is contained in the simplex

In general, given a simplicial map

map

At the same time,

a,a’ € skeQba X ,

In particular, the above description of baX

then

where X

n = dim X .

is the Euclidean simplex

a«,...,a , then the diameter of the simplex (2 ) is no O r [r/ (r+1)]diamX . Consider the part X ’ of X defined by

the inequality

bar

(x) ^ r/(r+1). X' is the Euclidean simplex ar obtained by contracting X towards the vertex a^ by a factor of r/(r+1).

Consequently,

that

contains the simplex (2).

X'

6

(COROLLARY).

is a positive integer bamX

diamX'

has diameter

m

< e.

s?

[r/(r + 1 )]diam X ,

For any polyhedron

X

and we finally note

and any

e

> 0

there

such that every simplex of the polyhedron

110

Simplicial Products 7. and X^

dim X^ X2

If

X^

and

are

>0 , then it is

simplicial spaces with

readily seen that their cellular product

does not admit a triangulation such that the interiors of its

simplices are products of interiors of simplices of However, we shall presently show that

X2

X^

X^

X^.

X^

and

X^

This construction produces a simplicial space out of

called the simplicial product of To begin with, let

X^

X^

and

an ,...,a ,

and let

X,

vertices

bg,...,br .

Set for

x^ G X^

U

q

= ^ =0 bara ' k

“i^l*

nondecreasing sequence

(x^ ,x2> G X^ x x 2

and

JRn

qr

,

q

in a

Further, let {1 ,...,q+r},

elements of

denote the set of all points

such that each of the numbers

^p^x i'x 2 ^'

yQ (x^) ,...,Yq _ 1 (x1) .

is equal to one of the numbers

with

x^ G X^:

Y-j (x^ ,x2) , .. .,y^ +r (x^ ,x2) .

y G M

with

6 j (x2 ) = ^ 1 =0 barb 1 (X2 )' J 1

denote the collection of subsets with where

IRm

a 0 (x1 ),...,a^_^(x^),6 0 (x2 ),...,6 r_^(x2)

and arrange the numbers

s(y),

X^ x^ x ^ -

be the Euclidean simplex in

Z

are

X^ xc X2 ,

and denoted by

X^,

be the Euclidean simplex in

vertices

and let

and

admits triangulations,

and we shall construct a canonical triangulation when ordered.

dim X^ > 0

P £ U/

One may check

directly that there is no (q+r- 1 )-dimensional plane containing the q+r +1 points (aQ /bQ) /• ••t (an ,b • — -j) 7 J1

(a1 ,b. 1

(a.,b. _n)?

Ji

1

1

J9

z

:3>

(aq-i ,bj q- ( q- i ) ] ' ' ' ' ' (V i ' bj q- q); (aq'br) '

(aq'b j - q *

where

G y, ^

j-j < •••< j

Also,one may verify that

jk + r (k+1)

k =0 l =i -k[Yk+l + 1 (X1 ,X2 ) Jk for

.

(x1 fx2) € s(p),

Tq+r +i (x i/x2^ =



jQ = 0 ,j^ +1 Moreover,

" Yk + 1 (x1 ,x2 )] (ak'bl ) = (xi'x 2 ] = q +r + 1 ,

Yq (x^,x ^ )

=

and

and

Yp+ 1 ,$).

We defineScyl f

sch f

sch Scyl f = (M1 I |M ,S) ,

where

i

sets

A c M 1J [M2 such that:

(ii)

(Min” 1 (A)) U in2 1 (A)

in” 1 (A) E $ (S 1) ; a2
Scyl f .

sch

Scylf

in2 ° (a),

induces

1)

M 1J_[_M2

acertain map

sch (X„ x I) -* sch Scyl f, and hence a simplicial map X 1 * I -> Scyl f . 1 S I S Clearly, together with the inclusion X 2 -+■ Scyl f , this simplicial map

114

yields a continuous map a continuous map

csc f : Cyl f

csc f (Cyl f ) = Scyl f , rtf : Cyl f -► X^ partition

(X^ x I )J Scyl f .

zer(csc f) .

Moreover, we see that

and that the canonical retraction Also, the canonical

Cyl f

elements of the partition

zer(csc f)* zer(id I)

composition of the inclusion obviously equals

f.

Scylf

X^ -> Scylf

homotopy equivalence if and only if

Stars.

Links.

s

which

st s

s.

in a simplicial space

contain s.

which

Clearly,

(x) > 0 ,...,bar

sis the union of

a q

Sts

or

sts

or

the interiors

st(s,X).

It is

> 0,

(x)

are the vertices of

do not intersect

lk s

is the

X.

Notation:

The link of the simplex Sts

Notation:

X

is the open set defined by the inequalities

0

aQ ,...,a^

is a

Regular Neighborhoods

The open star of the simplex of all simplices containing

s.

s

Moreover,

is the union of all simplices in

s.Notation:

is a subspace of

C i s t s = Sts .

Iks or

the spaces X

lk(s,X).

and

Sts .

The following are obvious facts. If

s'

is a face of

s,

then

St s 1 c s t s ,

st s' c st s ,

If

are vertices which do not sit in the same

a^,...,a^

simplex,then the intersection aQ,...,a u ^

lk s 1 c Iks .

sta,

are vertices of a simplex

s,

is empty. then

q n r n st a . = st s . i=0

If

l

X

is

is a homotopy equivalence.

is a subspace of

where

with this retraction ->Scylf

St(s,X).

Sts

rtf

and the

X^f

the inclusion X^

X

an

Consequently,

Scyl f

union of all simplices of

bar

.

X^

f

1. The star of a simplex Clearly,

id(Cylf)

is constant on the

We conclude that the inclusion

always a homotopy equivalence, whereas

6.

X^-homotopy from

^ ^ > X^ — — — ► Cyl f

strong deformation retraction

readily seen that

which in turn induces

(see 1.2.6.10) is constant on the elements of the

to the composite map defines a

Scyl f ,

is a subspace of

s t (s,X) = st (s,X *) n X

X*,

then

However,

if

115

for any simplex

s

of

X.

Moreover, if

St(s,X) = St (s ,X 1) n X

and

X

is complete, then

lk(s,X) = lk(s,X') fl X.

Finally, if s 1is a simplex of

lk(s,X),

then

lk(s' ,1k(s,X)) = lk(s",X ) , where

s"

is

the smallest simplex containing s

2.

s f.

We can extend the definition of the star, open star, and

link to points of a simplicial space St(x,X ) , the open star are defined as St x

stx

= St six,

Obviously,

for x £ X,

= st(x,X),

st x

stx

X:

= stsix,

and lk x

is a neighborhood of

pr (y ,t) ^ A

h: U x I

U

U.

of a

with

st(a,X)

with

is a deformation

In fact, there is even a

from

id U

with the inclusion

1 - t

A

A

to the composition of

A -> U .

This homotopy is given

barb (x) bar (x) I a bEske^A -, bar, (x) b bEske^A

if a £ ske^A,

bar (h(x,t)) = < a t bar (x) , a

if

a £ skenX \ ske A. u u

In particular, this shows that every subspace of a simplicial space

X

is a deformation retract of its regular neighborhood in

ba X

(see 5.4).

Barycentric Stars and Barycentric Links 6 . The barycentric star of the simplex

space X

s

is the union of all simplices of ba X

first vertex the center

of

s. Notation:

equivalent description:

bsts

bsts

of a simplicial

which have as their or

bst(s,X).

is the set of all points

An

x £ X such

that bar (x) = bar, (x), a b

if

a,b £ s D skenX, U

bar (x) 5 bar, (x) , a b

if

a G ske_X, u

and b G (X \ s) D skenX. u

It is clear that the barycentric stars of the simplices of cover

X

whenever

and are subspaces of s f

s',

and

bsts

baX .

Moreover, bst s f

c bsts'

whenever s o s'.

7. The union of those simplices bst s

bst s'

which do not contain the center of

of the barycentric star s

is the barycentric link

X

118

of the simplex

s,

and is denoted by

blk s .

The star

bsts

is

clearly simplicial homeomorphic to the cone over

blk s .

the rectilinear projection from the center of

induces a homeomorphism

of

blk s

onto the link

lk s

barycentric subdivision of simplicial one). (con Iks,Iks)

of the simplex

lk s

(bst s,blk s)

Let

f: X

Y

A simplicial map f

if

g: X

g(x) £ sif(x)

canonically homotopic to

f:

X

joining

f(x)

x

I

2.

and

g(x).

a

of

PROOF. f,

and let

x £ X

x £

x £ X; st a^ ,

g: X Y

x £ st a .

if

g(x)

Y

sif(x) ,

3.

from

of the

is a simplicial approximation

if and only if

g

f(sta)

c= stg(a)

for

is a simplicial approximation

Recalling that

g(x) £ si f (x) ,

that

g

is

vertex

lies in the interior of a simplex with Thus,

g(a)

f(sta)

aQ ,...,a

whence

Therefore, the points g (aQ),...,g(a ) ,

x x I

Y

is

g(x) = f(x).

u

is a vertex of

c stg(a)

for every vertex

are the vertices of

g(aQ),...,g(a )

and since

si f (x) ,

si f (x) ,

and a

of

then

4

f (x) e f (ni=o s t a ±) c ni=0 flsta.)

simplex

I

x

lies in the interior of a simplex with

Now suppose that q

where

Assume first that

we conclude that

Pick

Y

X.

vertex g(a) (see 1.3). hence f (x) c: stg(a). X.

X

f: X

It is clear that this homotopy is stationary

f: X

simplicial, and that x a,

Y are

x £ X.

of the map

the canonical homotopy

A simplicial map

of the continuous map every vertex

and

is a simplicial

for any point g

X

onto the (possibly degenerate) rectilinear segment

on the set of the points

of

Y

is an affine mapping from each generatrix

cylinder

(and the

and

be a continuous map, where

Every simplicial approximation g

X

Simplicial Approximation of Continuous Maps

approximation of

to

in

transforms this homeomorphism into s

Therefore, the pairs

simplicial spaces.

f

s

are homeomorphic.

7. 1.

s

Moreover,

g(x)

■ Y

of simplicial spaces has a

simplicial approximation if and only if for each vertex

a

of

X

there

119

is a vertex

b

of_

Y

such that f(sta)

cr st b .

The necessity of this condition is an immediate consequence of

2.

To prove

f(sta)

its sufficiency, fix a map

cp: skeQX -+ skeQY

c st (p (a )for every vertex

vertices of a simplex of

demonstrate that

0 such that, given any subset with

diamA

< e,

stars (see 1.1.7.16). bamx

and,

of a finite simplicial spac

Without loss of generality, we may assume that polyhedron constitute

that

(see 6.1),

applying 2 , this extension is a simplicial approximation of

X

such that

have

Let

f(A) m

e /2

(see 5.6).

Then

the diameter of its star is less than

f: bamX -> Y

e,

given any vertex and 3 shows that

has a simplicial approximation.

8.

1.

open

belarge enough so that the simplices of

diameters less than

bamX,

is contained in one of these

Let

X

Exercises

be a simplicial space.

Show that the formula

dist(x,y) = [ I (bar (y) - bar (x) ) 2 ] 1 ^ 2 a€skeQX defines a metric on

X,

and verify that the resulting metric topology

coincides with the initial topology if and only if 2.

Show that for every polyhedron

triangulation of

IRn

X c IRn

is locally finite. there is a

by Euclidean simplices, relative to which

becomes a simplicial subspace of 3.

X

IRn .

Show that every connected, locally finite, .n-dimensional

simplicial space can be simplicially embedded in

IR

triangulated

by Euclidean simplices. 4.

X

Let

f: X

Y

be continuous, where

X

and

Y

are

120

simplicial spaces.

Produce a new triangulation of

following two properties:

a)

X

with the

each of its simplices is contained in

one of the simplices of the original triangulation;

b)

f

has a

simplicial approximation relative to the new triangulation.

§3.

HOMOTOPY PROPERTIES OF CELLULAR SPACES

1. 1.

Suppose that

subspace of zero on

X.

A

Cellular Pairs

Let

X

is a rigged cellular space and

h ^ : A U ske^X -+ I

and equal to

1

a sequence of functions

on

is

denote the function equal to

(A U skeQX) \ A ,

h^_: A U ske^X

hr-1 ^

A

I

and define inductively

(r = 1,2,...),

'

such that

if

x E A U sker_^X,

if

x = chae u,

by the formula

if

x € U

if

x = cha (ty ),

Fr (x,t) cha (((1 —t)i + t)y), where

e G cell^X ^ cell^A,

homotopies

Gr :

x I

u,

i

E (0,1],

r

>. Î ,

and

Fr (x,2 rt- 1 ) ,

if

Gr- 1 (Fr (x,1),tl'



Each homotopy

Gr

an A-homotopy

U x i -> u

r- 1 '

y G Sr ^ .

Now construct

by if

Gr (x,t) =

A -*■ X,

0 g t £ 2 r, t < 2~r+1 ,

2 rt1

i t c 1-

extends the preceding one, and together they yield from

id U

to a map which takes

The compression of the last map to a map

U

A

U

into

A.

is the desired strong

deformation retraction. 3.

Every cellular pair is a Borsuk pair.

This is a consequence of 2 combined with 1.3.5.11, because cellular spaces are normal, and their subspaces are distinguishable. 4.

If_

(X,A)

is a cellular pair and the inclusion

is a homotopy equivalence, then of

A

A

X

is a strong deformation retract

X. In order toprove this,

to the

pair (X,A),then apply

(X x I , to the

3 and1.3.5 . 6

firstapply theorems

Theorem

(X x0) U (A x i) u (X x 1 ))

3 to the pair

and, finally, apply Theorem1.3.5.7

pair (X,A).

Cellular Pairs and k-Connectedness 5. (X,A)

Let

k

be a nonnegative integer or

is a cellular pair such that all the cells in

dimension at most

k,

topological pair.

Then every continuous map

f(A)

B

and let

(Y,B)

X ^ A

°°.

Suppose that

have

be an arbitrary k-connected

is A-homotopic to a map which takes

f: X X

Y

such that

into a subset of

B.

In particular, every continuous map of a k-dimensional cellular space

122

into a k-connected topological space is homotopic to a constant map. PROOF.

We exhibit a sequence of A-homotopies

{f ^ : (A U ske^X) x I -*

each extending the preceding one, and

satisfying the conditions: (i) F^(x,0) = f(x) (ii)

for all

x £ A U ske^X;

F ((A U skerX) x (1-2~r-1)) c: B; —

(iii)

F (x,t)

Then the map (A U ske^X) x i

does not depend upon F : X x I ->Y

will be

homotopy of

f|A ,

for t

which equals

ahomotopy fromf

into a subset of B. We proceed by induction.

t

to a

Define



F^ on map which takes

F_^

and assume that homotopies

1

^ 1- 2

X

as the constant F_^, . . . '

each

extending its predecessor and satisfying (i)-(iii), are already constructed. Fg =



If

A U ske X = X and we simply take q So suppose now that q < k. Since the pair

({A U ske^X) x homotopy

q > k,

then

I,(AU ske^_^X) x I)

G of the

map f|AUsk

Using the fact that

x,

B,

for each cell

he

there is a

suchthat

G|

^ x) xl = Fq_., .

a map

e £ cell

k-connectedness of the pair e £ cell^X \ cell^A,

(see 3),

q (Y,B)

h^:

->Y

the formula S^ 1

which takes

X \ cell A. Now take advantage of the q to deduce that, given any cell

there is an S^ 1-homotopy

to a map whose image is a subset of

B.

x i -y y

from

We put

F .(x,t), q- 1

F (x,t) = M.

(AU

F . ( (A U ske .X) x (1-2 q )) c B, q- 1 q- 1

he (y) = G (cha^ (y) ,1-2defines into

isBorsuk

if

x £ A U ske

.X, q- 1

G (x,t) ,

if 0 sc t £1-2-q,

He ba a

is simplicial and h (t) c f (k ) c h (a). Since B => Sr , f. is 2~ y I y y \ S -homotopic to f, and to complete the proof of our lemma it suffices to examine (I) and (II) for f r a t h e r than f. Consider an arbitrary ball 6 X

According to

f: ske^X x i -> x

to a map which takes ske^X

into

A.

from

Define

127

F:skekX x I

i + xby

x

C=

Ffx,^,^)

=

ffx,^),

and set

(skekX x i x 0) U (skekX x (0 U 1) x I) u (skekA

x Ix i)

and D = ske. X x i x 1 . k Obviously,

C

skekXX 1 X

I 'and the map Y=

and

D

F

is cellular.

Y

Y

and

B

is a cellular space, and it is clear that

containing

skekY.

To verify that imm2 (A)

have the same homotopy type, note that retract of B and fact, the formula

Now define Y

imm2 (X)

by

b = imm2 (A) U imm1 (D).

X Up j (skekX x i x i),

By 1 .5.5, a subspace of

are subspaces of the cellular space

(X,A)

and

is

(Y,B)

is a strong deformation

is a strong deformation retract of

(imm1 (x,t1 , 1 ) ,t) h- imm1 (x,tt1 , 1 )

B

Y.

In

t,t1 £ I],

[x €skekX,

-

(imm2 (x),t) h- imm2 (x) defines a homotopy

t £ I],

B * I -»■ B,stationary on

B ->- imm2 (A) .

a retraction

[x € A,

imm2 (A) ,

from

id B

to

Similarly, the formula

(imm1 (x, t^ ,t2) ,t) h- imm1 (x,t1 ,tt2)

t,t 1 ,t2 £I],

[x £ skekX,


Y ,stationary on

Y -> imm2 (X).

a retraction

[x £ X,

(Y,B)

from

id Y

(Y,imm2 (A))

(see 1.3.5.8 )

to

is

and

and it remains to observe that the pairs

(imm2 (X),imm2 (A)) 2.

imm2 (Y),

Consequently, the pair

homotopy equivalent to both the pairs (imm2 (X),imm2 (A)),

t £ I],

and

(X,A)

are homeomorphic.

Every k-connected cellular space

(0 £ k £

°°) is homotopy

equivalent to a cellular space whose k-skeleton reduces to a point. PROOF. 0-cell

xQ

in

lular pair A

X.

(X,A)

is contractible,

and 1.3), and 3. Y

Let

X

be a k-connected cellular space and choose a

The pair such that Y

(X,xQ)

is homotopy equivalent to a cel­

A => ske^X

(see 1).

Set

has the same homotopy type as

it is clear that

ske^Y

Y = X/A. Since X(see 1.3.7.7

is just a point.

Theorem 2 says nothing about the dimension of the space

which replaces the given space

that one can always choose

Y

X.

However, its proof demonstrates

to satisfy

dimY

£ max(dim X ,k +2).

Our

128

k = 0

next task is to prove that for sharpened to

dimY

(see 6 ).

- dim X

4 (LEMMA).

r

: Y

If id Yv

Vi nV then the formula

Y

00

be a topological space, and let iY^^^ =q 0 whenever k - 1 > 1 . be a fundamental cover of Y such that yk n y i If Y, „ D Y, is a stronq deformation retract of Y, for all k > 1 , — k- 1 k ^----------------------k — — — — then Yn is a strong deformation retract of Y . PROOF. from

Let

the last equality may be

x I

is a homotopy, stationary on k

to a map which takes

y G Y, J k

if

into

Yk - 1

n Yk ,

t £ 2

and

(y /1 ) F i ( F 1 +1 ( ... F k (x,1 ) ...,1),2 t-1 ) ,

if

y € Y. J k

2 1 a t < 2 1+1

defines an Y^-homotopy into

Y x i

y

from

id Y

and

(1

S k),

to a map which takes

Y

Yq . 5.

Given any connected cellular space

contractible one-dimensional subspace of PROOF.

X

Fix an arbitrary 0-cell k

1-cells.

x^

Since

there is a

containing all the 0-cells. in

the set of all 0 -cells that can be joined to which touches at most

X,

^0

ske^X

X

and let

by a path

Now given any 0-cell

closed 1 -cell

c (x)

joining

x E A^ \ Ak-1 x

k ^ 1,

to some cell in

O'

if

k = 0,

if

k > 0,

I

be t ske^X

is connected (see

1.4.7), and a path can touch only a finite number of cells, = ske^X.

A^

k- 1

U k =0 Ak pick a

k- 2 '

and set

Yk = U

c (y) ,

y e A k'Ak-i and

uu

Y = Uk=Q Yk .

containing

skeQX,

Obviously,

and the cover

of Lemma 4. Therefore, YQ i.e., Y is contractible. 6.

Y

is a one-dimensional subspace of {Yk }

of

Y

X

satisfies the conditions

is a strong deformation retract of

Y,

Every connected n-dimensional cellular space is homotopy

equivalent to a cellular space of dimension at most only one 0-cell.

n,

and having

In particular, every connected one-dimensional

cellular space is homotopy equivalent to a bouquet of circles. This results from 5, 1.3, and 1.3.7.7.

129

Applications to Cellular Constructions 7. su(X,Xq),

If the cellular space

where

xQ

X

is k-connected, then

su X

and

is a 0 -cell, are (k+1 )-connected.

The proof reduces to three remarks.

First, since

su X

and

have the same homotopy type (see 1.4.5, 1.3.6 .8 , and 1.3. 7. 7),

su(X,xQ)

the (k+1 )-connectedness of one is equivalent to the (k+1 )-connectedness of the other. verify that if

Secondly, according to 2 and 1.3.7.12, it is enough to su(X,xQ)

ske^X = X q ,

is (k+1)-connected when

ske^X = x Q .

then the (k+1)-connectedness of

s u

is a

(X,X q )

corollary of Theorem 2, because under this assumption

And thirdly, 1 su(X,x )

ske,

k+f

u

also reduces to a point. 8.

a 0-cell of and

Suppose X^,

X^

is a k^-connected cellular space and

i = 1,2.

(X.,x ) 0 (Xn ,xn) 1 1 c 2 2

Then the tensor products

is

(X^,x^) 0 (X^^x^)

are (k +k +1)-connected. ---------1 2

Again, the proof reduces to three remarks. (X^,x^) ® (X^fX^)

x^

First, since

induces on its compact subsets topologies which are

identical to those induced by the topology of

(X^,x^)

(X^fX^,

the

(k1 +k2 + 1 )-connectedness of one of these spaces implies the (ki+k2 + 1 )-connectedness of the other. it is enough to verify that

(X^,x^)

Secondly, using 1 and 1.3.7.12, (X^/X^)

is (k^+k2 + 1 )-connected

when

skev X = x and ske, X = x 9 . Thirdly, under these k^ 1 1 .K2 circumstances, the (k1 +k2 +1 )-connectedness of (X^,x^) ©c (X2 ,x2) follows from Theorem 2, because

skek

reduces to a point. 9 (LEMMA). 0 -cells (XwX„) 1 1

x^ * C

®c (X2 'x 2>)

also

^ and X 2

For any cellular spaces

with

and x 2 taken as base points, the cellular join (X0 ,x„) is homotopy equivalent tosu((X„,x„) ®_ (X0 ,x0 ),bp). z

PROOF. su((X 1 ,x1) ©c

z ------------ — 1 1

I I

By definition, the spaces

(X2 ,x2 ),bp)

(X^x^)

are obtained from

C

z

*c (X2 ,x2>

z

and

(X1 x^ X2> x I by taking

quotients two times, and the projection (X1 xc x2^ * 1 -> su ( (x^ ,x ^) ©c (X2 ,x2 ),bp) is constant on the elements of the partition

zer (pr:(X., xc x2 ) x I -> ^

, x ^ ) *c

(X2 ,x2)). The resulting

map f = fact [pr: (X1 : su((X

xc x2 ) x I -v(X1 ,Xl) *c (X2 ,x2)]: ®c (X2 ,x2 ),bp) -> (X1 ,x1 ) *c (X2 ,x2 )

130

is factorial (see 1.2.3.4). zer(f)

Since the only element of the partition

which does not reduce to a point is

-1

(bp), we see that

(X2 ,x2 ),bp) = [ (X1 /X1 ) *c (X2 ,x2)]/f 1 (bp) .

sudx^x^ note that

f

f_ 1 (bp) = [(X ,x.j) *c (x2 ,x2 >] U [ ( x ^ x ^

Finally,

*c (X2 ,x2 )],

and

since this union is contractible, the quotient space [(X.jjX.j) *c (X2 ,x2)]/f 1 (bp) (X1 'x 1 > *c (X2 'X 2 )* 10. Letthe

cellularspaces

respectively k^-connected. (X1 ,x^ ) * (X2 ,x2), and 0 -cells, are

is homotopy equivalent to

X^

X 2 be

and

Then the joins

X^ * X2 ,

(X1 /x 1) *c (X2 ,x2 >,

and

X^ *c X2 , x1

where

k^and

x 2 are

(k^ +k2 +2 )-connected.

The proof reduces to four remarks.

First, since

(X1 fX1) * (X9 ,x9) i s a q u o t i e n t of X * X 9 by a c o n t r a c t i b l e s p a c e 1 1 C Z Z I c z (the closed 1 -cell x^ * x 2), (X^,x^) *c (X2 ,x2 ) and X^ *c X 2 have the same homotopy type.

Secondly,

subsets the same topologies as does

X^ *c X 2

induces on its compact

X^ * x 2 ,

and hence the (k^+k2 +2 )-

connectedness of one of these spaces implies the (k^ +k2 +2 )-connectedness of the other.

(X ,x^) * (X2 ,x2)

Thirdly, and from the same reason,

(ki+k 2 +2 )-connected if and only

if (X^,x^)*c (X2 ,x2)

is (k^+k2 +2 )-

Fourthly, the (k^+k2 +2)-connectedness of

connected.

is

(X^,x^) *c (X2 ,x2)

is an immediate consequence of 9, 8 , and 7.

4. 1

Simplicial Approximation of Cellular Spaces (LEMMA).

00

Suppose that

X

and

Y

are cellular spaces and

OO

r r=0 and Let f : X Y

r r=0 are filtrations of X and Y be a cellular map such thatf (X^) c: Y^

If all the maps

ab f : xr ^ Yr

PROOF.

Since the

by subspaces. (0 £ r £ «>) .

are homotopy equivalence, then so is = Cyl(abf : X^ + Y )

f.

are cellular sub­

spaces of Z = Cyl f and satisfy the conditions Z cz Z „ and i r r +1 U n Z = Z, they yield a filtration of Z (see 1.1.9). Thus, the k image of any continuous map D Z is contained in one of the sets Z^

(see 1.2.4.5),

and so the pair

(Z,X)

is «-connected provided that

all the pairs

(Z ,X ) are ^-connected. Now note that (Z ,X ) is r r r r »-connected if and only if ab f : X^ Y^ is a homotopy equivalence; similarly,

(Z,X)

is “-connected if and only if

equivalence (see 1.3, 1.6, 1.3.3.9, and 1.3.7.13).

f

is a homotopy

131

2. Given any cellular space

X,

there is a simplicialspace

which has the same homotopy type and the same dimension as X ,and finite or countable together with X . The proof

consists of producing three sequences:

simplicial spaces r•

{Y }

1 00

Yr + 1 J

11 :

{fr * . skerX

,

one of

one of simplicial embeddings

and one of cellular homotopy equivalences

Yr }r_Q, (l)

,

is

with the following four properties:

fr|ske X = lr-1 ° fr-1; ' r- 1

(ii)

dim Yr = dim ske^X ;

(iii)

if

ske^X

is finite (countable), then

Y^

is finite

(respectively, countable); (iv)

if

ske X = ske .X, r r- 1

then

Y

r

= Y

. r- 1

and

i . r- 1

* l dYr - 1 • This will enable us to define the simplicial space having dimension

dim X ,

well as a cellular map

and finite or countable together with

f : X -> lim(Y ,i ) r r

Finally, we shall use Lemma 1 to show that Define

Yq

and

that simplicial spaces simplicial embeddings constructed for ske

„X U A, cr-1 cp

r < where

limfY^i^)

f^

Y , ir_'| '

as

ske^X

X,

as

fI , = imm 0 f. sKe x. r 1 r is a homotopy equivalence.

such that f and

id ske^X ,

and assume

cellular homotopy equivalences

f^,

and

satisfying (i)-(iv), are already

q. By 1.2.1, we may represent A = II n v (D = Dq ) J— Letcell qX e

and

ske^X as cp

is a continuous

map of

Z = I I , -- v (S = Sq“1) into ske X. Next triangulate - — Le€cell X e q-1 q A so that Z becomes a complete subspace and the map ° ^ : ^ ^ Yq-1 admits a simplicial approximation g: E -> Y .. Further, order Ya _ 1 q i Si 1 and £ in such a manner that the map g becomes monotone. Applying c

successively Theorems 1.3 .7.10, 1.3.7. 8 , and then again 1.3.7.10, we obtain three homotopy equivalences: a homotopy equivalence aqrees with ^

f . q- 1

on

ske

A ske X -* Y . Uf q q 1 q - 1 >■ Scyl g ]

inclusion

which

Yq_i ;

and a homotopy equivalence where

which

Yq_i Ug ^

(Scyl g)

(see 2.5.11), whichagrees with

Y _1 Scyl g on Y . q i vi At last, we may define Y

M

as

(Scyl g)

U. A,

f

A, the

^1

as

the

132

composition of the three homotopy equivalences above, and

as the

composite embedding

A

of the cylinder

i q * Scyl g -> Y ^ . The triangulations of

Scylgyield together a

2.5.2).

It is plain that

Y , f , q q

and 3.

countable.

(see q -*-s a simplicial embedding and that

PROOF. X

Y

i „ satisfy conditions (i)-(iv) for r = q. q-1 Let X and Y be cellular spaces with X finite and Then the settt(X,Y)

case when

triangulation of

and

and

Y

is countable.

By theorems 2 and 1.3. 1.8, we need only consider the Y

are simplicial spaces.

Theorem 2.4.7 shows that the cardinal of

Under this assumption,

tt (X,Y )

cardinal of the set of all simplicial mappings

does not exceed the

bamX

Y

(m = 0 ,1 , . ..) ,

and the latter is obviously countable.

5. 1. equivalent,

Exercises

Suppose that the cellular spaces i = 1,2.

Show that

X^ x^ x 2

and

X^

and

Xjj ^

equivalent, and that the same is true for the spaces

X^ x^

are homotopy are homotopy

X^ *c X 2

and

X i *c X 2 " 2. Show that every cellular space is homotopy equivalent to a locally finite cellular space. 3.

Show that every cellular pair is homotopy equivalent to

a simplicial pair, and that every finite cellular pair is homotopy equivalent to a finite simplicial pair. 4.

Show that there is no cellular space having the same

homotopy type as the subspace of the real line consisting of the points 0 and 1 /n, n = 1 ,2 ,... .

Chapter 3. Smooth Manifolds

§1 .

1. 1.

Topological Manifolds

This chapter comprises an elementary introduction to

differential topology. manifolds.

FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS

The basic objects of this theory are the smooth

They are defined in the next subsection and represent (as do

cellular and simplicial spaces) topological spaces with an additional structure.

The present subsection is devoted to topological manifolds,

which occupy

an

intermediate position between smooth manifolds and

topological spaces, and do not carry an additional structure.

Locally Euclidean Spaces 2.

A topological space is said to be a an n-dimensional

locally Euclidean space if each of its points has a neighborhood homeomorphic to the space

]Rn

or to the half space

]R^,

where

]R^

is the

set of all points (x„ ,...,x ) G ]Rn with x>, £ 0. The half space ]Rn " I n I is defined for n ^ 1 ; we do not define it for n = 0 and, accordingly, a 0-dimensional locally Euclidean space is simply a topological space such that each of its points has a neighborhood

homeomorphic to

]R^,

i.e., a discrete space. In a locally Euclidean space neighborhood homeomorphic to

IRn

X,

the points having a

are called interior points,

remaining ones are called boundary points.

while the

The interior (boundary)

points form the interior (respectively, the boundary) of the locally Euclidean space

X,

denoted by

ference between the notations

intX int,9

(respectively and

Int,Fr

3X).

(The dif­

should prevent us,

134

in each context, from confusing the interior and boundary points, and the interior part and boundary defined here with the interior and boundary points and the interior part and boundary of a set in a topological space.)

Clearly, the interior of

whereas the boundary of

X

X

is a dense open set,

is closed.

If each point of a topological space has a neighborhood homeomorphic to an open subset of

IRn

or

,

then obviously it already is

an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space.

Consequently, every open

subset of an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space is also an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space.

In particular, the interior of

an n-dimensional Euclidean space is an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space without boundary. subset

U

Moreover, the interior and boundary of an open

of a locally Euclidean space

= U n int X

and

X

are given by

int U

=

d\J = U fl 3X.

Since a locally Euclidean space is locally connected, its components are open (see 1 .3.4.3), and hence also closed. Obvious examples of n-dimensional locally Euclidean spaces are

3Rn , 3R^,

Sn ,

and

Dn .

It is clear that

3nRn = 0

and

Furthermore, all the boundary points of the half space limiting hyperplane that

x^ = 0 ,

^,

consisting of the points

we see that the product

X^ x

and

n^

of

D

such

lie in the

Sn 1.

3. Since the product X^

lie in the (x ,.../XR )

and all the boundary points of the ball

limiting sphere

3Sn = 0.

dimensions

HR

n

x 3R

n2

is homeomorphic to

X

n i +n2

of two locally Euclidean spaces

and

,

,

X^

and without boundary, is an

(n i+n2)-dimensional locally Euclidean space. i.e., a product

3R

This is true in general,

of boundaryless locally Euclidean spaces s X i,...,X of dimensions n i ,...,n , is an (n I+...+n )-dimensional s s s boundaryless locally Euclidean space. Turning to locally Euclidean 1

x ... x x

spaces with boundary, note that the formula (x ,. ..,x

fyw...fy 1

n1

1R

for

x hr

n2

1

), 2

n l+ n 2 ]R r

n 1 > 0.

((x ,...,x ),(y ,...,y )) 1 nl 1 n2 which gives the canonical homeomorphism

also defines a homeomorphism

Similarly, the formula

((x , .. .,x

ni n2 3R x ]R ) , (y , ...,y

n1

** (y-i /•••fY

,...,x 2

for

n^ > 0 , 2

)

defines a homeomorphism

n2

x ]R_

ni n2 nR x ]R

((x^,...,x^ ) , (y^,...fy

2

n l+ n 2 -+ nR_

for

n i+n? -* 1R

"

(-2 x^y^,x^ - y^,X2 ,...rxn ,y2 '#’’'yn ^ R1

))

n2

1

and the formula

n i+n? 3R

n 1 > 0,

)) ^

defines a homeomorphism

n 2 > 0.

Thus, each of the products

135

n 1R_

x

IR

^1

,

n2

JR

x

3R_ ,

^ IR

and

x

IR_

conclude that given locally Euclidean spaces n^

and

n2 ,

the product

Euclidean space.

X^ x X^

n. +n^ HR.

is homeomorphic to and

X^

We

of dimensions

is an (n^+n2)-dimensional locally

In general, the product

locally Euclidean soaces of dimensions "

X^ x ... x X g

n., ...,n 1

of arbitrary

is an (n.+...+n )1 s

s

dimensional locally Euclidean space. 4.

The discussion in 2 raises two nontrivial questions.

The first one is whether a nonempty topological space can be a locally Euclidean space of dimension

n

and, simultaneously, a

locally Euclidean space of a different dimension

n' :

n1

n f

?

Chapter 4 this question is answered negatively (see 4.6.5.10). answer is obvious when

n1 > 1

n = 1,

or

n ’ =1,

n > 1.

In

The

In fact,

any connected subset

of a one-dimensional locally Euclidean space

becomes disconnected

after one removes two suitably choosen points (for

example, two points belonging to an open subset which is homeomorphic to

IR );

in contrast, every nonempty locally Euclidean space of n' > 1

dimension

contains a nonempty open subset which cannot be disconnected by removing two points (any open subset homeomorphic to IRn ^ has this property). n 1 =0.

The picture is cristal clear when

However, when

n > 1,

n ’ > 1,

n = 0

or

the proof requires a technique

which we will develop only later. The second question is whether we can formulate more efficient definitions ofthe interior and

boundary points, which would permit us

to actually recognize

them.

At this point we can

show only the trivial inclusion

2 ) , and we are

9IR^ = IR1? 1

For example, consider the half space

IR^.

3IR^ c ir1^

(see

forced to settle for one of the extreme equalities

or

3IR^ = 0

(which obviously are the only possible ones) . n -n— 1 We shall prove in Chapter 4 that 3lR_ = IR^ (see 4.6.5.12). This n = 1

equality is plain for neighborhood in 0

1

IR_

(assuming that the point

which is homeomorphic to

we would disconnect this neighborhood;

1

IR ,

has a

then by removing

this is absurd, because the

latter cannot happen to a connected neighborhood of for

0

0

in

1

IR_).

But

n > 1,

equality

we again need techniques which are to be developed. The ^ •>! 3IR_ = IR^ settles satisfactorily the general problem of

recognizing the interior and boundary points too. that a point

x

of the n-dimensional locally Euclidean space

has a

neighborhood

point

of

U,

Indeed, it follows

U

with a homeomorphism U

and hence, of

X,

if and only

X

which

IR^, is. a boundary ifthishomeomorphism

into a point of the hyperplane IR1? 1 . For Dn this theorem n n—1 asserts that 3D = S . Finally, we note that the alternative takes

x

equality

3IR^ = 0

would obviously imply that

9X = 0

for any

136

n-dimensional locally Euclidean space. 5.

In general, it would be more prudent not to use the

theorems formulated in 4, equality

= IR^ \

i.e., the theorem on dimensions and the

as long as they have not been proven.

This

indeed is the way we shall deal with the theorem on dimensions - the only exception is a harmless remark used the

equality

33R^ = 3R^ \

in 2.3.

However, we have already

and we will take advantage of it again,

before its proof, in 7 and in 2.6, 2.7.

But these are the only

instances where these theorems and their corollaries will be used before their proofs. 6.

The boundary of an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space

is an (n-1)-dimensional locally Euclidean space without boundary. Let and let

U

boundary

x

be a boundary point of the locally Euclidean space

be a neighborhood of 9U

is a neighborhood of

and is homeomorphic to

HRn ^ ,

to Chapter 4 for the equality alternative

x,

= 0

dlR

7.

homeomorphic to x

in

3X,

since

IR^.

X

Then the

3U = U fl 3X,

since 8 3R^ = 3R^? ^ (here the reference n n 1 8nR_ = nR^ is unnecessary: the

is excluded, because

3X ^ 0).

For any locally Euclidean spaces

X ^ ,.

'x s

int(X. x ... x X ) = int X. x ... x intX 1 s 1 s and 9 (X, x ... x x 1

) = OX, x x o x. ..x x ) U . . . U (X x . ..x X x3X ) . s 1 2 s 1 s- 1 s

It is enough to prove the statement for

s =

2. Let

x. E X . i

i

and let cp^ be a homeomorphism of a neighborhood LL of onto n. n. JR or HR_ , i = 1,2. Then cp^ x ^ is a homeomorphism of the x U2

neighborhood

of the point

(x^x^

n1 n2 n1 n2 nl n2 3R x IR , HR x HR_ , IR_ x IR or

3R_

onto one

n1 n? x JR_ ,and composing it

withone of the homeomorphisms exhibited in 3, we x u2

of

onto

n 1+n 2

!IR

or

n 1+n2

3R_

.

cp and analyse the four possible cases. n2

- IR

,

then

n 1+n2

cp(U^ x U2> - 3R

interior points.

If cp1 (U1 ) = 3R

n l+ n 2 cp(U^ x U2> = 3R_ , and n2 _1 ^ 2 ^x 2^ ^ ^1 “

Thus

nl

obtain a homeomorphism

We denote this composition by If

nl cp^ (U^ ) = IR

and

x^ , x 2 ,

and

n? )) = ip~^ ((-00,b^)) . 17.

Therefore, in case (ii)

X

is homeomorphic to

S1 .

Every compact, connected, one-dimensional manifold is S1

homeomorphic to either PROOF.

or

D1 .

For a start, assume that the given manifold is closed.

Then it can be covered by a finite number of open subsets homeomorphic 1

to 1R ,

and we may arrange these in a sequence V, = U 1 U ... U U,

each union

K

I

-rC

is connected.

U^,...,Us

such that

According to Lemma 16, -j

the first of the sets 1 1

morphic to

S ,

V 1,...,V not homeomorphic to IR is homeoi s and being both open and closed, it is the entire

manifold, which is thus homeomorphic to

S1 .

Assume now that the manifold has a boundary.

Then its double

is a closed, connected, one-dimensional manifold, and as such is homeo1

morphic to subset of

S . 1

S .

Therefore, the original manifold is homeomorphic to a Since this subset is connected, closed, nonempty, 1

different from

S ,

and not reduced to a point, it is homeomorphic to

D1 . 18 (LEMMA).

If a topological space

X

can be represented

as the union of a nondecreasing sequence of open subsets, all homeo­ morphic to

IR1 ,

then

PROOF.

Let

X

X = U

any homeomorphism of homeomorphism of (a,b+1),

or

cp2 : V2 ^ A2 ,..., interval U Ai ,

IR1 .

be the given representation.

onto some interval

(a,b)

V j_+-| onto one of the intervals

(a-1,b+1).

of intervals

is homeomorphic to

Hence one

Clearly,

extends to a (a,b),(a- 1 ,b) ,

can construct inductively a sequence

and a sequence of homeomorphisms suchthat ^ = abcpi+ 1 . which agrees with on

A ^,

The map of X onto the v i , is obviously a homeo-

141

morphism. 19. Every noncompact, connected, one-dimensional manifold is homeomoiphic to either IR or IR . PROOF. boundary.

Then

First, assume that the given manifold X

X

has no

can be covered by a countable family of open subsets,

all homeomorphic to

IR ,

and we can arrange these in a sequence

^1'^2'#,‘' such that all unions these unions are homeomorphic to 1

not homeomorphic to

IR

U ... U are connected. Then all HR1 . Indeed, if not, the first of them

is, according to Lemma 16, homeomorphic to

and being open and closed must coincide with

X;

1

S ,

contradiction.

Therefore, one can apply Lemma 18 to our manifold and deduce that it is homeomorphic to

IR .

Now assume that

X

has a boundary.

Then

dopp X

is a non­

compact, connected, one-dimensional, boundaryless manifold, and must be homeomorphic to

1

IR .

It follows that

closed, noncompact subset of homeomorphic to

1

IR ,

X

is homeomorphic to a connected,

different from

IR1 ;

as such, it is

1

IR_ .

2.

Differentiable Structures

1.

n IR

Recall that a real function defined on an open subset of r r is of class C (or a C -function) if it has continuous partial

derivatives of all orders up to and including that

0
supp cp n s u p p \p -— which are inverses of one another, are of class morphisms for

r > 1

and homeomorphisms for

is trivially satisfied whenever

implies the equality of their dimensions. also from the C^-compatibility of

r C

r = 0).

supp cp n supp iii = 0 .

nsupp if;^ 0,then the C -compatibility

supp cp

cpfsupptp n supp ij),

cp

and

r (i.e., C -diffeoThis condition If

of the charts

tp and

ip

In fact, this equality results \p,

as shown by 1.4.

A collection of charts is an n-dimensional Cr-atlas of the set

X

if these charts cover X, are n-dimensional, and each two of r r r them are C -compatible. Two C -atlases of X are C -equivalent if their union is again a C -atlas.

This is clearly an equivalence

relation, and the equivalence classes of n-dimensional Cr-atlases of the set with

X

r > 0

are called n-dimensional Cr-structures.

The Cr-structures

are called differentiable structures.

Clearly, if

0

£ q £ r,

then each n-dimensional Cr-atlas is

143

also an n-dimensional C^-atlas, and two equivalent Cr-atlases are also Cq-equivalent.

Thus, when

0 £ q £ r

every n-dimensional

- structure

uniquely extends to a C^-structure. r Every C -structure contains a maximal atlas, namely the union of all its atlases.

The latter is called the complete atlas of the

structure, and its charts are called the charts of the structure. When we pasr. from a Cr“Structure to its C^-extension, the complete atlas extends too. 4.

A set endowed with an n-dimensional Cr-structure is called

an n-dimensional Cr-space.

The charts and atlases of the structure are

refered to as the charts and atlases of the space. 27 of a C -space X is denoted by AtlX . The coordinate functions of a chart are called coordinates on in X.

supp cp

We shall denote by Cr-space

X

cp

The complete atlas of the Cr-space

or, alternatively, local coordinates

C^X

the C^-space obtained from the

by extending its Cr-structure to a C^-structure,

The Cr-spaces with

X

r ^ q

are also termed

0 £ q £ r.

spaces.

For examples of Cr-spaces we may look at all the open subsets X

of

IRn

or

1R^,

with the Cr-structure defined by the atlas reduced

to the single chart id IRn

and

id 3R^ 5.

U ',

IRn

3Rn

and

3R^

r,

the charts

into n-dimensional Cr-spaces.

its complete atlas consists of all possible homeomorphisms

where

subset of

transform

In particular, for any

Every n-dimensional locally Euclidean space has an obvious

C^-structure: U

id: X -> X.

U or

is an open subset of the space and JR^.

U1

is an open

On the other hand, applying the "union of

topological spaces" construction (see 1 .2 .4.3) to the complete atlas of a given n-dimensional C^-space, we obtain an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space, and this transition is the inverse of the previous one. Therefore, C^-spaces are just locally Euclidean spaces. Since any differentiable structure extends uniquely to a C -structure, every Cr -space with r > 0 is also a locally Euclidean 0

space.

Its topology may be described in a more direct fashion as the

topology of the union constructed from any atlas of the structure. 6.

Obviously, every point of an n-dimensional C -space

can be covered by a chart points with

Im cp = IRn

cp

of

X

such that

Im cp = IRn

or

IR^.

X The

are called interior points and form an open

dense set, called the interior of the space

X,

denoted by

intX .

The remaining points are called boundary points and they form a closed set, called the boundary of

X,

denoted by

9X.

These notations are

144

in agreement with those introduced at 1.2.

In fact, when

r - 0, the

previous and present definitions of the interior and boundary points coincide. When

r > 0,

we use Proposition 2 (ii) in order to recognize

the interior and boundary points. r > 0

a point

and only if space with with for

ofan n-dimensional C -space is

X

Imp c

and

x £ supp cp .

r > 0, r = 0

According to this proposition, when

cp(x) £ 1R^ 1, where cp

In particular, if we regard

3 ]R^ = ]R^

then

a boundary point if is a chart on this 1R^

as a Cr-space

Recall that the corresponding statement

appeared in 1.4 and its proof was postponed until Chapter 4.

The above characterization of the boundary points shows that the interior and the boundary of a its Cr-structure to a

- space

do not change when we extend

C^-structure, for any q £ r.

In other words, for

0 £ q £ r,

int(C^X) = intX

and 3(C^X)

=3X.

We emphasize that the

equalities

int(C^X) = intX

and 3 (C^X)

= 3X

were proved by a refe­

rence to 1.4, i.e., they depended upon results from Chapter 4, whereas the equalities

int(C^X) = intX

9 (C^X)

and

= 9X

for

q > 0

need no

such reference. Using the relation valid for Cr-spaces with

3X = 3(C°X),

r > 0

too.

we see that Theorem 1.8 is

That is to say, a Cr-space is

connected if and only if its interior is connected.

However, this

27

C -variant of Theorem 1.8 can be proved by merely repeating the proof of the original theorem, and therefore we can eliminate the reference to Chapter 4. 7. Suppose

A

is an open subset of an n-dimensional

27

C -space

X. Then thecharts of X whose supports are included in 27 yield a C -atlas of the set A, and define an n-dimensional

A

Cr-structure on A. In this way, any open subset of an n-dimensional r r C -space is an n-dimensional C -space. In particular, the interior of r r any n-dimensional C -space is an n-dimensional C -space without boundary. Moreover,

the interior

Cr-space

X are obviously given by Suppose

tp

and the boundary of an open subset

of the

3U = U n 3 X.

and

is a chart on an n-dimensional Cr-space

ab tp : 3X fl supp tp ->• cp(3X fl supp tp) 3X.

intU = U n intX

U

X.

Then

is an (n-1 )-dimensional chart on 9X,

In this way we may construct a Cr-atlas of the set

and so

define a Cr-structure on 3 X. Thus, the boundary of an n-dimensional r 2T C -space is an (n-1)-dimensional C -space without boundary. If (P1 such that

(tp2) n1

Imcp^ = IR

then the composition of

is a chart on the C or

n1

]R_

x tp2

r 1

-space

(respectively,

X1

(C n?

Im ip^ = ]R

r? -space or

H

with one of the homeomorphisms

no

yi

),

)

145

]R

1

x

2

]R

n l+ n 2 ]R

n1

and

3R_

x

n2

n i+n? -> HR_ ,

nR

defined in 1.3, provides

an (n^+n2 )“dimensional chart on x X 2 - If constructed as above form a Cr-atlas of the set r = min(r 1 ,r2),

and hence define

a C -structure on

rl product of the n 1-dimensional C -space C r

2

X2

-space

3X 2 = 0

with

= Xx X~,

X1

then the charts with

X

x X„.

Thus the

and the n 2-dimensional

is an (n^ +n2>-dimensional Cr-space, where

is the smallest of

the numbers r. r of the n^-dimensional C -spaces X^

and

r„.In general, theproduct

.

one of them has a boundary, is an

i = 1,...,s,

such that at most

(n^+...+ng)-dimensional Cr-space,

where

r = min(r , .. .,r ). Moreover, int (X x ... x x ) = intX i s I s x int X g , and if X^ is the only space having a boundary, then

x ...

X ) = X, x ... x X. 1 x 9X. x x . , x ... x x . For s 1 1-1 i i+1 s both formulas can be found in 1.7; for r > 0 , they are plain.

r = 0

3(X1 1

...

x

x

It is clear that when we extend the d °-structure of the cr r X to a C -structure, the C -structures induced on the open

r C -space subsets of

X

and on its boundary

X

also extend to C^-structures,

and that C^(X 1 x ... x X s ) = C^X.1 x ... x C^X s . In particular, the r r 27 topology defined by the above induced C -structures coincide with the r-L relative topology, and the product of the C -spaces X^, i = 1,...,s, considered as a topological space, is just the product of the topological spaces

X

,...,X . s

I

Smooth Maps 8 . A continuous map

isof

chart

n f

is of class

Y,

-

-1 ,

,x , ab cp (supp ip ))

Cr

Obviously, a map

X

into a C

cpon

X

^r -space

and any

the composite map

(see 1). f: X

1

^ j-— 1 ,

supp cp n f

lXabf , (suppiji) >supp ip

ib

-

.

Im ijj

Such a composite map is called a local

representative of the map

f; Y

we use the notation

loc(cp,^)f. r -spaces is of class C if and only

of C

if the local representatives of of

>r -space

r r class C , or a C -map, if for any chart on

cp (supp cp

of a C

-

Y

f

constructed for all the charts of 27 someatlases of X and Y are of class C . Note that this general definition of C-maps contains the

definition given in 1. map.

The maps of class

f

Now, as before, a C _map is just a continuous C

1

are called smooth, and the maps of class

Ca - (real) analytic. r r The composition of two C -maps is obviously a C -map.

If

A

146

is an open subset or the boundary of a A ->■ X

is a Cr-map.

in

or

Y

XT C-space

• • then the inclusion

X,

If A is open in X or A = 9x, and B is open then the compression A B of any C -map X -+ Y

B = 9Y,

nr

is a C -map. 9.

A map

^1

f

of a C " -space

X

into a C

diffeomorphism if it is invertible and both The space

Y

f

^1

and

-space f ^

is said to be diffeomorphic to the space

a diffeomorphism

X -* Y,

C -diffeomorphism

and Cr-diffeomorphic to

is a

are smooth.

X

X,

Y

if there is

if there is a

X -> Y.

r Of course, the identity map of a C " -space with r ^ 1 is a Cr-diffeomorphism. Also, the composition of two Cr -diffeomorphisms is r r a C -diffeomorphism, and the inverse of a C -diffeomorphism is a Cr-diffeomorphism itself, as we may easily see from 2 (iii).

Therefore,

the property of being C -diffeomorphic is an equivalence relation. Using 2 (i), we conclude that nonempty diffeomorphic spaces have the same dimension. 10.

f . : X. -+ Y. ,. ..,f : X Y be Cr-maps with r ^ 1, 1 1 1 m m m ^ where no more than one of the spaces X^,...,Xm , andno more than one of the spaces

Let

Y^,...,Y ,

has a boundary.

Then

-- ► Y. x ... x Y f A x ... x f : X. x ... x X 1 m 1 m 1 m ■e

is obviously a C -map. If f^,...,f^ f x ... x f . 1 m The canonical homeomorphism

are diffeomorphisms, then so is

X^ x x^

feomorphism for any two Cr-spaces

and

X^

X2

X^ x x^

is a Cr-dif-

r ^ 1,

with

such that

one of them has no boundary. The canonical homeomorphisms (X- x ... x x m . ) x Xm -+ X. x ... x X and X, x (Xn x . . . x x ) -+ 1 m- 1 m_ 1 m 1 „ m r r 2 X^ x ... x x^ are C -diffeomorphisms for any C -spaces X^ , .. .,X with

r ^ 1,

such that no more that one of them has a boundary.

Subspaces 11.

A subset

is a k-dimensional subspace of a chart

0,

then this condition is obviously equivalent to the following one: point of A is covered by a chart cp of the space k k (P(A D supp cp) = Im

,

where

bj “ l j (al '•*•'an } - Ii=1 Di l j (ai'•••'an )ui and

are the coordinate functions of the map loc (cp,i[i) id n (D. denotes the partial derivative with respect to the i-th coordinate) l r— 1 Formula (2) shows that the charts tn cp and tnare C compatible t

1

(we set tp £ Atl Tang X .

,...,£

C° °’ 1 = C°° X ,

cover

and

Ca _ 1

Tang X ,

= Ca ) .

Moreover, the charts tn cp , r— 1 and thus yield a C-atlas ofthe set

This atlas has a countable subatlas (since

subatlas).

Furthermore, for any two vectors of

AtlX

TangX,

has such a it has either

158

a chart which contains both of them, or a pair

of disjoint charts, each

containing one of the vectors (indeed, recall that for any two points of

X,

Atl X

contains,

either a chart containing both of them, or

a pair of disjoint charts, each containing one of the points). 27— 1 Therefore, it makes Tang X into a 2n-dimensional C -manifold, which we call the total manifold of vectors tangent to the manifold Clearly, Tang X X point

Tang X ,

the projection

Tang X -+X,

and the natural map (2) shows that for

composite map (1 ) at the point

which takes each — "1 Tang^X, are all C maps.

loc(cp,^)id

r > 2

Tang X

the manifold

r > 2 the Jacobian of the

(a,u)

Jacobian of the map

the inclusions

X -+ Tang X

x into thezero vector of the space Formula

X.

is equal to the square of the

at the point

a.

We deduce that for

is always orientable and even carries a

canonical orientation, namely the one which is positive on the charts tn tp

with

cp E Catl X . One more remark: let

manifolds such that

SX^ = 0.

X^

X 2 be two arbitrary smooth

and

Then for

any two points

x^ E X^

and

x 9 E X , Tang. . (X x x«) and Tang X 1 © Tang X are ^ ^ \x ^ /x 2 ^^ ^2 isomorphic as vector spaces, and the isomorphism is natural. In addition, the isomorphisms corresponding to all pairs a diffeomorphism of

Tang(X^ x x2)

(x^,x2)

yield

Tang X^ x Tang X 2 .

onto

The Differential of a Smooth Map r >r be a C -map of an m-dimensional C ' -manifold >£• into an n-dimensional C ' -manifold Y, r s 1. For a point x £ X 3.

two charts

Let

f

tp £ Atl X x

and

the differential of the map as the linear

map

loc (cprvp)f

tp(x) . If

at

other ch a rts ,

3R -*■ ]Rn

then

\p £ Atlf , .Y, r \X )

loc(tp,i{j)f

we let

d (f;ip,^) x

at the point

X and

denote

tp(x),

regarded

whose matrix is the Jacobi matrix of

tp' £ Atl X x

and

\p'£ Atl... .Y r f(x)

are two

dX(f ;tp' , ijj' ) = d -I. IXj . (ij)

) ° d X (f;tp,^)

° dX (tp',tp).

= tp„ o (tp■)— 1

Combining this relation with the equalitiesd (ip', S (see 1.2.5.6 ) becomes a C -dif feomorphism.

178

2. G(n,k)

Obviously, we may modify the definition of the manifold

by replacing the nonoriented planes with oriented ones.

precisely,

G(n,k)

is replaced by the set

G + (n,k)

of oriented

k-dimensional planes (oriented k-planes, for short) of through

0.

One has to modify the set

be the collection of all planes in plane

y € G+ (n,k)

More

lRn

passing

accordingly and take it to

G (n,k)

whose projections onto the

are nondegenerate and orientation preserving.

The

maps SO (3) and SO (3) -+ 3RP are inverses of one another. 3 2 2. IRV(4,2) is canonically C -diffeomorphic to S * S .

the pair

The canonical Ca-diffeomorphism 3 2 (x,y) E S x S into the frame 3.

S0(4)

S

3

x S

2

-*3RV(4,2)

takes

{x,x shi(y) } .

is canonically Ca-diffeomorphic to

The canonical Ca-diffeomorphism

xS0(3).

x S0(3)

defined by the quaternion formula

(x,{y,z})

(here the points of the manifolds

S0(3)

SO (4)

is

{x,x shi(y) ,x shi(z) }

and

S0(4)

are interpreted

as frames). 4.

G+ (4,2)

is canonically Ca-diffeomorphic to

The canonical Ca-diffeomorphism the oriented plane spanned by the frame (shi

-1

(xy

-1

-1 -1

),shi

(x

2

(u,v) E S

pair

x s

y)).

2

(shi

-1

(xy

-1

Again, it ),shi

-1 -1

(x

spanned by the frame

S^

x s^ takes

{x,y} E V(4,2)

into the pair

The inverse diffeomorphism transforms each

into the two-dimensional plane consisting of

quaternions of the form quaternion.

G+ (4,2)

S^ x S^.

shi(u)q + q shi (v) ,

where

q

is an arbitrary

is routine to check that the pair y))

is uniquely determined by the oriented plane

{x,y},

that the quaternions

shi(u)q + qshi(v)

fill exactly a two-dimensional plane, and that the 2

2

maps G+ (4,2) -* S x s and inverses of one another.

S

4. 1.

2

2

x s ■+ G + (4,2)

constructed

above are

Exercises

A homogeneous polynomial in

n+1

variables and with

real (complex) coefficients is nonsingular if there are no points in in 3Rn + 1 ^ 0

(respectively, in

derivatives vanish. (respectively, from 0 (EPn ) .

(En + 1 \ 0)

where all its partial

Show that the projection

3Rn + 1 \ 0 -»■]Rpn

a:n ”* \ 0 ->- IPn )transforsm the set of zeros

of such apolynomial into a submanifold of

2.

Let P (x.j »x 2 ,x^)

IRPn

different (respectively,

be a nonsingular homogeneous

polynomial

187

of degree

k

with real coefficients.

projective plane

3RP

2

Show that the submanifold of the

defined by the equation

orientable neighborhood if and only if 3. of degree 3RP

2

p(x^/X 2 /X )

Let

3

either

S

1

1 i

or 4.

i

1

S J |_S ,

p(x ,x0,x ) = 0

a submanifold homeomorphic to

(respectively,

+x

2

2

+x

2

=0

defines in (EP

2

S

1

x3 + x 93 + x 3 = 0

nRG(n,k)

(EP2

defines in

1

x S . 2

2

2

+x0 + x 2 2 S x S .

Show that the equation

Show that

is homeomorphic to

S .

3 (EP a submanifold homeomorphic to

JRP

2

x

Show that the equation

7.

is even.

and that both cases are realized.

a submanifold homeomorphic to

6.

has an

Show that the submanifold of

Show that the equation

5.

= 0

be a nonsingular homogeneous polynomial

with real coefficients.

defined by the equation

k

pix^x^x^

x

((EG(n,k))

+x

2

= 0

defines in

admits a Ca-embedding in

(k)-i (EP ). n2

8.

Y E lRG(n,k) (where

pr

Show that

the map HRG(n,k)

R

which takes each plane

into the matrix of the composite map

]Rn —

y —1-n-» 3Rn

is the orthogonal projection) is a Ca-embedding.

Show that

2

the same is true for the map y E (EG(n,k)

(1

which takes each plane

into the matrix of the composite map

(En

Pr > y -

(En .

Show that

nRV(8 ,k)

is Ca-diffeomorphic to

S^ x JRV(7,k-1)

8 ) . Show that

(EV(4,k)

is Ca-diffeomorphic to

S

9. (1 ^ k £

(EG(n,k) ■+ (E

y

x (EV(3,k-1)

k 1.

Now we are back to one of the cases covered by the first part of the proof (namely, in the first case for one for

r > 1).

G ^ f(Cl N) . G,

while if

r = 1 , and in the second

Therefore, we conclude that

Consequently, if r > 1

the set

completes the proof, because 4 (INFORMATION).

r = 1

the set

f(C')

does not cover

f(C)

does not cover

f(C n F )

does not cover

f(C)

f (C n

and

G.

This

are closed.

In Theorem 3, the condition that

f

be

C°°-smooth is unnecessarily strong: in fact, the proof uses only the

194

fact that

f

is of class

Cr ,

with

precise analysis shows that this

r

example, [2 1 ]), but no further (for q > 1

and the case

of

nRn .

Let

(see,

for

q = 1 , this is showed in [23], q = 1 ).

2

f f

1

Nondegenerate Critical Points be a real C -function defined on an open subset

A critical point

differential of

A more

can be decreased by

reduces easily to the case

3. 1.

r = 2 + max(n-q,0) .

at

y

y

of f

is nondegenerate if the second

(considered as a quadratic form) has rank

The index of the second differential of

f

at

y

n.

(i.e., the number

of negative squares in the diagonal representation of this form) is called the index of the point We remark that if subset

U

of

IRn

y cp

is a C -diffeomorphism of an open

f: U

point of the function

= ind^y.

ind^y.

2

onto another open subset of

degenerate critical point of critical

and is denoted by

3R,

then

nRn cp(y)

f o cp ^ : cp(U) -* HR,

and

y

is a non­

is a nondegenerate and

ind

_>| HR

defined as

(x1 ,...,xn ) H- -Xl - ... - xk + xk + 1 + ... + xn + c , where

c

is a real number 0,

critical point, at

(0 £ k £ n ) .

(5 )

This function has a unique

which clearly is nondegenerate and of index

k.

The main goal in the present subsection is to show that, in a suitably chosen system of coordinates, any sufficiently smooth function has the above form (5) in the vicinity of a nondegenerate critical point. 2 (LEMMA). and let f : V IR r— 1 C -functions f ----------------

Let

V

be an open ball in

be a Cr-function, r ^ 1, ~ ' such that |f n : V + n R ---------

with

f(x) = E± = 1 xifi (x> for all points -------- ------

IRn

with center f (0) = 0 .

0,

There are

(

x = (x„,...,x ) e V. 1 n

To prove the lemma, it is enough to set r1

fi (x)

D.f(tx)dt, 0

1

and then observe that (6 ) is an immediate consequence of the equality

6;

195

f (tx) = X£ = 1 x.D.f(tx) .

3.

Suppose that

a (^-function

f

y

is a nondegenerate critical point of

defined on an open subset of

there exist a neighborhood

U

onto a neighborhood

0,

V

of

of_

y

!Rn .

I_f

r ^ 3,

and a diffeomorphism

then

cp of

U

such that the restriction f cp /5 ) coincides with the composite map U -> V ---- >1R, where k = ind^y

and

c = f (y) . PROOF. and

f(y) = 0 .

Without loss of generality, we may assume that

y = 0

By Lemma 2,

f(x) = ^ =1 x.f.( X ) in some neighborhood of

0,

where

Differentiating, we obtain = ... VQ

= fn (0).

of

r —1

are C

D^f(x) =

-functions.

x^D^f^(x),

since

f^ (0) =

Again we apply Lemma 2 and write, in a neighborhood

0, f i Vr ---- ► n (vn ) ,

is a suitable permutation of the standard coordinates in U = cp ^ (V) . The neighborhood

VQ is already given.

We let

WQ = V Q ,

tp^ = id , q? . = q . ., and assume that we haveconstructed 0 0 ID (Pp, and g?j satisfying (i) ,(ii), (iii), and (iv) for 0

is clear that

IRn ,

V , W , P P p £ q. It

is a nondegenerate critical point of the function (7) 11 P

iik g . .(0) I .is nondegenerate id i,D=q+1 and there exists a nondegenerate (n-q)x(n-q)-matrix A such that the

with

p = q.

Hence the matrix G =

left upper element of the matrix

A^GA

the linear transformation of

having matrix

IRn

is the qxq-identity matrix. ab I : I

-1

(V )

V

is not zero.

Let

E

0

0

A

denote

t

where

E

The composition of the diffeomorphism

with the function (3) is given by

n \ x h- ±x 2A ± ... ± x 2 + v). . h..(x)x.x. 1 q i ,D=q + 1 ID ID

h . . = h.. and h - .1 (0) ^ 0 . Now consider the subset ID D1 q+ 1 ,q+1 (V ) consisting of all the points x where h 1 (x) f 0 q q +\ tq +I

where

L

t

and

has the same sign as

^ ( x)

=

s'>q+1

+

V

hs —/q+ 1 (x) ' 1 ----S hq+q>q+ 1 (x) ‘

A simple computation shows that the Jacobian of

\]>

does not vanish. Therefore, the compression

ip to

neighborhood

M

of

0

and to its image

It is now readily verified that the sets the map functions

ab f

is continuous, and the

defined as

fdf 2.

c r (X,X ')

C^(X,X') -> Cr (3X,3X'), defined as r r- 1 map C (X,X') C (Tang X,Tang X 1 ),

is a topological embedding.

If

X

is compact, then the set

Imm (X,X1)

< r s “ ).

(1

We have to exhibit, for a given Cr-immersion a neighborhood of

f^

in

Cr (X,X!)

To do this, pick for each point cp' e Atl X 1 , X

such that

one of the inclusions and 1.5.1;

here

IL

x E X

U

two charts,

X

TRU -* ]Rn ,

n = dim X U

the subset of

X 1,

or

(Int D ) ,

cp^ £ Atl^X

and

X

3R^

x^

Cr (X,X')consisting

X

equals

(see 1.5.3

Now cover

say U

and

loc(cp ,cp')f

1R^

n 1 = dim X ') .

= cp x

x

X

IR^-> 3Rn ,

and

fq : X

consisting only of immersions.

fn (supp cp ) c supp cp*

a finite number of sets denote by

is open in

X

with

, ...,U , xg

and

of all the maps

f

such that

f (Cl U ) c suppcp' and the upper nxn-minor of the Jacobi Xi i matrix of the map loc (cp ,cp' )f has no zeros on D . The intersection "i i fl ... H Ug is the desired neighborhood of the map f^ . 3. Submr (X,X')

If

X

is compact and

is open in

Cr (X,X')

X1

has noboundary,

then the

(1 £ r £ °°) . 37

We have to exhibit, for a given C -submersion a neighborhood of

f^

Again, for each point cp1 £ Atl X 1 , X

such that

in

C (X,X')

x £ X

fn (suppcp ) c= suppcp' X

one of the orthogonal projections

fn : X -> X ',

consisting only of submersions.

we choose charts

U

set

X

cp

X

£ Atl X

X

and

loc (cp ,cp1 )f

and

X X

IRn -> !Rn , ]R^ -+ nRn

equals

(see 1.5.7).

Now cover X with a finite number of sets U = cp 1 (Int Dn ) , say X X ux ,...,Ux „ , and denote by ti ^ the--subset of C (X,X ') consisting of XI "s all maps f such that f (Cl U ) c suppip1 and the left n'^n' -minor Xi xi of the Jacobi matrix of the map loc (ip ,cp' )f has no zeros on Dn x i xi The intersection U 1 fl ... fl U is the desired neighborhood of the map

V Cr (X,X’)

4.If X is compact, then the set (1 ^ r £ oo) . PROOF.

Given a Cr-embedding

Embr (X,X')

fQ : X +X',

show that it is enough to produce a neighborhood of consisting only of injective maps.

For each point

is open in

theorems 2 and 1.5.4 f^

in

x € X,

Cr (X,X') choose two

199

charts, and

cp

X.

£ Atl X

loc (tp^ 3R

,

and

X

f

tp* £ AtlX' ,

such that

X

fn (supptp ) c suppcp' U

coincides with one of the inclusions

or

X

X

TRn -> IRn ,

IR^

(see 1.5.1). Now cover X with a finite n number of sets U = tp (Int D ) , say U , ...,U . Let U. be the x ^x 2 x ' x 1 27 1 s subset of C (X,Xf) consisting of all maps f such that ~1

f (Cl U ) c: supp cp' and, if we symmetrize the upper nxn-part of the xi xi Jacobi matrix of loc (cpX .,cpx * ,)f and take all the principal minors, 1

they are all positive

1

on the ball

Dn .

(The principal minors are the

left-upper minors; the symmetrized matrix is half the sum of the matrix with its transpose.)

Finally, denote by

U

that part of

Cr (X,Xf) X1

consisting of all maps such that the preimage of any point of in one of the sets 1/ = 11^ fl . . . H

property. open.

U . Let us show that the intersection x. l n U is a neighborhood of f^ with the necessary

It is clear that

f^ £ 1/ and that all the sets

Hence it suffices to verify that:

(ii)

the maps in

IL

0/ = C ( X X X , ( X X X )

\ U.(U 1

under the continuous mapping Since

is open in

in

and

point

) ;X1 x X ' ,(X' x x')

in

To prove (ii), given a map points

is open,

and

C

\diag(X') )

(X x X,X! x X 1)/

is open

Cr (X,X').

f € IL

and arbitrary distinct

y,z £ U , let s: I ->3R be the function which takes each Xi t £ I into the inner product of the vectors v = cp (z) - m 1

and [loc (cp xi computed in

n* HR .

)f]((1-t)cp xi

xi

Next denote by

of the Jacobi matrix of the map and by

given by

x U ) is compact and i i X* x x 1 (see 1.2.2.4), W

isopen

U

X.

(X,X!)

C

(X x x) ^ U -(U

x x 1)

U

are

is the preimage of the set

XU

X.

(X* x x 1) \ diag(X1) C(X x x,X'

(i)

IL

are injective.

To prove (i), note that U

f h* f x f .

lies

(y) + tcp (z)) - loc(ip , = ip (y ’) i ip (y) = a (tp (y))ip (y).] "i i i xi xi xi xi Moreover, j is an immersion, since j is an immersion on U injective:

£

U

f

y,

then

j

xi cx(V

xi

(the second component Ux ). i

Therefore,

j

xi

X

3Rn of the map j agrees with x. r is a C -embedding (see 1.5.4).

cp x.

on

1

Supplement for the Case of Nonempty Boundary 2 (LEMMA) .

On any compact C^-manifold,

1 < r < °°,

there

201

is a (real) C -function

h,

equal to

and having no critical points on PROOF. to

1

on

D

Let

0

on

9X,

positive on

intX ,

dX.

a: 3Rn ^ I ,

and equal to

0

n

dim X ,

-

be a Cr-function equal

outside the concentric ball of radius

2.

For each point x e BX fix a chart cp E Atl X such that n x x Im cp - IR and cp (x) = 0, and define two functions f ,g : X -* 3R x ” x x ^x through the formulas 1 - a (tp (y)),

if

y G supp tp , x

1 /

if

y e x \ supp cp^ ,

- 6 (tp (y) ) ,

if

y G supp tp ,

0,

if

y € X \ supp cp^

x

£x (y>

=

and

g x (y )

Here dX

n

6 : HR

X

=

+ IR

is given by

by a finite number of sets

3 (t^,..., t^) = t^a(t^, ...,t^) .

U

X

= cp X

^(Int Dn ) ,

say

U

X

Covering

, ...,U j*

and setting

s s

My)

s

= T T fx (y) + I gx (y) ' i— 1 i i= 1 i

we obtain the needed function identically on functions

,

X

g

dX,

h:

X

IR. In fact,

h

vanishes

since

f is equal to 0 on U and all the Xi xi vanish identically on BX; h is positive on intX ,

i since all the functions

, g are nonnegative and g is positive i i i at all points of intX , excepting the zeros of f .Finally, h has i no critical points on dX, since £g has no critical points on Bx i (the derivative with respect to the first coordinate of the local representative

f

loc (cp ,idIR)g ,i.e., of the xk i

composition

(cp I x ± |suppcpx

) o cp ^ , is negative on Dn fl IR1} ^ for k = i and xk * 1 k ^ ^ nonpositive on D H IR for all k) , while ~| [ f vanishes 1 xi identically on UU J x. i >27 . 3. Every compact C ' -manifold, 1 £ r £ °°, admits a neat Cr-embedding in a Euclidean space of sufficiently high dimension. The formula

x

(-h (x) ,j (x) ) ,

where

j

is an arbitrary

202

Cr-embedding in ]Rn (see 1), and h is the function constructed in 2, r Q +1 *] Q defines a neat C -embedding in 2R_ = HR_ x 3R .

In fo rm a t i o n

4.

The compactness assumption and the condition that

may be eliminated from the formulations of 1 and 3.

Any smooth manifold

of class C*r, with r £ « or r = a, compact or not, can be n Cr-embedded in Euclidean space, and any smooth manifold of class C , r with r £ 00 or r = a, compact or not, admits a neat C -embedding m For proofs see [22] and [8 ]. We should m e n t i o n that the case r = a

Euclidean space.

in T h e or em s

1 and 3

is exc ee di ng ly d i f f i c u l t and this is the re a s o n why we e x c l u d e d it here. In the sequel we shall exclude example,

it from other

f or mul a t i o n s

too:

cf.,

for

4.2, 5.3, 6.5, and 4.6. 2.7.

3. 1.

Transversalizations and Tubes

In this subsection, we consider the image

in Euclidean

space of a smooth manifold under a differentiable embedding and study the structure of a neighborhood of this image.

The results are

concentrated in theorems 4, 5, and 7, and serve as the technical basis for the remaining part of the present section. 2.

Let

j

be a differentiable embedding

closed, n-dimensional manifold is a c o nt in uo us map

t(x)

the plane

t

: X

X

in

G(q,q-n)

3R^.

is transver se to the p l a ne

t r a n s v e r s a l i z a t i o n which a s s o cia te s

smooth,

A transversalization of

such that,

two planes intersect at only one point).

ofthe

for eac h p o i n t

d^j (Tang^X)

j

x E X,

(i.e.,

the

A basic example is the normal

to each p o int

x £ X

the

corresponding normal plane (i.e., the orthogonal complement to dxj (Tang^X)

in

M

q ) ; if

j

Cr , then its norma l r— 1 C (cf. 1.4.2).

is of class

transversalization is obviously of class Given an embedding T: X -+■ G (q,q-n) t

of

: X ->■ G' (q,q-n) ,

j(x) +

t (x )

j,

j: X

and a transversalization

one can construct the natural map

which takes each point

(which is parallel to

t (x

)

x

and passes through

We denote the ball and the sphere w i t h c e n t e r j (x)

+ i (x)

Ux G X d T (x,p)

by and

d T (x,p)

and

s

Ux £ X [dT (x,p)

(x,p),

into the plane j(x)

and r adi us

r e s p e c t iv ely .

^ s T : A -* X* is dense in s the part of C (X,Xf) consisting of the extensions of $ which are of 2T class C m a neighborhood of A(the neighborhood depends upon the Let subset of

extension). Let

s

(X ,X1) be an extension of (p which is of class 27 C in aneighborhood U of A. Given a neighborhood U of f in s r C (X,X 1 ) , we have to show that u contains a C -extension of X '

Suppose that of

X

be a Cr-map. t

X

and

X'

>r are closed C' -manifolds and

which is itself closed as a manifold. If

0 ,< s < r ^

consisting of the C -extensions of

then that part of

Let

CS (X,X’) S is dense in the part of C (X,X’)

208

s consisting of all the C -extensions of Given a CS-extension of extension in

CS (X,X')/

d> and a neighborhood

we have

to show that

of . Fix Cr-embeddings j : X C37-transversalization t of the Cr-transversalization

t

'

of

d>. U

of

this

contains a Cr-extension

U

-*■ IR^

and j ': X' -> 3R^ , a embedding j•LI .* A IR q and a

j',

and

Tub^_, p '- Further, denote Tub ,p'. denote by T of all the maps g such that

and corresponding neat tubes I/ the piece of

CS (X,X')

Tub^p

consisting

max dist(j 1 o (}>(x) ,j 1 o g(x)) < Distfj'fX1), 3R^ ^ tub ,P 1 ) . xex s Obviously, I/ is open and contains all the C -extensions of to X. r —1 Now take any Urysohn C -function \p for the pair X v j (tub p) ,A and s consider the mapping $:I/ + C (X,X') which transforms each map g into the map PrT »(j°g(x)

+^ (x) [j 1 o(J)oprT

x h- ^ g (x) , It is clear that extends

$.

$ iscontinuous

This implies that

and that

(j (x) )- j 1 ogoprT (j (x) )]) , if

j (x) £ TubTP,

if

j (x) £ Tub

P

whenever

g

0(g) = g

.

-1

((J) is an open nonempty set which, 27 according to Theorem 2, contains a C -map. Finally, note that 0 takes r r C -maps into C -extensions of $.

5. 1.

0

Glueing Manifolds Smoothly

Our main task in this subsection is to make the necessa

preparations for extending the basic approximation theorems given in the previous subsection, i.e., theorems 4.2-4.4, in their nonanalytic version, to include compact manifolds with boundary.

The main tool

used in the extension is that of smooth doubling of a compact manifold, an operation which transforms it into a closed manifold.

However, we find

it convenient to define and study a more general operation, which is useful for other purposes too - the smooth glueing of smooth compact manifolds.

To begin with, we need to investigate the structure of a

smooth compact manifold in the vicinity of its boundary.

209

Collars 2. A collaring of a compact Cr-manifold X (0 £ r £ a) is a C -embedding of the cylinder 9X x i into X, which takes the point (x,0)

into

x,for each

an embedding is If

x £ 9X.

The image

known as a collar (on

X

of ax x I

under such

X).

is a smooth manifold

(i.e.,r

> 1), a collaring is a

differentiable embedding and its image is a submanifold of codimension 0,

whose boundary consists of

diffeomorphic to

8X.

3. collaring.

1 £ r £ °°,

rf

PROOF. Cr-embedding

Let

j: X

X

X—

3Rq ,

j.

Since

point of

x G 3X,

3X

j^

3X x HR_,

so that

of the

Tub^p.

defined as

d^$

is nondegenerate at each

(j) realizes a diffeomorphism of a neighborhood

onto a neighborhood of

3X x 0

product

(see 1.5.5). Now let

3X x [-£,0]

previous neighborhood.

Then the formula(x,t)

defines a collaring of

X.

4 (INFORMATION).

(r =

e > 0

is contained in the

*+ $

(x,-et)

The compact topological manifolds

and the compact analytic manifolds r = 0

t

is the first coordinate function of

neat, the differential

be small enough so that the

case

Pick a neat

and a neat tube

1

(tub^p)

(pr^(j(x),j^ (x)),where is

intX

every compact C -manifold admits a

be the given manifold.

x

j

and of a submanifold of

]Rq (see 2.3), a Cr-transversalization

composite embedding Consider the map

ax

a) admit collarings

obviously

(r = 0) too.

The

is considered in [4].

Glueing 5.

Suppose that

Cr-manifolds with 3x

and

3X',

boundaries.

C

Y = X*

and let

X'

are compact n-dimensional

C

and C'

be submanifolds of

respectively, consisting of whole components of these Assuming that

Cr-diff eomorphism map

r ^ 1,

X and

4>:

C ->■ C*

C* •-1~ > X 1

C and

C*

are diffeomorphic, pick a

and attach

(see 1.2.4.8 ).

X to

X'

by the composite

The resulting space

U. .X is obviously a compact, n-dimensional, topological in° (J) manifold. However, if X and X' have collars then it turns out that t* r Y has a natural C -structure that makes it into a collared C -manifold.

210

The atlas that defines this Cr-structure consists of the charts of Atl(X ^ C)

and

Atl(X' ^ C')

as well as the charts and the collarings

¥

(we regard

X

and

X'

as parts of

constructed from both the charts

k: 9X x I + X

k 1 : 8X 1 x I

and

X1

Y) ,

^ £ AtlC by the

formulas supp Y = k (supp 11> x [0,1)) U k ' (supp

x [o,1))

and ¥(k(z,t)) = ( (t) (x) ,t) ,

f (4>t

for

if

|t | ^ cr

f (x,t)

Then

f~

t

if

f(x,t),

satisfies all the conditions imposed to

of the lemma.

Moreover,

f~

£ c f

in the statement

satisfies the extra conditions under which

the lemma has already been proved, namely that the composite map pr.

is constant on the sets corresponding to because

f

f~

x x [-c,c],

X’

with

c = c^/4.

7.

f

on

Suppose that

C2

1 £ r £ 00,

X^ , X^, X2 , ,

are C -dif feomorphisms.

C -diffeomorphisms F' (C Jj) = C2 ,

g

(X x [-1,-1/2])U (X x 0)U(X x [1,1/2]).

and

F: X

and

1

and

X2

are collared

are pieces of their

boundaries consisting of whole components, and 2 : C 2

The map

via the above procedure has the needed properties

agrees with

Cr-manifolds,

1

X' x [-1,1]

X x [-1,1]

:

C,j

and

Assume that there are F': X'

X',

such that

F (C ) = C

'2 '

and the diagram C’ ^1

ab F 1

ab F C 21 is commutative. and

Y

If

Y^

is the result of glueing

is the result of glueing

X.

and

1

X ’ b£

and

X^

(¡>2 t

then the Y 2 are C -diffeomorphic. Moreover, there exists a C -diffeomorphism G: Y ^ Y 2 such that G (X^ ) X2 , G ( X ’ X2 ' G (C, = C 2 ' and [abG: C2] = [ab F

manifolds

and

C2 ]

PROOF.

Let

be two-sided collarings formulas

H

[in: X 2

X

C 1 x [-1 ,1 ]

Y1

and Y2

Denote by H: Y^ Y 2 ] o f and

¿ 2 : C 2 x [-1 , 1

the map defined by the [in: X ’ * Y2: o F ’

'x i

and choose c > 0 so that H ° x [-c ,e]) ■ C 2 x [-1,1] given by f(z,t) = , - 1 (H ^r C -embedding

g:

t

(z,ct)). x [-1 ,1 ]

Now

This lemma guarantees the existence of a C 2 x [-1,1]

which agrees with

f

on

213

(C.j x [— 1 ,—1/2] ) U (C1 x 0) U (C1 x [1/2,1]), g(C 1

X

[-1,0]) = f(C 1

X

g(C 1

[-1,0]),

and satisfies

[0,1]) = f(c

X

[0,1]).

X

Clearly, (y) ,

h

if

y i

if

y =

1 ( C 1 x [_F-

) '

G(y) = 12

° g (z ,t/e),

(z,t)

z1 e C ,

with

t £ [—e ,e ] defines the required C -dif feomorphism

G:

->•

-

Cutting 8.

Let

Y

be a C -manifold,

be compact submanifolds of Y = X U X 1.

rf

Y

C = X n X'

such that

z E C

and

C x [-1,1]

¿:

Y

and

dX

= dim X 1

9X',

such that

t (C x [-1,0)) c= int X,

i(C x

r Fix a C -embedding

PROOF.

dim X

and let

X

j:

l ( z,0)

and

= dim Y

is a piece of both boundaries

consisting of whole components of Cr-embedding

1 < r £ «>,

3X

X'

and and

3X*

then there is a = z

for any point

(0,1]) c int X ' . cr IR ,

Y

r a C -transversalization

ofthe embedding j|P : c 3R^, and a neat tube Tub p. Consider cr— 1 the map $: C which takes each point z £ C into the unit t

vector tangent to

j(Y)

at the point

j (z),

contained in

(z), and r—1 pointing towards j(X'). (p is continuous (in fact, of class C )/ r cr— 1 and so Theorem 4.2 yields a C -map cf)^ : C + such that the inner t

product (z) (z)> is positive on C. Denote by ¡¡j : tub^_p C x IR the map defined by the formula \p(z) = (pr^ (z) ,) . Clearly,

i¡j

is of class

Cr

and

TP)

for

ze C

the differential

+ Tang ( z , 0 ) (C x3R) = TangzC) © IR

induces an isomorphism of vector and

(z)

(p (z )

into

Tang., .j(C) onto Tang C and carries the ] IZ ) z e IR. Moreover, both T a n g ^ zjj(C)

are contained

Tangj (z)j (Y )

onto

15

5.

J \Z)

Tang(z,0) (C x :R) *

= dimTang(Zi0) (Cx IR) , the linear map

in Tang.. .j (Y) ;

we see that

dj (z) ^ j j (Y)ntub p} '

hence

since

d., .^ J \Z)

dim Tang. (z)

takes =

, defines a dif feomorphism from a neighborhood of ' v |] (Y) fltub^p j (C) onto a neighborhood of C x 0. Accordingly, C x [-r, ,e] will

214

lie in the previous neighborhood provided that Now it is plain that embedding

i ( z,t)

X

dimX'

X1

and

Let

Y

is small enough.

defines the desired

be a Cr-manifold,

be compact submanifolds of

= dim Y

and Y

boundaries

3X

3X',

id X

then

> 0

C x [-1,1] ->■ Y .

I:

9 (COROLLARY) . let

= j~1 (^ 1 (z,et))

e

= X U X'.

If

X il X'

Y

1 £ r £ 00,

such that

and

dim X

=

is a piece of both

and 3X!,

consisting of whole components of 3X 27 andid X 1 together define a C -diffeomorphism

and of

Y

onto the manifold obtained from the appropriately collared manifolds X

and

X1

glueing X

and X 1

b^

id (X fl X').

The Simplest Application 10. When

Every smooth compact manifold is a CNRS. the manifold is closed, this is a consequence of

2.1, 3.7, and 3.5, because the image of a smooth

manifold under a

differentiable embedding in Euclidean space is the retract of the interior of a neat tube corresponding to a smooth transversalization of Theorem 1.3.6 .4 enables us to reduce the case of

the given embedding. manifolds with

boundary to the closed case; namely, any compact

smooth

manifold has a smooth closed double (see 5), and is obviously a retract of this double.

6.

Smoothing Maps in the Presence of a Boundary

1.

The main results of this subsection are Theorems 5 and

which generalize Theorem 4.2.

Lemma 2 is necessary to the proof of

Lemma 3, Lemma

3 - to the proof of Lemma 4, and Lemma 4 - to the proof

of Theorem 5. Theorem 9.

Finally, lemmas 7 and 8 are necessary to the proof of

2 (LEMMA) . Let Y be f : Y x 1R_ jr be a C-function. defined by

a C^r-manifold with r < 00, and let Then the function F :Y x 1R + IR

f (y /1 ) ,

if

t £ 0,

Yr (-1 )^ r + 1 f(y,-kt), k +1 ¿k =0 * u

if

t ^ 0

F (y ,t)

is also of class

Cr .

215

PROOF. F/

All we must check is that the two expressions defining

as well as their partial derivatives with respect to

coordinates on Y that the equality

agree for

t = 0.

t

and local

To see this, it suffices to note

l L n < - i ) k + s f rk++11 k SDS X' x2 “ x2 “ are transverse onX ^ ,X ^ aresimplyreferredto as transverse. Let us make three obvious remarks. dimX^ + dimX 2

= 0 .

A^, A^

and

and

1

" 11

then Tang, , >X' r ^tx ^;

2.

then

if

3x )

1

d f - (Tang X ); if x2 ^ x2 by d f (Tang X )

and

space

X )

f 1 ( x 1)

X ^

+ X' on A 1 ,A0

be transverse (oneto the other)

2

A1

be smooth manifolds, and let

the map f .

v £ IRq

which

Consider the four maps

int X 1

X int X 2 ■+ IRq , int X 1 X 3X2 -> IRq , 3X1 x int X 2 -> 3Rq , and q1 3X^ x 9X2 + 3R ,given by (x^ ^ 2 ) ** f 2 3R which is zero on H f^ (suppcp') , negative

on Int X 1 n f~1 (suppcp'),

are independent at

and is such thatip ,ip^ +1,...,ip^,

x .

The existence of such a function is equivalent i to the restrictions of ip +1 ,••, to 8X1 n f 1 (suppcp’) being q2 * 1 1 independent at x ^ . The latter can be proved as in (i), employing the _

equality

Tang,

,

^

,X‘ = Im d (f I

\ ^

^

«j

I

) + Tang, 10 A

..X~

^

X

^

rather than

^

Tangf 1 (x1)X ' = ImdXlf1 + Tangfl (Xl )x23 (COROLLARY). of a smooth manifold

Let

X ’,

X^

and

be transverse submanifolds

and assume that

X^

is neat.

Then

is a (dim X^ + d i m X 2 - d i m X ’) -dimensional submanifold of X2

neat whenever

X ',

X^ D X 2 and is

is neat.

The Simplest Applications 4. U

Let

A

and

let

be a neighborhood of

U a

compact submanifold PROOF.

Let

B

A.

(f>: X

I

value of

tj>

X —

I

~*~n > 3R,

Set

(-°°,c]

B of

=

JR

0.

then thereis in

such that

A c int B .

Cr-function for the pair Then

is not a critical B

is the preimage 37

under the composite C -map (-°°,c],

B

is a

It is immediate from the construction

B is closed as a subset, that 5.

0

c £ (0,1)

([0,c]) .

(p

r £ °°,

Since the latter is transverse to

submanifold of codimension that

1 £

be a Urysohn

(see 4.7), and suppose that (see 1).

_If

of codimension

A, X ^ U

of the submanifold

£■ closed C -manifold X,

be a closed subset of a

A 27 is a closed n-dimensional C' -manifold with

and let

j: X

IRqbe anembedding of class

be a positive integer such that

0 < m < q.

Cr .

Also,

We shall need two

constructions. The first construction: we denote by specifically by

Aux^(j;m),

that subset of

of the pairs

(u,y)

such that

Further, let

aux1 : Aux1 ^ G ’(q,m)

aux1 (u,y) = j(pr(u)) + y,

where

Aux^

or, more

Tang X x G(q,m)

= 1

and

consisting

dj (u) G y.

be the map defined by pr = [pr: Tang X + X].

Aux1

is a

234

[2n-1 + (m-1) (q-m)]-dimensional submanifold of it is the preimage

of the

under the mapping

Tang X

(u,y) h-

submanifold

aux

those m-planes of

is

3R^

^ x G(q,m)

x G (q,m) 1R^ x G' (q,m)

(dj(u),dj(u) + y ) ;

x G(q,m)].

Tang X x G(q,m)

of class

Further, let

(x,x',y)

Cr 1

aux2 (x,x 1,y ) = j(x) + y. submanifold ((X x X)

\ diagX)

of

by

Aux2

j (X) . or, more

X x x x G(q,m)

xf xf

G' (q,m)

and

consisting

j (x 1) - j(x)

€ y.

be the map defined by

A u x 2 is a [2n+(m-1)(q-m)]-dimensional

X x X x G(q,m)

G(q,m)

x g '(q,m)

and its image consists of

the subset of

such that

aux2 : Aux2

submanifold of

given

which contain lines tangent to

Aux^ijjm),

of the triples

of

this mapping is transverse to

The second construction: we denote by specifically by

[indeed,

[indeed, it is the preimage of the

G ’(qfm)

under the mapping

x G(q,m) ->G 1 (q,m)

given by

(x,x',y)

j(x') - j (x) + y; this mapping is transverse to G(q,m)]. r cr is of class Cand its image consists of those m-planes of 1R^

aux2

which intersect

j(X)

at more than one point.

The Basic Theorems >if be a closed n-dimensional C ' -manifold, q 27 ]R^ be an embedding of class C together

3 (LEMMA). Let

X

1 £ r £ 00, and let j : X j7 with a C -transversalization ------------------------------------------------------

t

: X

G(q,q-n)

and a neat tube

Tub T p.

Then there exist a neighborhood U of the map t~: X G f (q,q-n) r r (see 3.2) in C (X,G' (q,q-n) ) and a continuous mapping $ : U -*■ Diff X such that, for each map (i)

g £ U:

[j ° 0(g)] (x) £ g(x)

(ii)

the map

T

y

for all

:X -+ G(q,q-n),

is a transversalization of the embedding (iii)

x £ X;

T„(x ) = g(x) - [j ° 0(g)] (x) 9 j ° $ (g ) : X IRq ;

some neat tube of this transversalization contains

TubT (p/2)

.

PROOF.

Given

g £ CT (X ,G ’ (q ,q-n) ) ,

denote the map which carries each point

y E Tub^p

under the orthogonal projection onto the plane g n- hg if

is a continuous mapping

g= t ,

neighborhood

then 1/

let

h : Tub p -* m q g t into its image

g(pr (y)).

Obviously,

Cr (X,G ’(q ,q-n)) -* Cr (Tub^p ^Rq ) ,

h^ = [in: Tub^p -*■]Rq ] . inCr (X,G’ (q,q-n) )

such

Consequently, that, for any

t~

has

g £ V,

and a h g

235

is a Cr-embedding and let

i

hg (tubTP) => TubT (p/2)

(see 9.5).

For

g € 1/,

denote the composition - 1 h • (ab h ) 1 x — -J--> TubT (p/2) ----- 2--- ► h~ '(TubT (p/2) )

.

pr TubTP ---^

X

An obvious verification shows that g *+ i is a continuous mapping r 9 ^ 1/ -+ C (X,X), and that i^~ = id. Therefore, x has a neighborhood in

1/ such that i -1 ^ $ (g) = i for g € U .

Ü

and

U

$

is a dif feomorphism for all It is immediate that

$

g EU.

Set

is continuous and that

satisfy the conditions (i)-(iii). 4.

1 £ r £ 00, n' ^ 2n,

Suppose and

X1

X

is a compact n-dimensional C' -manifold, ^r is a closed n-dimensional C -manifold. Then for

Immr (X,X')

Embr (X,X ')

is dense in

is dense in

Cr (X,X*),

and for

n* ^ 2n +1 ,

Cr (X,X').

Without loss of generality, we shall prove these statements in the case

r =00;

to reduce to

the first case.

Let have to show for

fEC

when oo

(X ,X '), and let

that, for

n 1 ^ 2n+1,

U

r < °°, we simply apply Theorems 9.6 and

n ! ^ 2n,

Q

j: X

J': X'+IR^+(^ = TubT ,p '.

J^: X

enough so that

Then

3R^+C* ,

X',

and the tube

are a neighborhood

U1

of

a continuous mapping

' , (x ' ) =

embedding

g ' (x

J' ° (iii)

!

of

€ g 1 (x1)for all

(x ' )

£

small

simply by J',

J.

the

g'

x' 6 X ';

defined as

is a transversalization of the

1 (g ’) ; some neat tube of this transversalization contains

TubT , (p'/2). Now consider the mapping [T '(g')](x) = pr , (J(x)).

V

J1

defines a

Pick

the embedding

the map t ^,:X'G (q '+q ,q '+q-n ') , [ J ’ o Diff X' such that, for each

[J1° $' (g1)] (x1)

') -

and define

Tub .p '), we conclude that there T (t ') in C (X',G '(q'+q,q'+q-n'))

the map U'

t > 0.

and denote

x'

t

1

j': X 1 + M 1 ,

for any fixed

transversalization

(ii)

and

Jfc(x) = (j '(f (x),tj(x))

J£ (X) 2 dimX, show r r C^iX^X') consisting of all C -immersions that

27 be closed C ' -manifolds

and X*

Show that the set of all C -maps Tang,. ,

vX' = Im d

I IX 3dimX,

£

1

z

€ X

Cr (x,xf).

be closed C^r-manif olds

with

1£ r

f: X

£

.

X'

for all but a finite number of points

rank dxf = dim X - 1, Let

two distinct pointsx ,x

show that the set of all Cr-maps

= dim X

1£ r

such that

for any

is dense in

= 2 dim X - 1,

13. If

X2

f(x^) = f(x2), 12.

If

f + Im d

f: X X '

with

and X' show that

is dense in

Cr (X,X')-

>27

be closed C " -manifolds the set

such that the preimage of each point 27 two points, is dense in C (X,X')-

of X'

with

of all Cr-maps under

f

1£ r

£ 00.

f: XX'

contains

at most

239

§5.

THE SIMPLEST STRUCTURE THEOREMS

1. 1.

Morse Functions

The central result of this section is Theorem 2.10, whose

main conclusion is that every compact n-dimensional C -manifold can be obtained from an empty n-dimensional manifold through a finite number of fairly standard operations, namely, by attaching handles.

The entire

present subsection and that part of Subsection 2 preceding Theorem 2.10 are essentially devoted to the preparation of its formulation and proof. The remaining part of Subsection 2 contains corollaries of Theorem 2.10. In Subsection 3 this theorem is used to effectively classify the compact smooth two-dimensional manifolds. It should come as no surprise that, in contrast to the oo

previous sections, here we consider, in general, only the C -case: the theorems concerning smoothing of diffeomorphisms and manifolds (i.e., Theorems 4.4.4, 4.6.11, and 4.9.6, 4.9.8) show that we may replace the class

oo

C

27

by any class

C ,

1 £ r < 00,

without affecting the theory

discussed here.

Cobordisms and Morse Functions

boundary

00

2.

A compact C -manifold

3X

is the disjoint union of two parts,

consisting of whole components of

X

3X.Those two

beginning and the end of the cobordism when both are empty,

X

is closed.

is called a cobordism if its 3^X

is the number of components of

one without beginning (3QX = 3X,

(3QX = 0,

each

X.Each of them may be empty?

In general, given a compact 21

ways, where

3X. Among these cobordisms, there is ^ X = 3X)

and one without end

31X = 0) . Two cobordisms,

X

and

X', are said to be diffeomorphic if oo

there is a diffeomorphism (and hence a C -diffeomorphism) such that

3^X,

parts are termed the

C°°-manifold, one can transform it into a cobordism in 1

and

f(3^X) = 9q X'

and

f (3^X) = 3^X!.

f: X

X1

240

Suppose that and

are two cobordisms such that 3 ^ 0° are dif feomorphic, and let cp: 3^X 3q X' be a C -diffeo-

morphism.

Then one can form a manifold

lared manifolds

X

X

and

and

X'

by

cp.

Y

orientation reversing

3q Y = 3q X

X

and

X'

X'

Y,

cp.

and

Now

Y

naturally

3^Y = 3^X'.

We say that and

X1

are oriented and cp is

(here the orientations

those induced by the orientations of Y

by glueing the somehow col­

is the result of glueing the cobordismsX

If the cobordisms

can orient

Y

with the aid of

becomes a cobordism if we set the cobordism

X'

X

of

and

3^X and

X 1;

see 1.3.4), then one

in such a manner that both embeddings,

become orientation preserving.

are

Warning:

X

Y

and

this definition of

the orientation of the glued cobordism is not in accordance with the definition of the orientation of a glued manifold, given in 4.5.5. Two smooth closed manifolds,

and

,

are cobordant if

there is a cobordism with the beginning and the end diffeomorphic to Vq

and

,

respectively.

If, in addition,

Vq

and

are oriented,

and there is an oriented cobordism X such that one of the diffeomorphisms V q -> 3q X and -* 3^X preserves orientation, whereas the other reverses it, then we say that cobordant.

Vq

and

are oriented

Clearly, the cobordism and oriented cobordism relations are

reflexive and symmetric, and since cobordisms can be glued, they are also transitive, i.e., they are genuine equivalence relations. 3. X

is aC

A critical point

^2

-manifold

x

2

of a C -function

f: X

is nondegenerate if for some chart

(and hence for any such chart)

cp(x)

IR,

where 2

cp £ Atl^C X

is a nondegenerate critical point

of the function

(f I J ° cp 1 : im cp ]R (see 3.3.1). The |supp cp corresponding index is independent of the choice of the chart 3.3.1), and is called the index of the

point

xrelative

to

cp

(see

f.

Suppose X is a cobordism, and let f : X + IR be a °o _1 C -function; f is a Morse function if: Im f c I; f (0) = 3„X, and 0 f (1) = 3^X ; and all critical points of flie in int X and are nondegenerate. We say that a Morse function is proper if its values at distinct critical points are distinct.

The Local Structure of Morse Functions 4. f:

X-+JR

Suppose that

X

is a Morse function.

is an n-dimensional cobordism and Then for every point

x E X there

is a

241

chart (p£ Atl X with cp(x) = 0, x coincides with the composite map

such that therestriction

fl

|supp cp

cp ► im cp -- > 3R , supp cp -where the second arrow denotes one of the following functions: (t^,...,^) *■> -t^ f

if

(t^,...,^) ^

,

x £ 9qX; if

(t^,...,t^) *-► f (x) + t , point

x £ 9^X ; _if

x £ int X

is not acritical

of f ; (t

I

f

n

(x) -

is a critical point of index

t 2

1

-

.. . - t2

k

+

k +1

+ ...

+

t2 ,

n'

if

X



k.

To prove the first three cases we need only remark that the function

X

3R,

(respectively, by

defined by y h- -f (y)

y b» f (y) - x for

for

x £ 3QX)

x £ int X

U 9^X

can be completed, in a

neighborhood of x, to a system of coordinates (see 1.2.12). fourth case, we refer to Theorem 3.3.3. 5 (COROLLARY).

For the

A Morse function has only a finite number of

critical points.

An Existence Theorem 6 (LEMMA). an open dense subset Dn

1R

oo

Given any C -function A

of

lRn

f: D

such that for

y\

+ 1R,

a £ A

there exists the function

defined by x

f (x) -

(1 )

has no degenerate critical points. PROOF. functions where

D f,...,Dnf.

F =

x£ Dn

[grad f] (x) of (1) at

gradf : Dn + 3Rn

One may take

A

to be

(x £ Dn | rank d^grad f < n}. F

4.7.4 implies that if

Consider the map

that itis also dense is a = a,

x

in 3Rn .

with coordinate

Mn \ [gradf](F) ,

is clearly open, and Theorem Moreover, i’t is evident

critical point of the function (1), then

andthe matrix of the second-order partial

is precisely the matrix of the differential

derivatives

d^gradf

242

relative to the standard coordinates in Therefore, if

a £ A,

Tang x Dn

and

Tang a IRn .

then this matrix of second-order partial

derivatives is nonsingular. 7.

On every cobordism there is a proper Morse function.

First, let us show that if there exists some Morse function on the cobordism

X,

then there exists a proper Morse function on

X.

Let

x„ ,...,x be the critical points of the Morse function f: X -> IR, 1 m and let ,...,U^ be pairwise disjoint neighborhoods of these points in

intX .

Further, let

V . ,...,V be neighborhoods of x . ,...,x_ 1 m 1 m such that Cl V, cz U. , ...,Cl V e U , and let IR defined by

x * f (x) + G.d).(x) + ... + e 9q X !, and

it suffices to produce two C-embeddings,j: X

j ': X' -* X,

such that

= j (3^X ) = j M S ^ X 1)/

j (X) U j 1 (X' ) = X,

X

j (X) flj ' (X1) =

and the composite dif feomorphism

9QX ' -a^ j ' > j ' (9QX ') -^-3--- ► 9 1X coincides with

_i cp .

In order to accomplish this, let us fix: OO

a collaring such that

k: 9X * I -*■ X; f (x 1) = (x',0)

C°°-function a(t) = t

a:

for

I + I,

for all

such that

t ^ 7/8.

8 (t) = (1 - t)/2,

a C -diffeomorphism x' € 9QX';

f: X' + 9QX' x I

and an increasing

a(t) = 1/2 + t/3

Further, using the function

for

6: I

set

j (x ) = x ,

if

xex^kO^xtoj)),

j(k(z,t)) = k(z,a(t)),

if

z £ 9^X,

t € I,.

and

j'(x') = k o (cp-1 x B) o f (x') ,

if

t g 3/4

x' € X'.

I,

and

248

We can verify directly that

j

and

j’

have the required

properties. 6.

If on a cobordism there is a Morse function without

critical point, then the cobordism is trivial, PROOF. points. -1

f ^ (t) -1 (t) f

-1

Let

f : X ->■IR

be a Morse function with no critical

According to 1.5.8 (or, if one prefers, to 4.8.2), the preimage of any point

t E (0,1)

is a neat submanifold of

X;

moreover,

is obviously closed as an independent manifold (the preimages

(0) = 8nX

f

-1

are also closed manifolds). By -1 Theorems 4.5.3 and 4.5.8, the manifold f (t) has a neighborhood

(1) = 9 X

oo

together map on

and

with a C -submersion f

-1

F_j_: Uj_

(t),

tt :

for each fixed

f ^ (t) x i

-1

U

-> f

t E I.

by

(t)

U

which is the identity

Define, for

t E I,

a C -map

= (7Tt (x) ,f (x) ) . Obviously, the

differential

d F is nondegenerate for x E f ^ (t), and F induces x t _1 X: a diffeomorphism of f (t) onto f (t) x t. Consequently, F is a oo

C -embedding on a neighborhood of a neighborhood

A^_

of the point -1

diffeomorphism of

f

F^_ (At )

so that if we divide

I

t

11

(t)

in

(see 1.5.5) , i.e., there is I

such that

-1

onto

into

-1

f(t) x Afc.

m

Let

f 1 ([ (i-1)/m,i/m]) ,

= f ^((i-1)/m)

and

with

3Qf

X

be large enough

X

1/m,

then each

Then all the

3^f 1 ([(i-1)/m,i/m]) = f 1 (i/m),

If on a cobordism

single critical

A .

induces a

([ (i-1)/m,i/m]) =

now Lemma 5 shows that the entire cobordism 7.

m

intervals of length

such interval is contained in one of the sets cobordisms

F

X

are trivial, and

is trivial.

there is a Morse function with a

point of index k

and noother

is an elementary cobordism of index

critical points, then

k.

The proof is quite long and we shall begin by constructing an auxiliary cobordism

Y.

critical point of index

Fix a Morse function k,

say

x,

f: X

I

with a single

and no other critical points.

Theorem 1.4, there is a chart

2

Int Dn_k)) n f" 1 ([f (x) - T 5-,f (x) + £§-] ) ,

and the map E (n,k) fl mo

cp" 1 (lm

X

eDn_k))

fl f _1 ([f (x)

2

-

given by the formula (t1 , .. .,tn ) ►> CP 1 (Gt1 ,...,Etn ) , which together provide the desired diffeomorphism.

2

^§-,f(x) + -^§— ])

252

8 (COROLLARY). cobordism

X

Suppose that on a given n-dimensional

with connected boundary there exists a Morse function

with a unique critical point.

Then

X

is diffeomorphic to

Dn .

A t t a c h i n g Handles

9. ip: S^

Let X

^ x Dn k

be an n-dimensional cobordism and let

9^X be aC^-embedding.

the elementary cobordism 3 ^X

El(3^Xfcp)

3q E1(8^X,cp) (see 2)

The result of glueing

X

and

by the canonical diffeomorphism

is said to be obtained from

X

byattaching

a handle of index k . By attaching a handle of index

0

to

X

we replace, up to a

diffeomorphism, X by x| |Dn ; the new component of the boundary, n“1 i.e., in2 ^S -*-s added to 3^X. To attach a handle of index n, we actually glue X and Dn by a diffeomorphism of one of the components of 10.

8^X

onto

Sn ^.

Every cobordism

X

can be obtained, up to a diffeomor-

phism, from the standard trivial cobordism finite number of handles. f: X

3R,

3^X x I, by attaching a

Moreover, given any proper Morse function

one may choose these handles so that their number will not

exceed the number of critical points of

f.

We prove this statement by induction on the number of critical points of f

has

f.

m ^ 1

If

f

has no critical points, Theorem 6 suffices.

critical points, then there is

one of the critical values of

f

c E (0,1)

is greater than

remaining ones are smaller than c. We cut -1 -1 -1 f ([0,c]) and f (tc ,1]) .On f (t0,c])

X

c,

If

such that

while the

into two cobordisms:

there is a proper Morse

function with m-1 critical points, for example, x » f(x)/c. -1 f ([c,1]) there is a Morse function with a unique critical point, for example, x (f (x) - c)/(1 - c) . the second cobordism is elementary. 11.

Finally, note that by Theorem 7 oo

A closed n-dimensional C -manifold

X

on which there is

Morse function having only two critical points is homeomorphic to PROOF.

We remark (leaving the trivial case

n = 0

Sn .

aside)

that every Morse function with only two critical points is proper (the two points are necessarily a maximum and a minimum). shows that

X

two handles. index

n,

Thus Theorem 10

can be obtained from an empty manifold by attaching Obviously, the first handle has index

and hence

X

0,

and the second

actually results from glueing two copies of

On

253

Dn

by

a diffeomorphism

of

Sn ^ .

AHomotopy Corollary

to

12(LEMMA). k V IU D , where

The f:

cobordism El(V,tp) ishomotopyequivalent k _1 S V is given by f (y) =tp(y,0). Moreover,

there is a homotopy equivalence with the inclusion

V Uf D

El(V,tp)

which agrees on

V

V[= B^El (V,tp) ] + El(V,tp).

One can assemble such a homotopy equivalence from the above v inclusion V + El (V ,tp) and the embedding D El(V,tp) which takes k each point x E D into the point x/4 £ E(n,k). To complete the proof, it is enough to remark that the constructed mapping V Dk El(V,cp) is a topological embedding whose image is a strong deformation retract of

El (V ,tp) . 13.

Every compact n-dimensional smooth manifold is homotopy

equivalent to a finite cellular space of dimension PROOF.

£ n.

The discussion in 1.2 implies that one may assume that

the given manifold is a cobordism with an empty beginning.

Therefore,

all we have to show is that if an n-dimensional cobordism is homotopy equivalent to a finite cellular space of dimension

£ n,

then it

retains this property after we attach to it an arbitrary handle; see 10. But from Lemma 12 it follows that attaching a handle of index k to a k cobordism X has the same homotopy effect as attaching D to X by k- ^ some embedding f: S X. Now replace X by a finite cellular space Y

of dimension

£ n

with the same homotopy type,

by its composition with a homotopy equivalence

replace the map

X

Y,

replace this composition by a homotopic cellular map 2.3.2.4).

f

and subsequently k-1 g: S Y (see

By Theorem 1.3.7.8, the cobordism which results by attaching

a handle of index k to X is homotopy equivalent to the space k k Y Ug D ; according to 2.1.5.5, Y D is a finite cellular space of dimension

£ n.

Spherical Modifications oo

14. Let V be a closed n-dimensional C -manifold, and let k— 1 n—k + 1 00 tp: S x D ->• V b e a C -embedding. Fix arbitrary collars on Y ^ cp(Sk_1 x IntDn_k + ^) by the dif feomorphism

and

Dk x Sn k , and then glue these manifolds k—1 n —k k —1 n —k ab tp : S xs +tp(S xs ) of the

254

boundary of the second onto the boundary of the first. glued manifold is obtained from the embedding

cp.*

15.

The number

V k

by a spherical modification along is the index of the modification.

is obtained from the cobordism X k— 1 n —k by attaching a handle using an embedding cp: S x D ^ 9 ^X , then 9^Xf

If the cobordism

We say that the

is obtained from

i • embedding

9^X

X'

by a spherical modification along the same

/■'«k 1 n-k « .. cp: S x D + 9^X . PROOF.

Since

9^X ' = 9 ^El (9^X ,cp) ,

9 ^El (9^X ,cp)is obtained from

9^X

cp.

is the result of glueing the spaces

Recall that

El(9^X,cp)

by

we actually claim that

a spherical modification along

[9^X v. cp(S^

^ x int (^-Dn ^) )] x i

and E(n,k)

Obviously,

[9^X \ cp(S^ ^ x Int Dn ^)] x 1

by

and

el

(see 2) .

E(n,k) D 9 ^El (9

are compact (n-1 )-dimensional submanifolds of the manifold

^X ,cp)

9^El (9 ^X ,cp) ,

which they cover, and they intersect along their common boundary. Consider the mappings pr 1 : [a.jX V tp(Sk 1 x Int Dn k )]

x 1 -► 9 X \ cp (Sk 1 x Int Dn k )

and Ip: E(n,k) n 3 nEl (3 1X ,cp) -* Dk x sn-k-1, \l>(t1 , ... ,tn )

I6,t t , 15 1..... k

(tk*1.....tn ) (t?

k +1

n

oo —1 is a C -diffeomorphism such that pr^ ( (z fZ^)) = _k — 1 k—1 = cp(z^,z2) for all z 0,

then

handles,crosscaps, and

X

q„.

If

q . = 0,

can be glued from a

l^+l^-l

sphere with one handle, one crosscap, and

holes and a

one hole.

But we already

proved that this second manifold is diffeomorphic to a sphere with three crosscaps and one hole. sphere with

g^-1

Consequently,

handles,

h2+2

crosscaps,

so diffeomorphic to a sphere with holes. 4 (LEMMA).

Let

X

2g^+h2

of two components of (i)

if

holes, then

1-2

1

X

X1

1^+12~2

crosscaps and

holes, and

1 +12«2

be the result of attaching a

1-2

Then:

is diffeomorphic to a sphere with is diffeomorphic to a sphere with

jlf X

holes, then

caps and

X'

9x.

holes, or to a sphere with (ii)

and

and

X by a diffeomorphism of the boundary of the handle onto

the union

1

is diffeomorphic to a

be a smooth, compact, connected,

two-dimensional manifold, and let handle to

X

2g+2

crosscaps and

g handles and g+1 handles and

1-2

is diffeomorphic to a sphere with X'

holes; h

is diffeomorphic to a sphere with

crosscaps h+2

cross­

holes.

This is a corollary of Lemma 3: indeed, in both cases one can cut

X1

into two manifolds, such that the first one differs from

X

by having one hole less, while the second is diffeomorphic to a sphere with one handle and one hole, or to a disc with an inverted handle. 5.

Let

X

and

X2

be smooth, compact, two-dimensional

manifolds, and

let cp be a diffeomorphism of a nonempty union of whole

components of

3X2 onto a nonempty union of whole components of

Denote by both

X^

X

the manifold glued from

andX2

X^

and

X2

by means of

are diffeomorphic to model surfaces, then

X

3X^. cp. If is also

diffeomorphic to one of the model surfaces. This is a consequence of Lemmas 3 and 4, because glueing by means of

cp

is equivalent to first glueing by the diffeomorphism of

one of the components of obtained by compressing handles equal

9X2 cp,

onto the corresponding component of

and

subsequently attaching a number of

to half the number of the components of

which remain to be identified.

9X^

and

8X^,

260

The Main Theorem 6.

Every smooth, connected, compact, two-dimensional manif

is diffeomorphic to one of the model surfaces. Applying Theorems 2.10 and 5, all we need to show is that the components of the elementary two-dimensional cobordisms are diffeomorphic to model surfaces.

And this is not hard to check directly by examining

all possible cases, if we recall that every smooth, closed, one-dimensional manifold is diffeomorphic to a sum of circles. it out,every elementary cobordism of index m

circles is diffeomorphic to a sum of

a sphere with one hole. constructed from a sum of

0 m

constructed from a sum of spheres with two holes and

Next, every elementary cobordism of index m

2

circles (and a differentiable embedding

of a circle in this sum) is diffeomorphic to a sum of two holes and a sphere with one hole. cobordism of index

To spell

m-1

spheres with

And finally, every elementary

1

constructed from a sum of m circles and a dif0 1 ferentiable embedding of S * D in this sum is diffeomorphic to one

of the following three manifolds:

a sum of

and a sphere with three holes; a sum of a sphere with three holes; a sum of

m-1

m-1

spheres with two holes

spheres with two holes and

spheres with two holes and a

sphere with one crosscap and two holes (for cases in Fig * 11).

m-2

m = 2,

one see the three

261

7 (INFORMATION).

Every compact, connected, two-dimensional

topological manifold is homeomorphic to one of the model surfaces.

Cellular Decompositions of the Closed Model Surfaces 8.

The closed model surfaces possess standard rigged cellular

decompositions, which generalize the canonical decompositions 2

sphere

S ,

of the

2

the complex projective space

1

(CP , and the torus

into two cells, three cells, and four cells, respectively.

S

1

xS

Each of

these standard decompositions, except the no-cell decomposition of the empty model surface, contains only one 0-cell and only one 2-cell, while the number of 1-cells is for a sphere with with

g

h

2g

for a sphere with

crosscaps.

handles is a bouquet of

a sphere with

g

handles,

and

h

Therefore, the 1-skeleton of a sphere 2g

circles, while the 1-skeleton of

h crosscaps is a bouquet of

h

circles.

Moreover, the

description of the entire rigged cellular decomposition reduces to the characterization of the attaching map for the 2-cell, i.e., of a certain map of

S^

into the aforementioned bouquet. We disregard the values

g = 0,1

and

considered, and for the case of a sphere with

g

h = 0,1,

handles, we represent

S^

as the contour of aregular polygon with first vertex

4g

edges, arranged successively as

In the case of a sphere with

h

already ort^

and

crosscaps, we represent

as the contour of a regular polygon with first vertex

ort^

and

S

1

2h

edges, which are arranged successively as C1 ' C1 ' •••' ch' ch • In both cases we form a quotient space of

S

1

by identifying

each edge with the correspondig "primed" edge, as follows: identified with

a|,

and

b^

with

b

cu

is

through a reflection with

respect to a line (relative to which these edges are symmetric), c.

is identified with

its center).

c|

while

through a rotation of the polygon (around

In either of cases the quotient space is a bouquet of

circles: in the first case the number of circles is 2g, and in the 1 second h. The projection of S onto this quotient space is the required attaching map.

262

Of course, we still have to convince the reader that the cellular spaces produced in this manner are homeomorphic to the model surfaces.

To this end, let us divide our 4g-gon into a g-gon and

pentagons, by drawing diagonals which cut out quadruplets Similarly, we divide our 2h-gon into a h-gon and drawing diagonals which cut out pairs

Identifying the edges

ci'ci

and

h

g

a^f b^,a^,b^.

triangles, by

(see Fig. 12).

the way described above,

all the vertices of the remaining g-gon become one and the same point, thus transforming the g-gon into a sphere with

g

circular apertures;

at the same time, the edges of the pentagons are identified in such a manner that each pentagon becomes a torus with a circular aperture. Attaching these holed tori to the holed sphere in such a way as to restore all that was destroyed by the auxiliary (diagonal) cuts, we obtain, up to a homeomorphism, a sphere with the prescribed identifications of the edges

g

handles.

ci'ci

Similarly,

take all the

vertices of the h-gon into one and the same point, thus transforming the h-gon into a sphere with

h

circular apertures; at the same time,

each triangle becomes a Mobius strip, since two of its edges are identified.

Attaching these strips to the holed sphere, we obtain, up

to a homeomorphism,a sphere with

h

crosscaps.

[Warning: the boundaries

of the previous circular apertures (in the sphere) have a common point, and for

g = 2

or

h = 2,

they even coincide.]

263

The Hoinotopy Structure of the Nonclosed Model Surfaces 9.

A sphere with

equivalent to a bouquet of caps and

1

2g+l-1

g

handles and

circles.

1

holes is homotopy

A sphere with

holes is homotopy equivalent to a bouquet of

h

cross­

h+1-1

circles. To prove these assertions, we first note that by attaching the 4g-gon to the bouquet of

2g

circles as in 8, we produce, up to a

homeomorphism, a sphere with

g

first remove the interiors of interior of the 4g-gon.

handles and 1

Denote by

(i)

holes, provided we

pairwise disjoint discs from the

Now let us arrange these discs such that every

line passing through the first vertex, one of them.

1

A

ort^,

intersects no more than

the set consisting of:

the contour of the 4g-gon;

(ii)

the

21-2

discs and passing through (iii)

segments tangent to

1-1

of the removed

ort^;

the outer arcs of the boundaries of these discs having

as endpoints the tangency points. Then

A

holed 4g-gon.

is obviously a strong deformation retract of the

If we now project this

handles, the above strong deformation

4g-gon onto the sphere with g retraction is transformed into a

strong deformation retraction of the holed sphere with the image of

A

under the projection.

handles onto

Finally, note that this image

is manifestly homeomorphic to a bouquet of The proof for a sphere with

g

h

2g+l-1

circles.

crosscaps and

1

holes

is a

verbatim repetition of the previous argument, with the 4g-gon replaced by the 2h-gon.

4. 1.

Exercises

Show that every smooth, connected, noncompact, one­

dimensional manifold is homeomorphic to a line or a half-line (see 3.1). 2.

Define a submanifold of

by the equation to a sphere with 3.

z™ + z™ + z™ = °, (m-1)(m-2)/2

2

CEP

in homogeneous coordinates

and show that it is diffeomorphic

handles (see 2.4.4 and 2..4.5).

Show that the subset of

1

(CP

1

x (CP

consisting of the

264

points

((z :z2),(w1:w2))

such that

+ w 2* = Z2 ^

manifold diffeomorphic to a sphere with 4.

(p-1)(q-1)

~ W 2*

iS 3

handles.

Show that every smooth, closed, connected, orientable,

three-dimensional manifold can be obtained by glueing two copies of a handle-body by a diffeomorphism of its boundary. (A handle-body is a 3 part of 3R bounded by a sphere with handles which is standardly 3 embedded in IR ) . 5.

Consider the manifold obtained by glueing two copies of 1 2 1 1 the solid torus S x d by a diffeomorphism of its boundary S x S , given by the formula integers satisfying 3 morphic to S for for

(z^z^)

(z^ Z^/Z^ z^) ,

ad - be = ±1. a = 0,

to

S

2

where

a,b,c,d

are

Show that this manifold is diffeo1 3 * S for a = ±1, and to 1RP

a = ±2. oo

6.

Show that on every connected closed C -manifold there is

a Morse function with a unique local minimum and a unique local maximum. 7. 9qX

and

Show that on every connected cobordism

d ^X

int X .

Show that on every cobordism there is a proper Morse

function such that, for any of its critical points indices

and 9.

k2,

k^ < k2

implies

Suppose that on a cobordism

with no critical points of index orientable.

with nonempty

there is a proper Morse function with no local maxima

and minima lying in 8.

X

1

Show that the cobordism

orientation of

9^X

x^

and

of

f (x^) < f(x2>. X

there is a Morse function

and that the manifold X

x^,

9QX

is

is orientable and that every

is induced by some orientation of

X.

Chapter 4. Bundles

§1.

BUNDLES WITHOUT GROUP STRUCTURE

1. 1.

A bundle

is a triple

topological spaces and and

B

General Definitions

p: T

denote

Tand

pr £ ,

p

is its projection.

£ over the point

A section of the

bundle £

thatpr ^ ° s = idbs^.

can be connected homotopy

Two

sections of

such that

(pr £ ^ (B) ,ab pr ^,B) ,

£,

we

tl £, bs£,

£

^

map s: bs £

tl£

arehomotopic if they of sections, i.e.,

bya

equals

to a subspace

B c

bs ^

is

£ ID • I^

and

is the bundle

x tl C2 ,pr £ x pr i 2 ' h s ^1 * bs ^2* ' denoted bY £ bs £ ,

£

is a pair of

such that

the

266

tl E '

tl K (1 )

Pr K ' bs E is commutative.

If

:£ 1 + tl (p

and an equivalence if, in addition,

bs

tl £

and

B

tl 4>

of

in: B -+ bs E,

and

bs f, ,

bs i>

the

form the inclusion

£ I in £. IB The commutativity of the diagram (1) implies that

F

is

a fiber preserving map (or a fibered map), i.e., it takes each fiber of into a fiber of

£.

Obviously, if

an arbitrary fiber preserving map map

f: bs£'

if the map

bs E,

pr £'

continuity of

f.

pr E, * (tl £ ') = bs £ 1,

F: tl E,1

tl £

is factorial, then the continuity of £1

is one and only one continuous map Let

f

Moreover,

F

implies the

is a bundle with factorial

projection, then given any fiber preserving map

4.

there is a unique

which makes diagram (1) commutative.

Therefore, if

then given

: E,1 -* £

F : tl £ ' -* such that

tl E,

tl c}> = F.

be a continuous map of a topological space

into

the base of a bundle

£.

B,

total space {(b,x) £ B x tl £ | f (b) = pr E(x)} ,

there

B

We may define a new bundle having base

the restriction of the projection

pr^: B x tl £

This new bundle is called the bundle induced from i denoted by f *E,.

and projection B

E,

by —

to the last space. f,

and is

It is clear that the restriction of the projection pr9 : B x t U + tl £ to tl(f’£) defines for each b £ bs(f’£) a ^ i homeomorphism of the fiber of f *£ over the point b onto the fiber of

E,

a map

over the point f (b) £ bs EJ , and determines, together with f, i f *£ £. This map is called the adjoint of f and is denoted by

ad f . If

f

The following observations also need no proofs or explanations. i is a homeomorphism, then the adjoint map ad f : f*£ £ is an

isomorphism; if, in addition,

f = id bs 5/

then

adf

is an equivalence.

267

If

f

is an inclusion, then

between

f*£

and

^ |g •

5

establishes an equivalence

Finally, given arbitrary continuous maps

f: B -> bs £ and g: B' + B, canonically equivalent.

x

ad f : f *£ the bundles

(f o q ) 1 Z

and

g ! (f!?)

are

5- If : K 1 K is a map of bundles, then the formula (pr £ ' (x) ,tl (x) ) defines a continuous map tl £ 1 tl ((bs cf>) 1£) .

This map defines, together with id bs C ', a map of i (bs (j>) £ ,which we denote by corr cj) ; we say that the map

.

Obviously,

corrects

The obvious example of a bundle having a given base homeomorphic to a given space

bundle

(or

the product bundle)

fibers

b x f

of the product

homeomorphic to

F

is

the

B

standardtrivial

(B x F,pr^,B). Its fibers are the

B x f,

and are obviously canonically

F.

Notice that the sections (B x F ,pr^,B)

continuous functions

B

A bundle

B

B x f

of the standard trivial

are in a one-to-one correspondence with the F:

corresponding section s: and s are associated. 2.

corr

Locally Trivial Bundles

and fibers

bundle

into the bundle

ad(bs({)) o corr =.

2. 1.

£'

£

for each function

B -> B x f ,

f : B ■+ F

s(b) = (b,f(b));

there is

the

we say that

f

is trivial or, more specifically,

topologically trivial, if it is equivalent to a standard trivial bundle. Any equivalence between a standard trivial bundle and to as a trivialization of A bundle

£ is

topologically locally hood

U

F,

is referred

£. locally trivial or, more specifically,

trivial, if every point of

such that the bundle

bs £

has a neighbor­

is trivial.

Since the projection of a product of topological spaces onto one of its factors is an open map, the projection of a trivial bundle is open, and hence so is the projection of a locally trivial bundle. It is immediate that the product of two trivial (locally trivial) bundles is a trivial (respectively, locally trivial) bundle. Furthermore, any bundle induced from a trivial (locally trivial) bundle is trivial (respectively, locally trivial). If f : B i constant, then f ‘£ is a trivial bundle, for any £. 3.

bs£

is

The fibers of a trivial bundle are, as those of the

standard trivial bundle, homeomorphic to each other.

However, in a

268

trivial, but not standard trivial bundle, these homeomorphisms are not canonical any longer.

If the base of a locally trivial bundle is

connected, then its fibers are also mutually homeomorphic; indeed, the set of the points of the base having fibers homeomorphic to a given fiber is open, and the sets of this type form a partition of the base (see 1.3.3.5).

On the other hand, the example of the locally trivial

bundle ( (B x F)J |_(B' x F'),pr^J |_pr -j ^BJ | _B ') * where B, F, B ' , and F* are arbitrary topological spaces, demonstrates that in a locally trivial bundle the fibers over points situated in different components of the base are not necessarily homeomorphic.

Moreover, we see that

there are locally trivial bundles which are not trivial. A nontrivial, locally trivial bundle may have a connected base; see 5 and 6.

Coverings 4.

A locally trivial bundle is a covering in the broad sense

if all its fibers are discrete spaces.

In this case the total space

and the projection are usually called a covering space and a covering projection, respectively.*

Clearly , every point of a covering space has

a neighborhood such that the restriction of the projection to this neighborhood is a homeomorphism onto its image in the base. A covering in the broad sense is said to be a covering in the narrow sense or, simply, a covering, if both the covering and base spaces are connected and nonempty.

According to 3, all the fibers of a

covering have the same cardinality, called the number of sheets (or the multiplicity) of the given covering. 5. A covering whose number of sheets is greater than one cannot be trivial. Indeed, the total space of a trivial bundle is homeomorphic to the product

of the base and a fiber, and hence it cannot

when the fiber

is discrete and has more than one point.

beconnected

6 (EXAMPLES). is defined as

The bundle (s\hel ,S1), where hel : S^ -> S^ m m m hel^lz) = z, is an m-sheeted covering for any m ± 0.

The bundle

OR1 ,hel,S1) , where hel: TO ->■ S1 is defined as 27Tix hel(x) = e , is a countably-sheeted covering. If

k / 0,n,

then the bundle having total space

G (n,k),

* Translator's note: Frequently, the terms covering space and covering projection are themselves used to designate the whole covering .

269

base

G(n,k),

and projection equal to the submersion exhibited in

3.2.2.3, is a two-sheeted covering. for n ^ 1.

In particular, so is

Finally, let us show that every sphere with admits as a two-sheeted covering space a sphere with h-1 3.5.3); here

h

one may construct it starting with

h

2

For

2

crosscaps h = 1 , we

2

(S ,pr, IRP ).

Generally,

2

copies of 2

h

handles (see Subsection

is an arbitrary positive integer.

already encountered such a covering, namely

(Sn ,pr, 3RPn )

2

(S ,pr, IRP ).

this, restrict one copy of

(S ,pr, IRP )

projective plane with

holes, and restrict the remaining

h-1

To do

to a covering over the h-1

copies to coverings over the projective plane with one hole (i.e., over the Mobius strip).

Now glue the bases of these

into a sphere with

h

the holes.

h

restricted coverings

crosscaps by diffeomorphisms of the boundaries of

The resulting glued space is thebase of a new covering,

whose total space is obtained by glueing the

h

total spaces of the

above restricted coverings: one of these total spaces is a sphere with h-1

pairs of antipodal holes, while the remaining

h-1

total spaces

are spheres with two antipodal holes, i.e., cylinders over circles. (Each of these

h-1

cylinders has two possible covering attaching maps,

and we mayuse either one of them.) a cylinder

Since "sealing" a

pair of holes by

results in replacing this pair by a handle, what we actually

obtain is a two-sheeted covering having a sphere with the base and a sphere with

h-1

3. 1. condition:

A bundle

£

Pr K ° f0 = f pr £ ° f

= f

face of

Ir

f: ir

crosscaps as

handles as the total space.

Serre Bundles

is a Serre bundle* if it satisfies Serre1s

for any positive integer

continuous maps

h

bs £

and

r

or

f -: ir ^

there is a continuous map

r = 0,

and every

tl £ , related by -■ Pr f : I tl £ such that

ir „ = f„. ■j-r-1 0

anc^

(We identify the cube

2T_ 1 I

with that

whose points have the last coordinate equal to zero; see

1.2.5.7.) The requirement that

pr E, ° f

= f

appearing in Serre's

condition is fundamental in the theory of bundles, and is encountered also when maps,

f

f~: X *

fibration.

and tl K

f

are defined on spaces other than cubes. and

f: X -> bs £ ,

Translator's note:

If two

satisfy this last requirement,

Frequently called a Serre fiber space or a weak

270

we say that

f~

covers

we also say that

f

for arbitrary

and

£

f

(or that

f~ is a lifting or lift of

can be lifted to

Obviously,

f;

tl £) ; this terminology is valid

X. the p rod uc t of two Serre b u n d l e s and a b u n d l e

induced from a Serre bu nd le are a g ai n Serre bundles.

2. are take

Examples of bundles which do not satisfy Serre's condit

(I,p,I), r = 1,

where

p(x) = x/2

f = id I , p o f

p(x) = 4x(1-x).

f ~ (0) = 0;

f(x1,x2) = 4x1 (1-x1) (1—x 2) , such that

or

= f

in the second case, take

f~ = id I .

and

In the first case,

f

r = 2,

Then there is no continuous map

r-1

f0'

We remark that the first bundle has both empty and nonempty fibers, while the second has a single connected fiber, the others being not connected.

As we shall see later (see 5.4.3.6), such features of

a bundle are not compatible with Serre 1s condition vfrien the base is connected.

Serre's Condition is Local 3.

If

neighborhood

every point of the

Usuch that

£ |u

base

bs £

of a bundle

is a Serre bundle, then

£

£

has a

itself is

a Serre bundle. PROOF. maps satisfying

Let

f : in

bs £

pr £ o f~ = f |

and

.

sets such that the restriction of

f ^ : in ^

Since

£

bs £

tl £

be continuous

can be covered by open

to each of these

sets satisfies

Serre's condition, Theorem 1.1.7.16 yields a positive integer that every cube of edge

1/N

contained in

one of these open sets.

Divide

ln

into

arrange these cubes in dictionary order n — 1 i W± = I U (Uj_ B x f be continuous maps such that

(B x F,pr^,B),

Let

f: ln

pr^ o

B

= f in-i "

Define

f : in

B x f

as

f (x1,...,xn ) = (f (x1,•••,xn ),pr2 o f0 (X l ,...,xn-1)) . Clearly, 5.

pr^ o f

-

f

and

In-1

f0

The following example demonstrates that there are Serre

bundles which

are notlocally trivial.

with vertices

(0,0),

defined by

f

(0,1),

p^ (x ,x2) = x^ ,

Let

and (1,0),

T

be the

and let

p2 (x^,x2) = x 2 .

triangle in

p ^ ,p2 : T -*■ I

The bundle

not locally trivial; indeed, the fibers over the points

0

JR

2

be

(T^^I)

is

and

are

1

not homeomorphic. However, (T,p ,1) does satisfy Serre's condition: n ~ n~ 1 rw if f: I -*• I and f^: I -*■ T are continuous, and p^ o f^ = f zn-i then the map f~: in T defined by f~(x1,...,xn ) = (f(x1,...,xn ),min(1-f(x1,...,xn )/P2 o f 0 (X 1 ^ is continuous, covers

f,

and equals

f^

on

•' X n - 1 )))

n “1 I

This example shows also that in a Serre bundle with connected base there can be nonhomeomorphic fibers.

Actually, there are Serre

bundles with connected base and in which some fibers are not even homotopy equivalent, being instead equivalent in a certain weaker sense (see 5.4.4.3 and 5.4.3.6) .

272

The Covering Homotopy Theorem 6.

Suppose that

cellular pair.

£

is a Serre bundle and (X,A)

Then for everycontinuous

homotopy

F: X xI ->

bs £ of

G: A x I

tl £

f ~ L covering

f~

covers

which

of

PROOF.

bs £ , e e

while the formula f (cha (x)), e

if

t = 0,

if

x E Sr ^

^0,e(x't) (cha^ (x) ,t) ,

r 27” 1 n : (D x 0) U (S x I) -*tl £ . u ,e (Dr x I,(Dr x 0) U (Sr ^ x i) ) and (ir + \ i r )

defines a continuous map Obviously, the pairs are homeomorphic , and

j

^ = ^e (Drx0)u (S17-^xi)# Consequently, r there is a continuous map (J> : D x I -> tl £ covering $ and ^ ~ ^ r—1 extending n . Since (x,t) =F (cha (x),t) for all x ES , u ,e e r— i e the maps ~ corresponding to all r-cells from X \ A together with F~_^

pr ^ o ^

yield a continuous map

evident that

,_M , _ ^p r s£ o F~r = F I|(AUske^X)xi

Hence, we may use induction on sequence

(F~:

each other. extending

F~: (A U ske^X)

r,

(A U ske^X) x I -> tl

x I + tl £ , and it is

and r|(AUske^_^X)xi F ~ | /7VM , _ = r-1 F~ . .

settingF~^ = G,

to

£ ^r-_^ homotopies

These homotopies define a homotopy of

produce a which extend

f~covering

F

and

G. 7.

Let

X

be a cellular space and let

f~: X

tl £

be

continuous. If £ is a Serre bundle, then every homotopy of pr £ is covered by ahomotopy of f~.

© f~

This is precisely Theorem 6 for the absolute case A = 0, ] and hence the proof is immediate. We note t that for X = in , Theorem 7 reduces to Serre1s condition for r = n+1.

273

The Case of Coverings 8.

Suppose that

is a covering in the broad sense,

K

a connected

topological space, and

I_f

= pr£o g

pr£Jo f

PROOF.

and

f

f,g: X -> tl £

equals

g

X is

are continuous maps.

at somepoint, then

Since the set {x E X | f (x) / g(x)}

f = g.

is open and, by

assumption, its complement is not empty, it suffices to show that this complement is also open. = g(Xg), all

then

x € U.

x^

Let

has a neighborhood

V

anyneighborhood of

U

such that

be a neighborhood of

pr £|v : V -> pr E, (V) pr £ (f (x) )

In other words, let us verify that if f(x) = g(x)

= pr£(g(x))

with

f (U)

for all

c= v

for

such that

isa homeomorphism (see 2.4) , and take x^

=

andg(U) c: v.

x £ X,

we have

U

to be

Since

f(x) = g(x)

for all

x € U. 9.

Suppose that

£

is a covering in the broad sense,

a connected cellular space with a distinguished Q-cell f ,g:

X

£

tl

are continuous. If the maps

f(x^) = g(x^),

XQ-homotopic and

PROOF. pr

K° g

f

then

pr £ and

o

g

f

h(xQ) = f(xQ) = g(xQ)

and

pr ^ ° h = pr

f g,

and

and pr £

are

By Theorem 6, any x^-homotopy from

is covered by an x^-homotopy from

Xq ,

X is

o

g

are

XQ-ho m o t o p i c .

p r £ © f to

to some map

h.

Since

Proposition 8 yields

h = g.

4. 1.

Bundles with Map Spaces as Total Spaces

We say that a bundle

£

satisfies the strong Serre

condition* if for every topological space f~: X -> tl £ , of

f~

and every homotopy

which covers F. If we replace X

F of

X,

every continuous map

pr £ ° f7

there is a homotopy

by a cube of arbitrary dimension, then this

becomes the simple Serre condition; moreover, when

X

is restricted to

be an arbitrary cellular space, we obtain again a condition equivalent to the simple Serre condition; see 3.7. 2.

Let

space, respectively. bundle

(X,A) and If X

Y

is Hausdorff and locally compact,

(C(X,Y),C(in,id),C(A,Y))

* Translator's note: space or a fibrat i o n .

bea Borsuk pairand a topological then the

satisfies the strong Serre condition.

Such a bundle is frequently called a Hurewicz fiber

274

PROOF. f~ :

Z

Since and

+ C(X,Y), X

Consider a topological space and a homotopy

F: Z x I

Z,

a continuous map

C (A ,Y )

of

is Hausdorff and locally compact, the maps

G: Z x A x i

y

given by

G(z,x,t) = [F (z ,t )] (x)

C(in,id)

of

.

g : Z x X ■+ Y

g~(z,x) = (f~ )A (z,x) = [f (z) ] (x)

are continuous (see 1.2.7.6).

It is clear

and that

G is a homotopy of 9~| z x a ‘ N o w (Z x X,Z x a ) is a Borsuk pair(see 1.3.5.5. and 1.3.5.3), and hence G extends to a homotopy G of g . Finally, the formula F : Z x i

C(X,Y) 3.

[F (z,t)](x) = G (z,x,t) of

f which covers

defines a homotopy

F.

In a bundle with connectedbase and satisfying the strong

Serre condition, the fibers are pairwise homotopy equivalent. Let

£

be the given bundle, and let s be a path joining -1 -1 two given points of bs £ . Set Fq = pr £ (s (0 )) and F^ = pr E, (s (1 )) Now consider two homotopies of the composite maps

: F^

Fq —

I -> bs £

x

and

and

(t).

Since

£

tl

Jg(x,t)

£

= s(t) and

satisfies the strongSerre condition,

are covered by two homotopies,

J~: F^ x I

bs

— > tl £ --^r ^ •>bs £ and

F^ — ^S— ► tl £ —P.f ■§..-> bs £ , respectively, given by J^(x,t) = s

: F^ x i

of the maps

Jq : Fq

in: F q -* tl £

i

x

and

tl £

Jq

and

in: F

tl £ ,

respectively. Now j q ^f q x c F 1 ' JT C F0 ' andhence there are well-defined maps fQ : FQ -+ F^ , fQ (x) = J~(x,1), and f 1 : F -+ FQ , f^ (x) = J^(x,1).

We next show that f^ o f^

and since the construction is symmetric, id F 1 .

is homotopic to

f^ o f^

id F q ,

will be homotopic to

The formulas J~(x,2t),

if

t £ 1/2,

J1 (fQ (x) ,2t-1) ,

if

t * 1/2,

j(x,t) = and H (x,t ,t ) = s ((1- t ) (1 - I1-2tI define a map

j: Fq x I -> tl E,

and a homotopy

H: (Fq x i) x i

of p r £ o j. Again, using Serre's strong condition, H to a homotopy H~: (FQ x I) x i -*tl £ of j. Since (1- t ) (1 -

|1 — 2 11 ) = 0

f or

t

=

H~((FQ x (0 U 1)) x I) u H~((fq

1 or

t = 0,1,

we

s ee

bs £

can be lifted

that

x I) x1 ) c F . Therefore, the

formula

275

K(x,t) =

defines a homotopy

t O

if t * 1/3,

H~( (x,3t-1) ,1) ,

if 1/3 £ t * 2/3,

H~( (x,1 ) ,3-3t),

if t 5 2/3,

K: F q x I -* f q .

= j(x,0) = J~(x,0) =

H ( (x,0) ,3t) ,

= xand

o

K(x,0) = H~((x,0),0) =

K (x,1) = H~((x,1),0) = j (x,1)

= ^1 ^ 0 f l

Since

'it follows that

K

=

is a homotopy from

id F q

f Q .

4.

Given arbitrary points

topological space

X,

C (I ,0 ,1 ;X,Xq ,x^j )

have

PROOF.

thespaces the

,x^x|

of a connected

C(I,0,1;X ,x Q ,x 1) and

same homotopy type .

C (1,0,1 ;X,Xq,x^ )

fibers of the bundle

x^x

and

C (1,0 ,1 ;X ,x^ ,x^j )

(C (I ,X) ,C (in,id) ,C ( (0 U 1) ,X))

are the

over the points

(xQ ,x^) and (xq ,x'j) of its base C ((0 U 1 ) ,X) = X x X; theorems 2 and 3, they have the same homotopy type.

hence by

The Adjoint Serre Bundle 5. bundle

Given an arbitrary bundle

£,

we let

ad £

denote the

with the samebase, total space { (x,s) E tl£ x C (I ,bs £) | s (0) = pr£(x) } /

and projection

(x,s)

Notice that

-* s(1).

We call ad £

the total spaces tl ad £

same homotopy type: the formulas u

X

is the constant path in

homotopy equivalences

bs £

while the

the first one is homotopic to st (t

)

=

S

where

(x ,u ^)

with

Indeed, the

id tl £,

((x,s),t) b (x,s ),

x b-

tl £ + tl ad £

inverses to one another. the second one is

the bundle adjoint

and

and

tl £

havethe

(x,s) h*

x

,

where

u (0) = pr£(x) ,

define

tl ad £ -* tl £

which are

x

composition of thesecond map with via the homotopy

is the path in

bs £

defined by

(tT) . 6.

The bundle

for any bundle

satisfies the strong Serre condition,

E,.

PROOF. f~: Z -* tl ad £, pr ad C o f~.

ad £;

Consider a topological space and a homotopy

Denote by

g^

and

Z,

a continuous map

F: Z x I -> bs ad £ (= bs t ) g2

£.

composition of the first mapwith

id(tlad^)

s^

and

to

the composite maps

of

276

Pr i Z — — » tl ad K

in -> tl Ç x C (I,bs Ç)

tl C

pr.

C (I,bs Ç) , and define a h o m o t o p y

g:

Z x I -*

(I,bs Ç)

[g2 ( z )]( t (1 +t) ) ,

by

if

t

£ 1/(1+t),

[g (z ,t) ] (T F ( z , t (1+t) - 1), It is readily verified that F~: Z x I

tl ad £

of

f~

F (z,t) = (g (z) ,g (z ,t )) and that

5. 1. a sphere with 2.

g ^ 1

covers

F.

a sphere with

g

handles admits

handles as a covering space.

Show that for any

admits a sphere with

F~

defines a homotopy

Exercises

Show that for any 2g-1

T ^ 1/(1+t).

if

2h-2

h ^ 1

a sphere with

h

crosscaps

crosscaps as a covering space.

3. Show that the spaces C (S^,ort ; IRPn /(1:0:...:0)) 1 n 0 C (S,ort^;S ,ort^) x s are homeomorphic for any n ^ 1 . 4. base

Sn ,

Show that the bundle with total space

and projection

s h * s (1) ,

§2.

and

C (1,0;Sn ,ort^) ,

is locally trivial (see 1.2.9.4).

A DIGRESSION:

TOPOLOGICAL GROUPS AND TRANFORMATION GROUPS

1. 1.

A set

G

Topological Groups

is a topological group or a group space if it

is endowed with both a topology and a group structure such that the group operations, i.e., the maps g h- g

-1

,

are continuous.

G x G

G,

(g,h)

g h , and

G

G,

Obviously, the continuityof these two maps

is equivalent to the continuity of the single map

G

x g G,

(g,h) ►> g 1h. By the definition of the (product) topology on

G x g,

the

277

continuity of the map

(g,h) h- gh

for every neighborhood

W

U

hQ

and

V

of

gQ

and 1 g h

at the point

of the point such that

gQh 0

(g0 ,hQ)

means that

one can find neighborhoods

UV c w.

Similarly, the continuity

-

of the map point that

(g,h)

g^ h^

means that for every neighborhood

there are neighborhoods

U

and

V

of

g^

W

and

of the h^

such

U_1V S2n_1, SU (n) /SU (n-1 ) -*■ S2n_1 , 4n-1 Sp(n)/Sp (n-1) + S (see 7) equal the injective factors of the

submersions

V(n,n)

CEV (n ,n) + CEV (n ,1) ,

[= 0(n)]

V(n,1)

[= SR "*], V(n,n-1)

(CV (n,n-1) + CEV(n,1),

defined in Subsection 3.2.1

and

V(n,1),

lHV(n,n) ->1V( n,1),

(see 3.2.1.3, 3.2.1.5, and 3.2.1.6).

If we restrict 0(n),

U(n), and

Sp(n)

(n > 1)

to their

subgroups which consists of scalar multiples of the identity matrix, and which are usually identified

with S^,

we obtain continuous actions

x s n^

and

S3 x s 4 n _ 1

orbit spaces CDPn_1 , the

S4n_1.

Sn~1/S°,

0(n) ,

S11 \

S3 , respectively,

S^ x s n

+

S n

,

These are free actions, and the corresponding

S2n_1/S1, and

and H P n‘1 . We remark also that

actions of

S^

and

s \

U (n) ,

S4n 1/S3

Dn ,

D2n,

and

and

Sp(n)

on

are simply

D4n are IR ,

CD

,

nRPn ,1,(CPn

invariant under and H

.

Hence

292

0(n)

and

SO(n)

act continuously on

continuously on

D2n,

and

Sp(n)

Dn ,

U(n)

and

SU(n)

acts continuously on

act

D n.

All these

are effective actions. 12.

The groups

0(n)

and

SO(n)

(0(k)

and

SO(k))

continuously from the left (right) on the Stiefel manifolds the left actions are v £ V (n ,k );

g

are given by

(v,g)

SU(k)) on

defined by

andv

(g,v) ^ g o v

0(n)

V(n,k): or

SO(n),

are regarded as linearmaps]; the right actions v o g . Similarly,

U(n)

and

SU(n)

(U(k)

and

act continuously from the left (respectively, from the right)

(CV (n ,k ) ,

and

Sp(n)

(Sp(k))

acts continuously from the left

(respectively, from the right) on For intransitive (CV(n,n), point

HV(n,k).

k ^ 0, all the left actions are effective, and the only ones are

n > 1.

SO(n) x V(n,n)

V(n,n)

The isotropy subgroups of

and 0(n)

are considered as linear isometric maps O(n-k)

SU(n), and of (CV(n,k) Sp(n-k),

and

SO(n-k).

at the

(the elements of coincide

Similarly, the isotropy subgroups of

U(n),

(0, ... ,0 ,x^ ,.. .,x^)] SU(n-k), and

The corresponding homeomorphisms

0(n)/0(n-k) -+ V (n ,k) , U(n)/U(n-k)

SO(n)

k n IR ■+IR )

Sp(n) at the points [(x^,...,x^) and lV(n,k) coincide with U(n-k),

respectively.

SU(n) x (CV(n,n) and

[ (x^,...,x^) b (0,...,0,x^,...,x^)] £ V(n,k)

V(n,k) with

[g £

act

SO(n)/SO(n-k) ->V(n,k) ,

(CV (n ,k ) ,

SU (n)/SU (n-k) ->CCV(n,k),

and Sp (n)/Sp (n-k)

3HV (n ,k ) ,

are precisely the injective factors of the maps SO (n) -> V (n ,k) ,

U (n) ->• (CV (n ,k ) ,

defined in Subsection 3.2.1 k = 1,

SU(n) + (CV(n,k),

and

(see 3.2. 1.3, 3.2.1.5,

Sp(n) + HV(n,k),

and 3.2.1.6).

When

these actions reduce to those discussed in 11. All the right actions are free.

spaces, and

0(n) -* V(n,k),

V (n,k )/0 (k) ,

H V (n ,k )/S p (k ),

manifolds

V (n,k )/SO (k) ,

The corresponding orbit

(CV (n ,k)/U (k) ,

(CV (n ,k )/SU (k ) ,

are canonically homeomorphic to the Grassman

G(n,k), G+ (n,k),

CEG(n,k),

and

]HG(n,k),

respectively;

the corresponding canonical homeomorphisms are the injective factors of the maps

V(n,k) + G(n,k),

and 3HV (n ,k) ^]HG(n,k), 3.2.2.7, and 3.2.2. 8) . 13.

V(n,k) + G+ (n,k),

defined in Subsection 3.2.2 (see 3.2.2.3,

The same formulas, i.e.,

define left actions of

GL(n,3R)

GL(n,(C)

and of

on

(CV1 (n,k) ,

(CV(n,k) + (CG (n,k),

and

(g,v) GL+ (n, IR)

GL(n, 1H)

on

g o v, on

(g,v)

V'(n,k),

3HV 1 (n,k) ,

v ° g, of

and right

293

actions of

GL(k, IR)

(CV* (n,k) ,

and of

and

GL+ (k,IR)

GL(k, IH)

on

on

V ’(n,k),

of

GL(k,(E)

on

3HV' (n,k) .

All the left actions are effective and, excepting the action GL+ (n, 3R) x V 1 (n ,n ) GL (n , 3R) , GL (n ,(E) ,

V 1 (n,n) , transitive. and

-► (0, . ..,0 ,x1 ,... ,xk )]

GL (n , IH) of

at the points

v ’(n,k),

GL(n-k, HR) , GL(n-k,(C) , and corresponding homeomorphisms

The isotropy subgroups

CCV1 (n ,k ) ,

GL(n-k, 3H) ,

[ (x , ...,x ) *+ I .K and HV' (n,k) are

respectively.

GL(n, IR)/GL(n-k, 3R) + V'(n,k),

of

The

GL (n ,(C)/GL (n-k ,(C) -»■ E V ’ (n ,k) ,

and GL (n, IH) /GL (n-k , IH) -> 3HV ' (n,k) , are the injective factors of the maps GL(n,(C) + (CV' (n,k) ,

and

GL(n, H)

GL (n, IR) -> V'(n,k),

3HV’ (n,k) ,

3.2.1

(see 3.2.1.7, 3.2.1.8, and 3.2.1.9).

GL+ (n,

IR)

is

at the point

defined in Subsection

The isotropy subgroup of

[ (x^,...,x^) h- (0 , ...,0 ,x ,. ..,x^)] E V ’(n,k)

GL+ (n-k , IR) . All the right actions are free.

spaces,

V ’ (n,k)/GL (k,

]HV1 (n,k)/GL(k, ih) , manifolds

IR)

,

The corresponding orbit

V 1 (n ,k) /GL+ (k , IR) ,

(CV 1 (n,k) /GL (k ,(C) , and

are canonically homeomorphic to the Grassman

G(n,k),G+ (n,k), £CG(n,k),

and

3HG(n,k);

the corresponding

canonical homeomorphisms are the injective factors of the maps V 1 (n,k )

+G(n,k), V 1 (n ,k)

H V 1 (n,k) -*IHG(n,k),

G (n,k) ,

(CV!(n,k)->(CG(n,k),and

defined in Subsection 3.2.2 (see 3.2.2.3, 3.2.2.7,

and 3 .2 .2 .8) . 14. S0(n)

GL (n, IR)

GL+ (n, IR) ,

0(n),

and

obviously act continuously from the left on the Grassman

manifolds

G(n,k),

U(n)

SU(n)

and

GL(n, IH) For

and its subgroups

k

and

G (n,k).

Similarly,

GL(n,(C)

act continuously from the left on

Sp(n)

odd,the actions

of

0(n)

and SO(n)

and

GL+ (n,k) x G+ (n,k) G + (n,k) for k matrices with positive diagonal elements. k = 0

and

(EG(n,k),

while

act continuously from the left on IHG(n,k).

The noneffectiveness kernels of the actions

cases

and its subgroups

on

G + (n,k)

GL (n, IR)

x

are effective.

G+ (n,k) -> G + (n,k)

odd consist of scalar If we exclude the trivial

k = n, the noneffectivennes kernels of the remaining

actions consists of all scalar matrices contained in the corresponding group.

The only intransitive actions are

GL+ (n, IR) x G+ (n,0) SO (n) x SO (n) x

G + (n,0),

G (n,0) -+G + (n,0), g

+

GL(n, IR) x G+ (n,0)

0(n) x G + (n,0)

GL+ (n, IR) x G + (n,n)

(n,n) -+G+ (n,n) .Take the plane

x

G + (n,0),* G + (n,n),

=I 0,...,x

and

n , Js. = 0

G+ (n,0) ,

294

(oriented in the case of manifolds

G(n,k),

G^ + (n,k))

G (n,k),

subgroups of the actions

as a distinguished point in the

ŒG(n,k),

and

IG(n,k).

Then

the isotropy

GL(n, 3R) x G(n,k) -> G(n,k),

GL (n ,3R) x G (n,k) + G+ (n/k ) / GL (n,Œ ) x ŒG(n,k) GL (n, 3i) xüHG(n,k) ->]HG(n,k)

ŒG(n,k),

at these distinguished points

and are the

subgroups of all matrices of the form

and B are nonsingular matrices of order n-k and k, where respectively, and C is an arbitrary (n-k)xk matrix (and B E GL+(k/IR) in the case of

G (n,k)).

If we restrict the acting group to a subgroup, then the new isotropy subgroup is the intersection of the original isotropy subgroup with the new acting group. G(n,k) U(n)

and on

G (n,k),

(EG(n,k),

In particular, for the actions of

the action of

and the action of

SO(n) Sp(n)

on

G + (n,k),

on

]HG(n,k),

0(n)

on

the action of the

corresponding isotropy subgroups are the images of the monomorphisms O(n-k) x 0(k)

0(n),

O(n-k) x SO(k) -* 0(n),

U (n-k) x U (k)

U (n) ,

and

Sp(n-k) x Sp(k)

SO(n-k) x SO(k) Sp(n),

SO(n),

all defined by

the matrix formula (A,B)

(A I lo

If we identify these product with their images, we obtain canonical homeomorphisms 0 (n) / [0 (n-k) x 0 (k) ]

G(n,k),

0(n)/[0(n-k) x SO (k )]

G+(n,k),

SO (n) / [SO (n-k ) x SO(k)] -> G (n,k), U (n) / [U (n-k ) x U (k) ] -v (EG (n ,k ) , Sp (n) / [Sp (n-k ) x Sp (k ) ] +IG(n,k) . 15. Let m, The complex-number formula

be relatively prime positive integers. 2ttikL . / m

(k , (z1 ,.. .,zn )) *+ (z ^e

2itikt ,.,w zne

/m

n

),

where k G 7L , (z^ ./2n ) £ S n ^ , defines an action 7L x S^n ^ 2n-1 with noneffectiveness kernel m2Z , which becomes, by shifting to the effective factor, a free action of the group

295

s2tl 1 - The orbit space S2n 1/S is denoted by m is called a lens (or a lens space). There are also infinite lenses m , t ^ , ¿ 2 •' • •

L

I

L(m;£1 , t 2 ,...),

relatively prime positive integers.

)

n

and

with

The lens

L (m ;£.|/¿2 » •• •) defined as the orbit space of the free action resulting from passing to the effective factor of the action 2iti k i

/m

(k, (z1 ,z2 , ...) ) h- (z 1e

2iTikl ~ / m ,z2e 1 ,...)

OO

of

7L

on

S

.

L (m ;£ , ¿ 2 > •• •) =

An equivalent decription:

= lim(L(m ; £ . . . , 1 ) ,in: L(m;£1,..., I ) + L ( m ; l . , . . . , 1 )). The i n i n 1 n +1 inf inite lens L (m ;1 ,1 , ...) is denoted simply by L (in) . 2n-1 According to 8, the triples (S ~ ,pr,L( m ; l , . . . , 1 )) and 00

i

(S ,pr,L ( m ; l ^ , ¿ 2 '• * - ) ) 16.

n

are coverings.

The formula

(y,x) ^ yxy

where

x

and

y

are

quaternions and y has norm 3 4 4 3 S x hr ir „ The space HR^

of imaginary quaternions is invariant

under this action, and hence

3 IR ,

[We identify

JR^j

with

1R^

1,

,

defines a continuous action

via the map

3 S -spaces.

are

shi: JR^ ->■1R^;

The noneffectiveness kernel of the action S°,

3 HR ,

and also

S

3

x

jr

3

see 3.2.3.1.]

3 ]R

is obviously

and now it is clear that the effective action of the factor group

S^/S^ = IRP^

on

]R^

becomes the standard action of

S0(3)

(see 11) under the canonical identification of the spaces S0(3)

on IRP^

IR^ and

(see 3.2.3.1) . 17.

Let

P

be a convex regular polyhedron in IR^

(a tetrahedron, cube, octahedron, dodecahedron, or icosahedron) with center

0.

Let

GP

rotations which take GP G~P

be the subgroup of P

under the projection

S0(3)

into itself, and let S

S0(3)

do not change if we replace

P

P

G P

(see 16).

be the preimage of

Obviously,

GP

and

by the dual polyhedron, while they

are transformed into conjugate subgroups of replace

consisting of those

S0(3)

and

if we

by any convex regular polyhedron with the same number of

faces and center

0.

Therefore, in

three classes of conjugate subgroups

S0(3) GP

(S3)

there are exactly

(respectively,

G P) .

The

groups in the first class are called tetrahedral groups (respectively, binary tetrahedral groups), those in the second class - cube or octahedral groups

(respectively, binary cube or octahedral groups),

and those in the third class - dodecahedral or icosahedral groups

296

(respectively, binary dodecahedral and icosahedral groups). To every rotation in

GP

we may associate the image of a

marked oriented edge of the polyhedron invertible mapping of the group P.

GP

P,

onto the set of oriented edges of

Consequently, the order of the group

edges of

P,

i.e.,

12

when

P

and in this way define an GP

is twice the number of

is a tetrahedron,

24

when

P

cube or octahedron, and 60when P is a dodecahedron or an icosahedron. Thecorresponding binarygroups G Phave order 48,

and

is a

24,

120. The coset

spacesSO(3)/GP

3 ~ S /G P

and

are orbit spaces of

the free actions induced by the left canonical actions of SO(3) and 3 — 3 S under the inclusions GP -* SO(3) and G P -> S . Therefore, the 3 3 ~ triples (SO(3),pr,SO(3)/GP) and (S ,pr,S /G P) are coverings (see 8). Obviously, we can write

SO(3)/GP = S^/G P.

4. 1.

Show that for any smooth manifold

second topologies 2. 0 on

and

2n ,

Top X

Exercises

on Top X

the first and the

coincide.

Let X denote the subset of all

X

n £ 7L .

HR consisting of the

points

Show that the first and the second topologies

are distinct. 3.

Show that the canonical diffeomorphism

SU(2)

S

3

(see

3.2.1.5) is a group isomorphism. 4.

Show that the lenses

L (m ;£1 , ..., 1 , ) I k i the sum

are homeomorphic whenever for each difference

I , -

5.

Z\

is a multiple of

and L (m ;£ ', .. .,-£/) I k or the

m.

Show that the submanifold

Tang^ 3RP

2

of

Tang IRP

2

consisting of the unit tangent vectors (i.e., of the images under the map

d pr : Tang S

2

morphic to the lens 6.

-* Tang 3RP

2

of the unit tangent vectors) is homeo­

L(4;7,7).

Consider the action of

unit vectors tangent to

2

S ,

ffi

on the manifold

where the nonzero element of

each vector v into -v. Show that the orbit space homeomorphic to L(4;7,7). 7.

Consider the action

where the nonzero element of Show that the orbit space

V(3,2)

ZZ2 x Tang^ 3RP

2

takes each vector 2

Tang^ ]RP /S^

takes

V(3,2)/ZZ2

-* Tang^ 3RP v

into

of

9

is

(see 5) ,

-v.

is homeomorphic to the coset

297

space

3 S /H,

quaternions

of

takes each point 2

that the orbit space 9. nonzero

(EP / Z 2

consisting of the

Z>2

x TP

(z :z i

z

J

2

2

-*(CP ,

^

((z

Consider the action of

nonzero element of

a

that the orbit space

(S

§3.

2

2

x s )/ ^ 2

1

z

Show

3

S . (EP1 ,

where the into

((EP^ x (CP^ )/22^

on

2

2

S

(x,y)

x S, into

is

where the (y,x).

Show

2

is homeomorPhic to

(EP .

BUNDLES WITH A GROUP STRUCTURE

1. 1.

7L^

takes each point

(z : z n : z 0 ) .

:z ) , (w :w )) I A I A

((z^ :z^) f (w^ :w^) ) . Show that the orbit space 4 homeomorphic to S . 10.

a

on (EP 1x

of

7Ltakes each point

where the nonzero

:z )into

is homeomorphic to

Consider the action

element of

3

±ort^, ±ort^.

Consider the action ^

S

is the subgroup of

±ort^, i o r t ^

8. element

H

where

Spaces With F-Structure

The bundles which we encouter most frequently have fibers

thatbesides being merely topological spaces, carry some additional structure: for example, they may be vector, Euclidean, or Hermitian spaces.

In the present section we shall introduce this concept of

additional structure into the theory of bundles. We begin by giving an exact description of the necessary type of structures and then fit them systematically into the basic definitions of the theory, given in § 1 2. G-space.

Let

G

(see Subsections 1.1 and 1.2).

be a topological group, and let

We say that the topological space

F-structure if there is given a nonempty set

W

6: F -> W

belongs to

A

A

from

A

of homeomorphism a €A,

if and only if

transformation induced by one of the elements of of

be an effective

is endowed with an

such that, for an arbitrarily fixed homeomorphism homeomorphism

F

G.

F

a given 3

o a

is the

The homeomorphisms

are called marked. Every marked homeomorphism naturally carries the action of F to W.

If

G

W

is commutative, then the resulting action

G

298

G x w

W does not depend upon the choice of the marked homeomorphism,

and hence G

in this case the F-structure reduces to the action of

G.

If

is not commutative, then an F-structure does not define a canonical

action of

G on W. We remark that

F

itself has a canonical F-structure, namely

that whose marked homeomorphisms are the transformations induced by the elements of G. In the simplest case when

G

is the trivial group, a space

with an F-structure is simply a topological space canonically homeomorphic to

F. 3 (EXAMPLES).

action

If

G = GL (n, JR)

and

F = IRn

with the

usual

ofthis group, then a space with an F-structure is nothing else but

an n-dimensional vector space, and fixing a marked homeomorphism is simply fixing a basis of the space. If and

F

G

is JRn

is one of the groups

GL (n,3R),

0(n),

or

SO(n),

with the usual action of these groups, then a space

with an F-structure is an oriented n-dimensional real vector space, an n-dimensional Euclidean space, or an oriented n-dimensional Euclidean space, respectively.

When

with the usual action of

G G,

is

GL(n,(C)

or

U(n),

and

F

is

CCn

then a space with an F-structure is an

n-dimensional complex vector space, or an n-dimensional Hermitian space, respectively. If and

G

G = DiffrX,

where

is a Cr-manifold

(1 £ r £ a)

acts as usual, then a space with an F-structure is a Cr-manifold 27

which is C -diffeomorphic to If and

X = F

F = X

G = Top X ,

X.

where

X

with the usual action of

is a locally compact Hausdorff space, Top X ,

then a space with an

F-structure is simply a topological space homeomorphic to If

G

the unit simplex

X.

is the group of all simplicial autohomeomorphisms of Tn ,

and

F = Tn

with the standard action of this

group, then a space with an F-structure is simply an n-dimensional topological simplex. 4.

A homeomorphism

W -+■ W 1,

where

W

and

W1

with F-structure, which takes the set of marked homeomorphisms of into the set of marked homeomorphisms of

W 1,

are spaces

W

is called an isomorphism

or, more specifically, an F-isomorphism. In each of the previous examples, the F-isomorphisms form a well-known class of maps: in the first and the fifth cases they are the linear isomorphism, in the second - the orientation preserving linear isomorphisms, in the third and sixth - the linear isometric isomorphisms, in the fourth - the orientation preserving linear isomorphisms, in the

299

seventh - the C -diffeomorphisms, in the eighth - the homeomorphisms, and in the ninth - the simplicial homeomorphisms. 5.

Given a space

with an F 1-structure, the product F x F ’-structure

a

x

If the G^-space reducing the group W^

with an F-structure and a space

W x W'

G

a

'

,

F^

to

where

a

and

a

W

are marked homeo­

'

then by returning to

with an F^-structure becomes a space

topologically,

F x F1 ^ W x W1

is obtained from the G-space

G^ ,

is the same as

W^,

W'

is obviously a space with an

(see 2.3.6); the marked homeomorphisms

are those of the form morphisms .

space

W

W

F

F

from

by F^

every

with an F-structure:

while the new marked homeo­

morphisms are defined as the compositions of the transformations induced by the elements of W

G

is obtained from

with the old marked homeomorphisms.

W^

We say that

by extending (or prolonging) the group

G^

to

G.

2. 1.

Steenrod Bundles

Let

G-space, respectively.

G

A bundle

if eachof its fibers is endowed F

and

£

F

be a topological group and an effective

is a weak F-bundle, or a W-F-bundle,

with an F-structure.

In this case,

Gare called the standard fiber and the structure group of

respectively. fibers of

and

£

the right on

The set of all marked homeomorphisms from is denoted by MH(£)

MH(£).

by the rule:

The group

G

[ag](y) = a(gy)

F

£,

onto the

acts naturally from [a

E MH(£),

g E G,

y E F] . If

is a W-F-bundle and f : B bs £ is continuous, then i clearly the induced bundle f ‘£ is a W-F-bundle: the F-structures on i -1 its fibers are defined via the homeomorphisms ab tl ad f : pr f "£ (b) -* -+■ pr E, ^ (f (b) )

£

[b E B] .

Given two W-F-bundles, is called

5

and

a W-F-map if the maps ab tl f

the fibers of

n

n,

a map

f

of

from the fibers of

are isomorphisms (see 1.4).

£ £

into n into

A W-F-map which is an

isomorphism (respectively, equivalence) in the pure topological sense, i.e., in the sense of 1.1.2, is called a W-F-isomorphism (respectively, a w-F-equivalence).

Two W-F-bundles which can be mapped into each

other by a W-F-isomorphism (W-F-equivalence) are said to be W - F -isomorphic

(respectively, W-F-equivalent).

To each W-F-map

f: 5 + n

corresponds the map

300

MH(£) -► MH(n),

which takes each marked homeomorphism

into the composite homeomorphism Moreover, we see that right actions of

G

M H (f ) on

pr C ^ (b)

F —

MH( D

space,

pr £ 1 (b)

ab tl f ^ pr ^ ^ (bs f (b) ).

is a G-map with respect to the natural and

M H (n )•

The standard trivial bundle, a r bi tr ar y topolo gi ca l

a: F

(B x F,pr^,B),

with

is o b v i o u s l y a W-F -bu nd le :

on its fibers are de fi n e d by the h o m e o m o r p h i s m s

B

an

the F - s t r u c t u r e s

F -* b x f ,

y

(b,y).

As in Subsection 1.2, every W-F-bundle which is W-F-equivalent to a standard trivial W-F-bundle is called a W-F-trivial W-F-bundle. 2.

A bundle

£

is a strong F-bundle or, simply, an F-bundle

if it is a W-F-bundle and If

£

MH(£)

is endowed with a topology.

is an F- bu ndl e and

f: B

bs £

is conti nu ou s,

then

i the induced b u n d l e

f"£

is also an F-bundle:

on

i M H (f “O ,

by

a »-> (pr f #Uot(F) ) ,[MH(ad f) ] (ot) ) .

we use the injective mapping

A map

f:

E,

n/

where

E, and

be an F-map if it is a W-F-map and

M H (f )

to i n tr od uce a t o p o l o g y

i MH(f'C) ^ n

x MH(£)

B

given

are F-bundles, is said to

is continuous.

An F-map

f

is an F-isomorphism (F-equivalence) if it is an isomorphism (respectively, equivalence) in the pure topological sense and The standard trivial bundle

MH(f)

(B x F,pr^,B),

is a homeomorphism. with

B

an

arbitrary topological space, is obviously an F-bundle: the F-structures of its fibers were already introduced in 1, and one can introduce a topology on

M H ((B x F,pr^,B))

B x g -* MH ((B x F,pr^,B)), homeomorphism

by means of the invertible mapping

which takes each pair

F -> b x f ,

y

(b,gy) .

(b,g)

into the

An F-bundle which is F-equivalent

to a standard trivial bundle is called F-trivial, and every such equivalence is an F-trivialization. 3. bs

E, has a neighborhood

F-trivial.

E,

The F-bundle U

is locally F-trivial if every point of

such that the restriction

E,|^

is

The locally F-trivial bundles are called Steenrod F-bundles. Steenrod bundles play a major role in what follows, which

accounts also for the importance of the F-bundles. are only auxiliary.

The weak F-bundles

We remark that for Steenrod bundles the canonical right action of the structure group on the space of marked homeomorphisms is continuous and free. This is plainly true in the standard trivial case, to which the general case reduces. 4.

If

C

is a Steenrod F-bundle and

f: B

bs £

is

continuous, then the induced bundle f "£ is again a Steenrod F-bundle: i t , by 2, f “£ is an F-bundle, and the obvious fact that f ' E , is F-trivial

301

if

£

is

soimpliesthe local F-triviality of

f*£.

Clearly, the

map

ad f : f’£ £is an F-map, the canonical equivalence i (idbs^)“^ ^ C/ and the canonical equivalences of the form i i i g*(f*U (f © g)*£ (see 1.1.4), are F-equivalences. Moreover, given _

any F-map h of £ into another Steenrod F-bundle, the correcting map, corr h , is an F-map. The product of a Steenrod F-bundle F*-bundle

is a Steenrod

£

with a Steenrod

F x F 1-bundle: the

its fibers is defined as in 1.5; the topology on introduced by means of the invertible mapping given by

(a,a1)

F x f 1-b un d l e

£

a x a';

If the

MH(U

is

x MH (£ 1)

MH(^ x ^')

the local F x F 1-triviality of the resulting

is

F'-trivial.

-space F^

reducing the group

G

topologically,

£

comes from the effective G-space

to G^ ,

every Steenrod F^-bundle £

MH(£; x £')

f o llo ws from the fact that it is F x F '- tr i v i a l wh en ev er

is F-trivial and

of

F x F 1-structures on

then by returning to

F

from

becomes a Steenrod F-bundle

is the same as

;

F

by

F^,

£:

the F-structures on the fibers

are those described in 1.5; further, to define a topology on

MH(£),

consider the action of -1

g 1 (g,a)

^ (g^g/ag^),

MH(£^)

(see 1), and

where

into the homeomorphism to

G^

on

G x MH(^1)/

defined as

acts canonically from the

right on

then use the invertible mapping

(G x MH ( ) )/G^ -> MH(^), (G x MH(^^))/G^

G1

which takes the orbit of the pair y

a(gy),

MH(£);

(g,a)

to transfer the topology of

finally, the local F-triviality of the

resulting

F-bundle is a consequence of its F-triviality in the case

when

is

F^-trivial.This transformation of F^-bundles into

is

knownas the extension (or prolongation) of the structure

^

F-bundles group.

It takes

F-equivalences.

F^-maps into F-maps, and F^-equivalences into It is also clear

group commutes with the

that the extension of

the structure

induction operation; that is to

say,

if

obtained from

byextension of the structure group and f: B 1 i i is an arbitrary continuous map, then f ‘£ is obtained from

£is

bs £ ky

extension of the structure group. 5.

E ve ry S t e e n r o d F - b u n d l e with trivial

s tructure g r ou p is

F-trivial.

PROOF.

Let

£

be a Steenrod bundle with standard fiber

and trivial structure group. that the bundle n=

is

(bs £ x F/p r^bs F) .

unique for any F-trivialization

U G V, n

Let

F

be an open cover of

F-trivial for any

U G T.

bs £

such

Set-

Clearly, the F-tr ivialization n |y

i|0

and these F-trivializations together £•

F

is yieldan

302

Theorems Ab out F-maps

6.

Suppose that

standard fiber

F,

B

factorial m a p .

If

t : tl £

an F-map

Ç

and

is a t op olo gi ca l

( t ° tl a d p , B

such that

£

tl £ '

° p)

space,

and

is an

£'

3 : bs £

F - ma p

3

the c omp os i t i o n

£

Ç’

and

given by

and

and the fact that

MH(t,3),

p ‘Ç +

p

are maps

then

K ' t

x(b,y)

=

3/

t

,

(t,3)

and

is

M H ( t ,3)«

it is eno ug h to ve ri f y their c o n t i n u i t y wh en

(3 (b) , G.

bs Ç

(see 1.2.3.4).

is f a ct or ial

are st andard trivial F-bundles.

MH (p ’Ç ) ,

$

(b) y ) ,

whe re

M oreover,

(j)

In this

t

s ituation,

is some m ap from

is

bs £

into

if we use the h o m e o m o r p h i s m s

x G -> MH (Ç ) ,

define the topol og ie s on see 2),

+ bs £ '

is a

is an immediate c o n s e q u e n c e of the c o n t i n u i t y of

3 ° P

the structure g roup В x G

bs£

.

The c on ti n u i t y of

t

p: B

and

We need only check the c o n t i n u i t y of

As for

are St e e n r o d b u n d l e s with

MH(p*£),

and

bs Ç ' x G -> MH(Ç')

MH(£),

and

MH(£'),

(which

re s p e c t i v e l y ;

then the maps MH(t

° tladp,3

° p) : MH(p*Ç)

MH(Ç')

-+

and М Н( т ,3) : MH(Ç)

MH ( Ç ' )

are t ra ns f o r m e d into the maps

B x G + bs Ç' x g,

(b ,g) » (3 ° p(b) , (ф о p (Ь) )g) ,

and bs Ç

x g -> bs Ç ' x

respectively. since ф

p

ф

Suppose that

standard fiber

F

-> t l Ç '

an d

(b ,g) »

(3 (b) ,ф (b)g) ,

shows that

is co nt inuous.

implies the c o n t i n u i t y of

: tl Ç

,

The first formula

is factorial,

V.

t

g

т

£

3 • bs £

an d

ф ° p

is co nt in u o u s ,

F inally,

the c o n t i n u i t y of

M H ( t ,3).

and

are

-*■ bs £ ’

Steenrod bundleswith

is c o n t i n u o u s .

is a map such that the r e s t r i c t i o n s

If

т

.

pr Ç form a n ‘F- m a p of

bs £ ,

£ j^

then

,

(x,3)

for ea ch el e m e n t

8.

E,

,

U

, 3I

(U)

lU

of some f u n d a m e n t a l

c ov e r

is an F- ma p

This is a co ro l l a r y of 6: U -> bs

and

where

T

take

p

to be

the m ap

is the given f u n d a m e n t a l

If the S t e en ro d F - b u n d l e s

£

an d

% '

c o v e r of

have

the

bs C .

same

303

base, then every F-map

f: £

with

e/

bs f

= id bs £ is an

F-equivalence. All we need to prove is that

tlf

—1

continuous, and it suffices to examine the case when is a standard trivial F-bundle. are given by (b,y) b (b,cf)(b) y ) t where

and

\fj

Then

are

£' = £

and

tl f ,tl f"1 : bs £ x f

(b,y) H» (bf^(b)y)

are some maps from

—i MH(f)

and

bs £

£

bs £

[b E bs £ ,

F

y € F] ,

into the structure group

Moreover, if we use the topologizing homeomorphism bs£ x g + -1 then MH (f) and MH (f) become the maps bs ^ x G ^ b s ^ x g

G.

given

by (b ,g) b

(b ,cf>(b)g) _

Obviously,

iJMb) = [cf)(b) ]

first the continuity of and

and

*] ,

(b,g)

(b,ip(b)g )

[b C bs £ ,

and thus the continuity of

and

ip ,

MH (f )

y € F] . implies

and then the continuity of

MH(f) \ 9 (COROLLARY) .

The correcting map,

F-equivalence for every F-map

f

corr f ,

is an

between Steenrod F-bundles.

Principal Bundles 10.

A Steenrod bundle is called principal if its standard

fiber is the structure group on itself (see 2.3.6). simply by group

G

G

G

which acts canonically from the left

We take the liberty to denote the last G-space

and, accordingly, the principal bundles with structure

will be referred to as Steenrod G-bundles. A fundamental property of the principal bundles is that their

spaces of marked homeomorphisms can be identified with their total spaces. a

More precisely, given a principal G-bundle

*+ a(e^)

defines a homeomorphism

MH(£)

tl £.

£,

the formula

For a standard trivial

bundle, this is evident, and the general case is readily reduced to the standard trivial one. If we identify

MH(0

and

then the natural right action of

a •+ a ( e „ ) ,

G

becomes the free right action of tl £ x G

tl £ via the homeomorphism

tl £,

the fibers of

£,

G

on

G

tl£ .

on

MH(£)

(see 1)

This free, action,

can be also described directly: its orbits are exactly and on each fiber the action is simply the right

canonical action, transferred from

G

to the fiber by means of marked

304

homeomorphisms. 11.

This construction of the free right action of

G

on the

total space of a principal bundle with structure group

G

can be

partially reversed.

G

acts

Assume that the topological group

continuously and freely from the consider the bundle

right on the topological space _

_

g

xg,

and

(X,pr,X/G).Its fibers (orbits) carry natural

G-structures: the marked homeomorphisms given by

X,

x £ pr

distinct homeomorphisms

1

(b).

g

G

pr

1

(b)

(b € X/G)

Since to distinct pointsx

xg,

are

correspond

we obtain also an invertible map of

X

onto the set of marked homeomorphisms, and thus we get a topology on the last set.

Therefore,

(X,pr,X/G)

is a G-bundle.

To explain why we called this last construction a partial inversion of the original one, apply it now to the right action tl^ x G ->■ tl £

described in 10; the resulting bundle is exactly

More precisely, the injective factor of the projection tl £/G

onto

bs C ,

and together with

id(tl^)

pr C

£.

maps

forms a G-isomorphism

(tU,pr,tl £/G) + 12. action of

If the G-bundle

G,

(X,pr,X/G),

defined by a free right

has a section, then it is G-trivial.

In particular,

every Steenrod G-bundle having a section is G-trivial. Indeed, if f:

s: X/G

X

is a section, then themap

((X/G) x G,pr^ ,X/G) ->(X,pr,X/G),

a G-trivialization of the bundle 13 (COROLLARY).

given by

tlf(b,g)

= s(b)g,

is

(X,pr,X/G).

If the G-bundle

(X,pr,X/G),

defined by a

free right action of G, is topologically trivial, then it is G-trivial. If (X,pr,G/X) is locally topologically trivial, then it is locally G-trivial, i.e., it is a Steenrod G-bundle.

3. 1.

Let

G

effective

G-spaces.

F-bundle

£

Associated Bundles

be a topological group, and let

F

and F'

be

The construction below associates to each Steenrod

a certain Steenrod F'-bundle having the same base. -] The formula g(a,y) = (ag,g y), where g € G, a £ MH(£), _

and

y 6 F',

defines a right action of

acts canonically from the right on the bundle with total space

MH(£);

(MH(£) x F')/G,

projection takes the orbit of a pair pr £ (a(F)) .

G

on

MH(0

x F'

see 2.3).

Let

base

bs £ ,

(a,y) 6 MH(£) x f ’

(here

G

denote and whose into the point

The fibers of this bundle carry a natural F '-structure:

305

the marked homeomorphisms where

a

£ MH (£)

morphisms

F1

(pr

is such that

are given by

a(F) = pr £~1 (b) .

yield distinct homeomorphisms

a

the same time an invertible map topologize

^ (b)

MH(£'),

MH(£)

y

and thus make from

pr(cx,y) ,

Since distinct homeo­

pr(a,y),

MH (5 1) /

y

we obtain at

which we use to

an

F 1-bundle.

Finally,

S'Ju is F '“trivial for each set U such that is F-trivial. Consequently, £' is locally F*-trivial, i.e., it is a Steenrod F 1-bundle.

We say that

denote it by

(i) with

and

We add four remarks to the above description of the The map

tl £

(MH(£) x F)/G

which takes each point

into the orbit consisting of the pairs

a(y) = x,

(a,y) £ MH(£) x F

is obviously a homeomorphism; together with

this map defines an F-equivalence asso(C,F)

£

asso(^,Ff).

2. construction: x G tl £

is the F 1-bundle associated with

£ ^ asso(£,F).

id bs £ ,

Therefore, the bundle

is canonically F-equivalent to (ii)

to topologize

The invertible map MH(asso (£,F 1)) ,

canonical actions of

G

on

MH(£)

MH (asso (^,F 1))

is a G-map with respect to the right

MH(£)

and

MH(asso(£, F 1)).

we may state that, given an arbitrary effective G-space of the above invertible G-map with -> MH (asso (^ ,F1) ) x F",

where

that we used

G

id F"

is a G-map

As a corollary, F",

the product

MH(£) x f"

acts from the right on

MH(£) x F"

_ -i

and

MH(asso(£,F')) x F"

by

g(a,y) = (ag,g 'y).

The resulting homeo-

morphism (MH(£) x F")/G -»• (MH (asso (£ ,F ') ) x F")/G, id bs £ ,

define an F"-equivalence

Therefore, the bundles

asso(£,F")

asso(asso(C,F'),F")

together with

asso (asso (£ ,F') ,F" ) . and

asso(£,F")

are

canonically F"-equivalent. (iii)

The bundle

associated with

asso(£,G),

i.e., the principal bundle

is canonically G-isomorphic to the G-bundle

(MH(£),pr,MH(£)/G)

defined by the canonical right action of

MH(5)

The canonical G-isomorphism

(see 2.11).

asso(£,G)

is given by the homeomorphism

which takes each (iv) then (MH(U

a

If

(MH(£) x f')/G * F')/G

6 MH(£) F'

(MH(£) x F")/G

inclusion of the bundle MH

(asso (5 ,F '))

(a,eG ).

(MH(£) * F")/G,

together with

asso(£,F')

into

is exactly the set of maps

a e M H (asso(?,F")).

(MH(C) x G)/G

is a subspace of the G-space is a subset of

on

(MH (£) ,pr ,MH (£) /G)

MH(£)

into the orbit of

G

id bs E,

asso(£,F").

F"

(see 2.3.6),

and the inclusion yield an Moreover,

ab a : F ’ -> a (F ' )

with

a

306

Behavior With Respect to Maps 3. that

£

f: £

Let

and

n

n

F

and

F*

again be effective G-spaces, and supp

are Steenrod bundles with standard fiber

is an arbitrary F-map.

F,

and

Define the map

asso(f,F '): asso(£,F ’) + a s s o ( n , F ’) by the formulas

bsasso(f,F')

= bs f

and

tl asso(f ,F' ) =

= [fact (MH (f) x id F 1) : (MH(£) x F ’)/G It is clear that asso(f,F')

asso(f,F’)

(MH(n) x F')/G].

is an F'-map.

Moreover,

is an F '-isomorphism (F'-equivalence) whenever

F-isomorphism (respectively, F-equivalence).

f

is an

Next, consider the

diagrams Ç --- > asso (Ç ,F)

asso (Ç ,F") ----> asso (asso (£ ,F 1) ,F fl

asso(f,F)

f

asso(ri,F),

n

asso(asso(f,F'),F")

asso(f,F") asso (rs,F" )

» asso(asso(r»,F’) ,F" ) ,

and (MH(Ç) ,pr,MH(Ç)/G) --- ► asso(Ç,G) (MH (f ) ,fact MH (f )

asso(f,G)

(MH(n) t pr,MH(n)/G) --- > asso(n fG) , where

FM

is any effective G-space, and the horizontal arrows denote

successively the canonical F-equivalences described in 2(i) and 2(ii), and the canonical F-isomorphisms from 2(iii)

These diagrams clearly

commute. 4.

The

asso

and induction operations commute.

Namely, the

map corr [asso (ad h ,F 1) ] : a s s o f h ^ F 1)

h !asso(Ç,F')

is an F 1-equivalence, for any Steenrod F-bundle map h: B ^ bs Ç ; see 2.9. Furthermore, the of the structure group.

asso

to a subgroup

G^ .

and any continuous

operation commutes with the extension

That is to say, let

effective G^-spaces obtained from

Ç

F

and

F'

If the Steenrod F ^-bundle

F^

and

F^j

be the

by reducing the group Ç

is taken into

£

G by

307

the extension of the group

to

G,

fact (in x id F 1) : ( M H ^ ) where

in = [in: MH(£^) -*■ MH(£)],

the bundle obtained from asso (E, ,F 1) .

then the map

x Fjj)/G1 + (MHU) x F ')/G , defines an F '-equivalence between

asso^^F^)

by extending

G1

to

G,

and

Weakly Associated Bundles 5.

The construction described in 1 can be generalized to the

situation where the action of

G

on

F1

is not effective: we need only

shift, as a preliminary step, to the effective factor of this action, and thus transform

F'

into an effective

is the noneffectiveness kernel. for any Steenrod F-bundle

G/K-space,

Therefore,

asso(£,F')

and any G-space

E,

F*

case, a Steenrod bundle with structure group F^ .

We

F^ ,

G/K

where

K

may be defined

and is, in the general and standard fiber

say that

asso(£,F')

is weakly associated

The map

asso(f,F')

defined in 3 remains viable under this

extension of the properties of

asso

asso

with

construction, and becomes an

discussed in

2 , 3 , and 4

obvious manner; for example, when

F"

F^-map.

must be modified in an

is not effective (but

effective), the canonical F"-equivalence

The

asso(£,Ff')

Ff

is

asso (asso (£ ,F 1),F")

becomes an F^-equivalence.

Sections Associated with F-Maps 6. G

Let

£

and standard fiber

and F,

be Steenrod bundles with structure group and let

f: bs £

bs E, 1

be continuous.

The construction below establishes a one-to-one correspondence between the F-maps

h: E, -> E, '

constructed bundle, Let the group

G

G x G

with

bs h

= f

and the sections of a specially

Fibr(£,E, 1;f) . denote the group

given by

G

endowed with the action of

( g ^ g ^ g = 9 ^ 9 9 21

this is not an effective action).

(generally speaking,

Set

Fibr (£,£'; f) = asso(diag'(£ x f'£'),GX), where

diag = [diag: bs C ^ bs £ x bs £ ],

weak sense of 5. bs h

= f

and

asso

It is clear that for every F-map

and every point

b € bs £ ,

is taken in the h

such that

the composite homeomorphism

308

pr £~1 (b)

ab t l ^

(prC’) 1 (f (b) )

(ab tL ad f)--

i -1 g-1 ► (pr f •£’) (6(F) ) -2--- . where = b,

a £ MH(£),

pr£(ct(F))

= b,

and

3 €

is simply one of the transformations

elements of

G.

MH(f!£'),p r f !£'(B(F)) F + F

We denote the corresponding

=

induced by the

element by

g(a,3), and

note that g i a g ^ S g ^ = g 1g(a,3)g2 for anV V y ?2 e G £ 1

Therefore, when

with £

and

yields a one-to-one and the sections

£'

= f

and

f = id bs £ ,

an

is simply an F-equivalence (see 2.8).

have the same base, the above construction

correspondence between

of the bundle

4. 1.

bs h

bs £ ' = bs £

the F-equivalences £ -> £ 1

Fibr(£,£';id bs £) .

Ehresmann-Feldbau Bundles

An Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle is a W-F-bundle which is

locally W-F-trivial; the last means that every point of the base has a neighborhood such that the restriction of the bundle to this neighborhood is W-F-trivial. The theory of Ehresmann-Feldbau bundles is a variant of the theory of bundles with a group structure; it is simpler than the theory of Steenrod bundles (there are fewer structures), but also less pithy (there are no associated bundles).

This relative poverty nearly deprives

309

it of any independent value; however, the fact that it is equivalent, for a large class of standard fibers which includes the most important cases, to the theory of Steenrod bundles, makes it useful, as it enables us to simplify the latter.

The Case of Topologically Effective Actions 2.

A continuous effective action

G x X

X

topologically effective if given any topological space f: Y

G,

is said to be Y

and any map

the continuity of the composite map Y x X —f X ld > X x G -> X

implies the continuity of G-space

X

f.

(1 )

In this case we also say that the

is topologically effective. Clearly, if we reduce the group, a topologically effective

action remains so, and every G-space which has a topologically effective subspace is itself topologically effective. The free actions are immediate examples of topologically effective actions; in particular, the left canonical action of a topological group (on itself)

is always topologically effective. Also,

the usual actions of

and of its subgroups on

GL(n, 3R)

lRn

are

all

topologically effective. In order that a G-space be topologically effective, it is necessary that the map

c : G -> C(X,X),

the transformation induced by

g,

which takes each

g £ G

into

be a topological embedding; if

X

is

locally compact and Hausdorff, then this condition is also sufficient. - 1 The necessity is plain (take Y = c(G) and f = [ (abc) : c (G) G] ). Now assume that the condition

is satisfied.

Then the continuity of

f : Y -* G

is equivalent to the continuity of the composite map

Y— —►G

» C (X,X) .

By Theorem 1.2. 7. 6, for

X

locally compact and

Hausdorff the last map is continuous because so is the map (1). particular, for

G

In

compact, every effective, locally compact Hausdorff

G-space is topologically effective (see 1.1.7.10 and 1.2.7.2).

If

X

is Hausdorff, locally compact, and locally connected, then the usual action of the group same holds when 3.

X

Top X

on

X

is topologically effective, and the

is Hausdorff and compact (see 2.2.5 and 2.2.6).

If the standard fiber

F

is topologically effective,

then every W-F-map (respectively, W-F-isomorphism, W-F-equivalence) between Steenrod bundles is an F-map (respectively, F-isomorphism,

310

F-equivalence). In fact, let

£

and

be Steenrod F-bundles.

prove the continuity of the map

M H (f )

W-F-map

assume that

f: £ +

and we may

trivial bundles. and of

tl f

In this case,

is given by

bs£

tl

(b,y) ^

corresponding

g

(see 2.2), then

the map

(b,g)

becomes

(bs f (b) ,(b) g) .

the composition

bs Fy x F

denotes the action.

is some map

and bs £ 'x G -> MH ( ^' ) bs ^ xg

bs £ ' x g ,

tl f

implies the

pr^ o tlf : b s £ x p - ^ F ,

ft x

G x f --- ► F,

which equals

where the last arrow

Since this action is topologically effective,

is continuous, and so is 4.

-> MH(£)

The continuity of

continuity of the composition

where

At the same time,if we use the

canonical homeomorphisms bs £ x MH(f)

are standard tl £ 1 = bs £ 1 x F,

(bs f (b) ,(b)y ) ,

into the structure group G.

to the given

£ and

£ = bs £ x F,

We need only

(p

MH(f).

Given an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle with a topologically

effective standard fiber, there is a unique topology on the set of its marked homeomorphisms which transforms this bundle into a Steenrod bundle. The uniqueness of this topology is a consequence of Theorem 3. Let us prove its existence.

Let

topologically effective fiber that

is

ijy-

F.

£

be an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle with

Cover

bs £

by open sets

W-F-trivial, and fix W-F-equivalences

Now topologize the sets

MH (£|^)

MHihy): MH((U x F ,pr 1 ,U) ) + MH (£|^) . topological spaces

MH (£| q )/

U

such

h ^ : (U x F,pr^,U)+

with the aid of the maps

We obtain a cover of

MH(£)

by

and Theorem 3 shows that these spaces

induce the same topologies on their intersections, as required for the construction in 1.2.4.3. construction transforms

The topology on £

MH(£)

produced by this

into a Steenrod bundle.

Locally Trivial Bundles as Ehresmann-Feldbau Bundles 5.

If

F

is a locally compact Hausdorff space endowed with

the usual action of the group

Top F ,

then an Ehresmann-Feldbau

W-F-bundle is simply a locally trivial bundle with fibers homeomorphic to

F.

Therefore, any ordinary locally trivial bundle whose fibers are

locally compact Hausdorff spaces homeomorphic one to another, may be regarded as an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle, and as such it has an implicit group structure.

If* in addition, the fibers are locally connected or

compact, then such bundles can be also regarded as Steenrod bundles.

311

We remark that the last assertion is also true for all coverings in the broad sense with connected bases.

5. 1.

Exercises

Show that all the effective actions listed in 2.3.11,

2.3.12, 2.3.13, and 2.3.14. are topologically effective. 2. dimension.

Let

I* be an arbitrary C -manifold

X

Show that the usual action of

Diffrx

(r ^ 1) on

X

of positive is

topologically effective. 3. (n € 7L ,

Consider IR

t € IR) ,

as a 7L -space with the action

(n,t) ^ t + n

and using the same formula, extend this action to

an action of the additive group

]R,

equipped with the discrete topology.

Show that this extension of the structure group takes

asso ((ER,hel,S ) JR)

into a bundle which is not trivial as a Steenrod bundle, but is trivial as an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle. 4.

Suppose that

an effective

G-space,and

simply connected base. ped with the

G £

Denote

(Cf. 4.3.) is a connected topological group,

£,

6

G ,

6

F ,

and £

6

the group

regarded as a W-F -bundle, respectively.

makes from

£

6

a Steenrod F -bundle.

§ 4.

G

equip-

F, regarded as a G -space,

there is no topology on the set of marked homeomorphisms of 6

is

is a nontrivial Steenrod F-bundle with

discrete topology, the space

and the bundle

F

Show that £

which

(Cf. 4.4.)

THE CLASSIFICATION OF STEENROD BUNDLES

1. 1.

Steenrod Bundles and Homotopies We now turn to the problem of classifying the Steenrod

bundles with a given standard fiber with respect to F-equivalence.

F

and a given cellular base

B

Our main achievement in this section

is to establish a canonical one-to-one correspondence between the classes of F-equivalent bundles over maps from

B

B

and the homotopy classes of

into a specially constructed space that depends only upon

the structure group.

This correspondence reduces the given classifi-

312

cation problem to a problem in ordinary homotopy theory.

Lemmas About F-Trivial Bundles 2. let

B1

= bs£ and

Let

and

B2

and

£ |„ IB2

£

be a Steenrod bundle with standard fiber

be closed subspaces of

B . n B\

is a retract of

2,

PROOF.

such that

£

B_ .

Choose a retraction

p:

^

fl

and

B^ U B2 =

If the restrictions “ " is also F-trivial.

'

are F-trivial, then

bs £ ,

F, £| |^

and two

F-trivializations, h 1 : n1 = (B1 x F fpr1/B1) + I |B and

1 h 2 :

and denote by

n 2

=

(B 2

f

where

$

tl f

F , p r 1 , B 2 )

-►

£ | B

»

the composite F-equivalence

, n2|BinB2 Obviously,

x

id

| ' ni |B flB2

is given by

is some map of

abh1

(abh2 )~1 ” ? |b nB2

(b,y) ^

B^ 0 B^

” n2|BinB2 *

(b, B^ x F ,

together with id B2 , obvious equality

x G -+ (B

g £ G] . ,

(b,y)

y £ F] , G.

More­

MH(M0

2

n B2 ) x G,

given by

Therefore, the continuity of

which in turn yields the continuity (b,d) o p(b)y).

form an F-equivalence

But this last map,

f's n2 -> n2 *

and the

f * [abf' : n2 | shows that the composite F-maps "1

^

coincide on

C |b ,

0 B2 .

C

and

*2 —

"2 —

Let

5

Finnally, by 3.2.8, the last

Every Steenrod F-bundle with base

PROOF.

i|B2 —

By 3.2.7, from this it follows that these two

maps yield an F-map (B x F ,pr 1 /B) ->• £. map is an F-equivalence. 3.

n

),

l B 1n B 2

In

is F-trivial.

be an arbitrary Steenrod F-bundle with

313

bs n

= In .

Find a positive integer

any cube of edge into

Nn

1/N

contained in

such that

ln .

n

is F-trivial over

Now divide

In ,

as usual,

such cubes, arrange them in dictionary order Q ,...,Q , ± Nn Q j • Induction shows that n is F-trivial over each

and set

of the sets

W^,...,W n :

^ =

B i = w -i'

l^i+l

over

N

'

1

1

to go from

to

and

B 0 = Q..1 .

and

£

z

'

aPPly Lemma 2 to

We conclude that

i+I

n

is F-trivial

W = In . Nn 4-

fiber and

Let

F and common base E, ^

B,

be Steenrod bundles with common standard and let

A

be a retract of

are F-trivial, then for every F-equivalence

there is an F-equivalence = h.

h ’: ^

£2

such that

B.

If

h:

£

^ ^2 |A

[abh1 : ^ |a ^ ^2 |a ^ =

It is enough to prove this assertion for the case where is the standard trivial F-bundle p: B

A be a retraction.

(a,y)

^

(a,cf>(a)y)

[a E

the structure group

Obviously,

A,

G.

(B x F,pr^,B), tl h

y £ F] , where

and

£

= £-j• Let

is given by

is some

map of A

into

Moreover, via the canonical homeomorphism

A x G + MH(£^|a ) [= MH (? 2|a )1 'becomes the map A x G A x (a,g) h- (a,({)(a)g) [a € A, g £ G] . Therefore, the continuity of implies the continuity of the map B x F

(p ,

B x F,

(b,y)

yield an F-equivalence

h ’: £

G, MH (h)

which in turn implies the continuity of b-

(b,cj) ° p(b)y).

The latter and

which extends

id B

h.

The Homotopy Invariance of the Induced Bundle 5. let If

f f^

1

and and

Let fn z

f^

£

be a Steenrod bundle with standard fiber F,

becontinuous

a cellular subspace of

X,

which is the identity on

f2 ,

and set

^

Pick

x(I,id 1,1)

respectively.

£

f ’£

bs £ .

,

and are t

is

f ’^j^.

an A-homotopy, H: X x I

=(f!C)

transforms

bundles

into

f1 and f^are A-homotopic, where A I z , then there is an F-equivalence f ’£ -*

?l|(xxO)U(Axl) = ?2 |(XXO)U(AXI) X -»■ X x 1

,

are homotopic, then the

F-equivalent. Moreover, if

PROOF.

maps of a cellular space X

and

, ^2 = H !?.

bs £ , It is

from

f^

to

clearthat

and that the canonical homeomorphism i 1 1 and ?2 Xx1 into and ,

Therefore, it suffices to

find an F-equivalence £ ^ -* £2

314

which is the identity over

(X x 0)

(A x I).

U

We produce such an F-equivalence by taking the limit of a sequence of F-equivalences, where

(X x 0)

C± -

hu: C-||c ^ ^ 2 IC ' where ’ i i (A x I) u (skeiX x I), such that each map

U

extends the preceding one.

Take

h_^

hi

to be the identity map, and

assume that the F-equivalence h^ is already constructed. To get hj_+ 1 , suppose that X is rigged, and for each cell e € cell^^X \ cell^ + ^A consider the bundles [ab(chae x idl)]l(?1|c ) = [(chae x i d I ) T * i

(Dl+1xO)U(S1xi;

and [ab (cha e

x id I )]'(£., I ) = [(cha x id I ) 'g ] I . ^'Ci e | (D1

, , x 0)U (S xi)

where ab(cha Let

e

x id I)

=[ab(cha

e

x

id I ) : (D1+ ^

x 0) U (S1

x I) ->• c .]. 1

g

denote the F-equivalence of these bundles defined by h.. By e , , i Lemma 3, (chae x i d l ) ’?>| and (chae x i d l ) * ^ are F-trivial, and since(Di+^ x 0) U (S1 x I) that

g^

is a retract of

Lemma 4 shows

extends to an F-equivalence ^

g^: (chae x id I)

i

Further, note that of the partition (with

D^"+ ^ x i /

i

-* (chae x id I) ‘ ^2 • the map

tl g^"

zer (tl ad (cha^ x id I))

B = Di+^ x I

and

is constant on the elements and apply Theorem 3.2.6

p = [abicha^ xid I) : D"*"+ ^ x I

cl e

x I] )

to conclude that the composite map , (chae x M D - q

defines an F-map

g~ , ab ad (cha x id I) ----► (chae x idl)'^--------- ®

?-,|cle

xi

^jcie

x I* By Theorem 3.2.8,

is an F-equivalence, which we denote by h. e i , e 2 £ cell^ +^X v cell^+^A,

cells (Cl e.

xI) n (Cl e„

1

tlh C Cle

Now note that for

tl hg

and

tl hg

and that for each cell

x I,

tlh._L

any

e € cell. „X ^ cell. „A, 1+1

agree over

(Cle

e £ celli+1X \ cell^ + 1A,

WB use 3 *2 *^ to conclude that

form together an F-map

this

agree over

Z

and

Ci+1 '

x i),

y x

U l|Li+1

x i) n C..

C.

and

constitute a fundamental cover of h^

and

-*• L | . ^ ,Ci+1

and note that it obviously extends

Since the sets

1+1

hg ,

e £ ce l l ^ X \cell.+1A,

We take this map for

h ^ ; moreover, by 3.2.7,

h. „ 1+1

h~ 1-| is

315

also an F-map. To check the rest, i.e., that the sequence converges to an F~equivalence the sets

{h^ : ^ U ^ ^Ic ^ Ii 'i it is enough to remark that

£

constitute a fundamental cover of

Theorem 3.2.7 to the sequences

{h^}

The Sets 6. We let

Stee(B,F)

of Steenrod F-bundles over

and

X x I,

and then apply

{ h ^ }.

Stee(B,F)

denote the set of F-equivalence

B.

classes

Below we shall study the mappings of

this set into itself, defined by the induced bundle construction, by the extension of the structure group, and by the associated bundle construction. For any continuous map

f: B 1

B,

the rule

Ç

f

i

defines

a mapping f ’: Stee(B,F) +Stee(B',F). If

B'is a cellular space, Theorem 5 shows

the homotopy class of cellular

andf

f.

In particular, if

i f"depends only on

that B

is a homotopy equivalence, then

and B' are both i f ‘ is invertible.

The extension of the structure group, which transforms -space

F into the effective G-space ext: Stee(B,F^)

for any

F,

the

defines a mapping

Stee(B,F),

topological space B.

This mapping is natural: that is to say,

the diagram pvf Stee(B,F 1) ----- > Stee(B ,F ) i i f* f‘ Stee(B’,F1) -xt— > stee(B',F) commutes for any continuous map

f: B'

B; see 3.2.4.

Given another effective G-space, defines for any topological space asso: Stee (B,F)

B

F',

the rule

Ç

h-

asso(Ç,F')

a mapping

Stee(B,F').

This mapping is invertible [its inverse is Stee (B,F) ] and also natural, i.e., the diagram

asso: Stee(B,F')

316

asso Stee (B ,F) ------ > Stee(B,F' f* Stee (B 1,F)

aSS° > SteefB'j')

commutes for any continuous map

f: B' + B; see 3.3.4.

Moreover, the diagram Stee(B,F1)

aSS° » Stee(B,F.|) f•

Stee(B,F) — aSS° » Stee(B,F') commutes for any topological space F,j , F^j

and any effective G-spaces,

F

any effective

and

F f,

-spaces

obtained from

F^

F^

and

and

by extension of the structure group; see 3.3.4 and 3.3.5.

2. 1. f: B -> bs £ ,

mapping

Universal Bundles

Let

any Steenrod F-bundle map

B,

TT(B,bs£)

£,

F

be an effective G-space.

any cellular space

B, and any continuous i f*?. This defines a

we may consider the bundle -*■ Stee(B,F),

which we denote by

induz(B,£)(the homotopy class of

By Theorem 1.5, give

induz(B,£):

f) = the F-equivalence class of

The following diagram is obviously commutative for any topological space

C

and any continuous map ir(B,C) — induz (B,g *£)

7i(idB,g)

g: C

, stee(B>p)

n.

induz(B,£) 7T(B ,bs O

Similarly, the diagram TMB. bsU

bs £

induz ( Bfa s s o < S , F ‘ ))

induz(B,£)

,

asso Stee(B,F)

commutes for any effective G-space

F 1.

i f ’5

317

2. induz(B,£)

A Steenrod F-bundle

£

is called universal if the map

is invertible for any cellular space

Steenrod F-bundle

£ is universal if:

(i)

B.

In other words, a

givenany Steenrod

F-bundle

5

with cellular base, there is a continuous map f : b s £ -* b s £ such i that the bundle f*£ is F-equivalent to £, and (ii) if for two arbitrary continuous

maps,

,

the bundles homotopic.

f ’£

,

and

Condition

(i) has an equivalent formulation

Steenrod F-bundle Indeed,

if

f^£

f and f , of a cellularspace into bs£ I are F-equivalent, then f^ and f^ are

£

(i1):

given any

with cellular base, there is an F-map

f :bs £

bs £

is continuous and

F-equivalence, then ad f o

g: £

£

h: ^ £ is an F-map, then (see 3.2.9).

corr h : 5

g: 5 +

is an F-map,

f *K

is an

Conversely, if

(bsh)’£

is an F-equivalence

Similarly, condition (ii) is equivalent to (ii1): Steenrod F-bundle

£

5 £•

with cellular base and any F-maps

given any

hQ ,h^: £

£,

bs hQ and bsh i are homotopic. Indeed, suppose that hn u j , u ,h 1 have these properties; then both bundles, (bshg) £ and (bsh^)#£ , are F-equivalent to

£,

and so, by (ii),

Conversely, if into

fn and u , and h: f ^

bs £

f^ = bs(adf^ o h)

bs hQ

and

bs h^

f1 are continuous maps of a cellular space i , f ’£ is an F-equivalence, then fQ = bs ad fQ ,

and, by (ii'),

fQ

and

We remark also that both (i 1)

f

are homotopic.

and (ii1)

(and hence (i) and

(ii)) are consequences of the following condition: F-bundle

£

every F-map

given an arbitrary

with cellular base and an arbitrary subspace 5 |A * £

extends to an F-map

£ -* £.

condition implies (i1), it suffices to take implies(ii'), take A =

are homotopic.

the F-bundle

(bsKx o) U (bs K x 1)

of

of

bs £ ,

To see that this

A = 0.

£ x(I,id 1,1) ,

A

To see that it

thesubspace

bs(5 x (I,id 1,1) )=

bs 5 x

I,

and

take as the F-map that must be extended g:

£

x

(l,idl,l)

|( b s £

x

o)

U

(b s £

x 1)

^

^ '

with bs g (b,0) = bs hQ (b) ,

bsg(b,1)

tl g (x ,0) = t l h Q (x) ,

tl g (x,1)

3.

= b s h Mi G

Sr =

1 ,... ,k)

Mi G . b s £ = Dr+1, A = Sr ,

(Dr+1 x G ,pr^,Dr+1).

has an explicit description:

smallest number s such that denote the composite map

(i

every G-map

forsome

is G-trivial (see 1.3), and we may actually assume that

is the standard trivial G-bundle extension

A TG (k) —iS— > con G x . . x con G " "k ^ r +1 further, define ip : D x G ->• TG(k+1) by

. i

i— ► con G

'Mty,g ) = (tcj)n (y) , ... ,t$k (y) ,pr(g, 1-t) ) , where y £ Sr , t £ I, and pr = [pr: G * I tl h = [in: TG(k+1) -> TG] ° ij).

C

-+ con G] . Now set

321

The general case reduces to this special one. that the space

bs £

Indeed, assume

is rigged and that a G-map

extending

f

each cell

e e c e l l ^ b s £ \ cellr

h : £I , , + M i G it AllsKe Ds c, r The above argument shows that for

is already available.

,r f = h o [ab cha : S e r e

A a

the G-map U ske bs Ç ] : cha *Ç r e

^ MiG sr

extends to a G-map

g : cha1^ ^ M i G , and it is clear that tig is “ e e constant on the elements of the partition zer (tl ad cha^) . Applying

Theorem 3.2.6 (with that

g^

B = Dr+^

defines a G-map

and

K |C1 e

Further, note that for any cells tl h

and

tl h

1

p = [ab cha^ : Dr + ^

agree over

Mi G ,

Cl e] ) ,

which we denote by

we see

hQ .

e„,e0 E cell ,bs r \ cell „A, 1 2 r+1 r+1 Cl e fl Cl e0 , and that for any cell

2

e E cell^^bs £ \ cell^^A, Cl e fl (A U ske bs£) . r ^ cellr+1A ' extending

such that

A U skegbs £

tl h^

This implies that ^

(see 3.2.7).

{h,.: 5|A U s k h

and

h

r

agree over and e

h ,

eE cell ,bs K r+1 s

Y ield together a G-map

hr

a sequence

tl h^

s

extends

hr+ : ? L Uske bs £ + Mi G 1 r+1 Therefore, using induction, we can produce

bsC

+ M i G }“=_1

of G-maps with

h_1 = f,

h

. for all s > 0. Since the sets s— 1 constitute a fundamental cover of bs £ , using again

3.2.7 we conclude that the

hg 's

yield a G-map

^ + Mi G

extending

f.

A Promise 5.

The base of the bundle

However,we shall G

there

see in the next chapter that for any topological group

will imply the existence of k-universal G-bundles with

cellular base of dimension and any positive integer

4. 1. G

G^

is not a cellular space.

are also universal G-bundles with cellular base; see 5.6.1.4.

By 2.7, this

group

MiG

£ k,

for any given topological group

G

k.

Reductions of the Structure Group We say that the Steenrod F ^-bundle

is obtained from the Steenrod F-bundle

by reducing the group

G

to

G^

if

K

Ç

^

with structure

with structure group

is obtained from

Ç^

by

322

extending the group to G. While the extension of the structure group of a Steenrod bundle is a well-defined operation, the reduction of the structure group cannot be carried out for every Steenrod bundle, and even when it is possible, it may produce bundles which are not equivalent with respect to the reduced group.

In other words, the mapping

ext: Stee(B,F ) ->Stee(B,F)

(2)

defined in 1.6 may be both nonsurjective and noninjective. We remark that the set-theoretic properties of the mapping (2) are uniquely determined by the triple preserved when we replace

F

and

F^

B, G, G^,

i.e., they are

by other effective G-spaces and

their corresponding G^-spaces, while keeping

B, G,

and

G^

the same;

this is plain from diagram (1). 2.

Recall that given a cellular space

B,

Stee(B,F)

can be

interpreted as the set of homotopy classes of continuous maps from into a classifying space of the structure group.

Below we

B

describe (2)

in the same homotopy terms. Let

G, G^, F, F^

be as in 1, and let

universal bundles with standard fibers if;: bs ^

-+ bs £

F

is called classifying if

bundle obtained from

^

and i

\p*Z

£

and

^

F 1 . A continuous map 1 is F-equivalent to the

by extending the structure group

By the definition of a universal bundle, such amap exists bs^ and

is a cellular space, and so it certainly exists when C-| = Mi G^

(see 3.1).

be

G^

to

G.

whenever £ = Mi G

Our main claim is that the diagram

Stee(B,F1) — ext -> Stee(B,F) induz(B,£ ^)

induz(B,i)

* ( B , b s Cl >

(3)

------ . , ( B , b s t ]

commutes for any classifying map

ip and any cellular space

B.

PROOF. The composition induz(B,C) ° Tr(idB,c) takes the homotopy class of f : B -* bs i into the class of the bundle i 1 1 0 f-,)*?' while the same homotopy class is taken by ext ° induz (B,? ) into the class of the bundle obtained from structure group

G.)

to

G.

bY extending the

Since the extension of the structure group

and the induction construction commute (see 1.6), the last class ii l i t contains f ’(i|j'£), and it remains to observe that f * (if;*^) = (^ o f )*£. 3.

The commutativity of the diagram (3) and the invertibility

323

of its vertical mappings imply that

induz(B,ç^)

ping from the set of homotopy classes of maps o g

is homotopic to a given map

classes of

g : B -> bs z,

bs ç ,

such that

onto the set of

-equivalent F^-bundles which are obtained from

reducing the structure group F-bundle

f: B

is an injective map­

Ç

G

to

G^ .

f 1ç

by

In particular, a Steenrod

with cellular base admits the reduction of the group

G

to Gn if and only if any continuous map f : bs Ç bs ç such that i 1 f"ç is F-equivalent to £ is homotopic to the composition of some continuous map

bs Ç -> bs

with

5. 1. denote by

\Jj.

Exercises

Given a topological group

Mi(G,k)

i.e., the bundle

G

and a positive integer

the restriction of the bundle (TG(k),pr,TG(k)/G).

Show that

MiG

to

Mi(G,k)

k,

TG(k)/G, is a

(k-1)-universal G-bundle.

MiiZ^fk) 1 Mi(S ,k)

£ «>.

oo 00 (S ,pr,3RP ), while k-1 k-1 (see Exercise 1) is isomorphic to (S ,pr, ]RP ). 1 OO 00 3. Show that Mi S is isomorphicto (S ,pr,(CP ), while 2k-1 k —1 is isomorphic to (S ,pr,(CP ).

2.

Show that Mi 2Z9

4.

Let

X

is isomorphic to



be a compact n-dimensional C -manifold,

Consider the right action

(j / ft) ^ j ° ft [j £ Embr (X, 3Rq ) , action of Diff X on

ofDiffrx

on

Embr (X, IR^) ,

G Diffrx] , and the limit

1 £ r £ given by right

lim (Embr (X , 3Rq ) ,ab Cr (id X ,in) : Embr (X,TOq ) -> Embr (X, lRq+1)) . Show that universal

(lim Embr (X,lRq ) ,pr, [lim Embr (X,Kq )]/DiffrX)

Diffrx-bundle, while

is a

(Embr (X, ]Rq ),pr,Embr (X, lRq )/DiffrX)

is a ( q - 2 n - 1 )-universal DiffrX-bundle, for any

q 5 2n+1.

324

§5.

1. 1.

VECTOR BUNDLES

General Definitions

The main objective of this section is to study those

Steenrod bundles whose standard fiber is either action of one of the groups or

(Cn

GL(n, ]R) ,

with the usual action of

IRn

GL+ (n, IR) ,

GL(n,(C)

or

with the usual 0(n) ,

or

SO(n) ,

U (n) .

Since all the standard fibers listed above are topologically effective, the corresponding bundles may be also regarded as Ehresmann-Feldbau bundles with the same standard fibers (see Subsection 3.4). We shall proceed in this way and ignore completely the topology on the set of marked homeomorphisms in the course of the entire section. To simplify the discussion, we introduce a special notation for the above standard fibers:

GL IRn ,

Standard Fiber 2.

GL_IRn , OIRn ,

SOIRn ,

and

GL(C ,

GLIRn

A Steenrod bundle with standard fiber

GLIRn

is called

an n-dimensional real vector bundle. Since a space with a GLnRn -structure is simply an n-dimensio­ nal real vector space (see 3.1.3), a W-GL3Rn -bundle is simply a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional real vector spaces.

Moreover, a

W-GLnRn -equivalence of W-GL]Rn -bundles is an equivalence that is linear on fibers.

Therefore, an n-dimensional real vector bundle is a bundle

whose fibers are n-dimensional real vector spaces, and which is locally trivial in the natural vector sense: every point of the base has a neighborhood (U x]Rn fpr>j,U) 3.

U

over which the given bundle is equivalent to via an equivalence which is linear on each fiber.

A bundle

£

whose fibers are n-dimensional real vector

spaces is an n-dimensional real vector bundle (i.e.,

£

is locally

trivial in the previous vector sense) if and only if: (i) (ii)

K

the partial vector operations in

]R x tl £ and

is topologically locally trivial;

tl K ,

(X ,x ) b Xx,

tl£ ,

i.e., the maps

325

{(x1,x2) € tl £ x tl £ | pr £ (x1) = pr £ (x2)} -> tl £,

(Xl ,x2) ►> x

+ x2

are continuous. The necessity of these their sufficiency.

Let

of the vector space £ [u

b^ £ b s £ .

pr £-1 (bQ ) ,

Fix an arbitrary basis, a neighborhood

Define a map,

the formula

of the set _

(U x nRn ,pr^ ,U)

-> £,

h:

3Rn ] .

such that

(U x 3Rn ,pr ,U) +

linear on fibers, by where

Now pick disjoint neighborhoods,

pr^ ° tl h ^ ° tlh' (b^ x Sn ^ )

K

and N,

and of the point

1

P r 2 ° tl h

° t l h 1 (b ,0)

neighborhood of tl h (b x K)

tlh'(b,0)

h':

v^,...,v ,

of bQ

tl h 1 (b, ort. ) = tlh(b,pr9 ° tl h-1 (v .) ), -L ^ 1

P r 2 = ^Pr2 : U x lRn

bQ and

in

]R ,

respectively,

consisting of all tlh'(b,0)

£ tlh'(b x sn

b e U

e tl h (b x N) .

when

ab h ' : (V xnRn fpr^,V)

b E V,

and denote by

such that

V

the

tlh'(b x Sn~ 1)

It is clear that

and thus the map

is nondegenerate on each fiber.

Consequently, we can apply Theorem 3.2.8 to TRn ,

U

is topologically trivial, and a trivialization

?|u"

c

conditions is obvious. Let us verify

regarded as a Top 3Rn-space

abh' ,

((V x lRn ,pr^ ,V)

of as Steenrod F-bundles; see 3.4.5).

taking

and

We conclude that

equivalence in the topological sense, and since

abh'

£ |v

F

to be

are thought

ab h '

is an

is also linear

on fibers, the proof is complete.

Standard Fiber 4.

0]Rn

A Steenrod bundle with standard fiber

01Rn

is called

an n-dimensional Euclidean bundle. Since a space with an

0!IRn -structure is an n-dimensional

Euclidean space, a W-OIRn -bundle is simply a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional Euclidean spaces.

Moreover, it is clear that any

W-OIRn -equivalence of W-onRn -bundles is an equivalence which is an orthogonal map on each fiber.

Therefore, an n-dimensional Euclidean

bundle is a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional Euclidean spaces and which is locally trivial in the natural Euclidean sense: every point of the base has a neighborhood (U x ]Rn ,pr >j,U ) fiber.

U

over which the bundle is equivalent to

via an equivalence which is an orthogonal map on each

326

5.

A bundle

£

whose fibers are n-dimensional Euclidean

spaces is an n-dimensional Euclidean bundle (i.e.,

£

is locally

trivial in the Euclidean sense) if and only if it satisfies (i),(ii) of 3 and the following condition: (iii) the function

tl £ -> HR, which takes each vector into

its length, is continuous. These conditions are obviously necessary. that they are also sufficient. every point of

bs £

By Theorem 3, (i) and (ii) imply that

has a neighborhood

zation linear on fibers,

U

pr £ ^ (b) ,

standard orthogonalization of the basis Now (iii) shows that the vectors b,

together with a triviali-

h: (U x]Rn ,pr^,U) -+

be the basis of the vector space

on

Let us verify

Let b £ U,

v^ (b),..., v^ (b)

resulting from the

tlh(b,ort^) , .. .,tl h(b,ort^) .

v^ (b),...,v^(b)

depend continuously

and it is clear that the map linear on fibers,

h' : (U

x Ш П ,рг1 ,U)

£ |и /

given by tl h* (Ь,ог^) = v ^ b )

(i = 1,...,n),

is a trivialization, orthogonal on each fiber, of the bundle 6. bundle

£

Since

0(n) с GL(n,]Rn ),

every n-dimensional Euclidean

determines a unique n-dimensional real vector bundle

through extension of the structure group. as enriching the bundle

£*

£ ',

One may use Theorem 5 to

interpret the reduction of the structure group transforming £

£|u“

£'

into

with an additional structure: namely, a

Euclidean metric on each fiber, such that the corresponding length function

tl 5 *

Ж

is continuous.

termed a Euclidean metric on

£ *.

Standard Fibers 7. (respectively,

This additional structure is

GL+lRn

A Steenrod bundle with БОЖП )

is called an

and

БОЖП

standard fiber

GL ЖП

n-dimensional oriented vector

bundle (respectively, an n-dimensional oriented Euclidean bundle). Since a space with GL+nRn -structure (S01Rn -structure) is simply an n-dimensional oriented vector space (respectively, an n-dimensional oriented Euclidean space), a W-GL+3Rn -bundle (a W-SOHRn -bundle) is simply a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional oriented vector (respectively, Euclidean) spaces.

It is also plain

that a W-GL+]Rn -equivalence of W-GL+lRn -bundles (a W-SonRn -equivalence of W-SO]Rn -bundles) is simply an equivalence which is orientation preserving and linear (respectively, orthogonal) on fibers.

327

Consequently, an n-dimensional oriented vector bundle (Euclidean bundle) is a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional oriented vector spaces (respectively, Euclidean spaces), and which is locally trivial in the following sense: every point of the base has a neighborhood over which the bundle has a trivialization that is orientation preserving and linear (respectively, orthogonal) on fibers. 8.

To obtain a version of Theorem 3 which is suitable for the

oriented case, note that the orientation existing on each fiber of an n-dimensional oriented vector bundle n-frames of the given fiber into

£

S^.

maps the set of nondegenerate Furthermore, the set of all

nondegenerate n-frames of the fibers of associated bundle

asso(£,V 1(n,n))

£

is the total space of the

[where

GL+ (n,3R)

acts on

V'(n,n)

as usual; see 2.3.1.3], and the orientations of the fibers combine to define a map Theorem

tl asso (£ ,V 1 (n, n) )

3asserts that a bundle

S^. £

The "oriented” version of

whose fibers

are n-dimensional

oriented real vector spaces is an n-dimensional oriented vector bundle if and only it satisfies conditions (i) and (ii) of 3 and the condition (iv): the function of the fibers of

tl asso (£ ,V 1 (n,n )) £,

,

defined by the orientations

is continuous.

Theorem 5 must be modified in a similar fashion. given an n-dimensional oriented each fiber of into

S .

£

Euclidean bundle

the orientation of

maps the set of orthonormal n-frames of the given fiber

Since the set of all orthonormal n-frames of all fibers of

equals the total space of the associated bundle obtain a function Theorem

£,

Namely,

tl asso (£,V (n,n)) -> S° .

5asserts that a bundle

£

asso(£,V(n,n)),

£

we

The "oriented” version of

whose fibers

are n-dimensional

oriented Euclidean spaces is an n-dimensional oriented Euclidean bundle if and only if it satisfies conditions (i),(ii) of 3, condition (iii) of 5, and condition (v) : the function by the orientations of the fibers of 9.

Since

real vector bundle bundle

£',

tl asso (£ ,V (n,n) ) £,

defined

is continuous.

GL+ (n,nR) ,n)

G (°°,n+q) ,

(see 2) are cellular. the image

of the second - ske G+ (cc,n+q),

(EG (m,n)

(CG(»,n) -»■ GG(«>,n+q)

The image of the first contains

ske2n+1tEG (oo'n +c2) • The inclusions and

G+ (°°,n) -> G+ (°°,n+q),

and the image of the third -

G(m,n) => skem_nG (°°,n) ,

ske2m-2n+110

skenG (°°,n+q) ,

G+ (m,n) = skem _nG+ (°°,n),

are ec3ually evident.

340

The Grassman Bundles 6. and

Let

(ET(m,n),

n < 00.

We let

T(m,n),

T + (m,n),

denote those subsets of the respective products

G (m,n) x ® m , (y,x)

0 ■ GraGL(n,JR), let g^ be the composite map

The desired

can be described explicitly:

Sr x 3Rn ~ tl ^ > tl Gra GL (n ,JR) — —

> G (°°,n) x JR°° --- -— ► hr00

341

f 1 : Dr+1 x ]Rn

and define

where

»■ ir°°

by

f 1 (ty, (x1 , . . . ,x ) ) =

= tg (y, (x ,...,x )) + (1-t2)1/2(0,...,0,x.,...,x ,0,...), 1 1 n V T— v I n m y E S , t E I, and m is the smallest number s such that

]RS => g 1 (Sr x s n 1 ) ;

finally, set

tl f (y,x)

=

(f^ty x ]Rn ) ,f/)(y,x) ) .

The general case reduces to this special situation. that the cellular space

bs £

Assume

is rigged and that we already have a

GL]Rn -map

f : ^|AlJske bs £ G r a G L (n,:iR) which extends g. The above 5 I r argument shows that for every cell e E cell „bs £ \ cell „A the n r+1 s r+1 GLIR -map g = f oad[abcha : S ^e r e n extends to a GLIR -map

r

* -*• A U ske bs g] : cha *f r e

* h ^ : °ha^£ -+ Gra GL(n,]R) ,

Gra GL (n, TR) S

and it is clear that

tlh

is constant on the elements of the partition zerftlad cha ). ^ r+1 r+1 e Applying Theorem 3.2.6 (with B = D and p = [ab cha^ : D + Cle] ), we conclude that we denote by

h

f^.

e

defines a GL!IRn -map ^

|Cle

-*■ Gra GL (n,3R) ,

Now note that for any two cells,

which

e^,e^ E cell^ + ^bs

\ cell

.A, tl f and tl f agree over Cle. fl Cl e0 , and that r +1 e^ e -2 1 2 for any cell e E cell .bs £ \ cell .A, tl f and tl f agree over i r+1 r+1 e r

Cl e fl (A U ske^bs £) . f

and

f^,

From this compatibility it follows that the maps

e E cell^^bs £

\ cell^^A,

combine todefine a GL3Rn-map

f • f| . . , >. -> Gra GL (n,IR) which extends f ; see 3.2.7. r+1 AUske ,bs £ ' r I r+1 Therefore, using induction, we can produce a sequence of GL]Rn -maps, ifs : 5 U s k e b s C - O r a G L I n , s u c h I s extends f ,s ^ 0. Finally, the maps s— 1 £

Gra GL (n,IR) 8.

Gra(m,O(n)),

extending

The bundles and

Gra (m,GL(n,(C) )

and

that f s

£.,=9

and fs n define a GL3R - map

g. Gra (m, GL (n,IR) ) ,

Gra(m,SO(n)) Gra(m,U(n) )

Gra (m, GL+ (n,IR) ) ,

are (m-n)-universal.

The bundles

are (2m-2n+1)-universal.

This is a corollary of 7 (see 5 and 4.2.7).

342

Associated Principal Bundles 9.

When

m < °°,

the total spaces of the principal bundles

associated with the Grassman bundles Gra (m, GL (n ,1R) ) ,

Gra (m,GL+ (n ,IR) ) ,

Gra (m, GL (n,(C) ) ,

and Gra(m,0(n)), are obviously (CV(m,n).

V' (m,n) ,

Gra(m,SO(n)), V 1(m,n) ,

Gra(m,U(n)),

(CV* (m,n) ,

and

V(m,n) ,

V(m,n) ,

The corresponding projections are the maps described in

3.2. 2.3 and 3.2.2.7: V* (m,n)

G (m,n ) ,

V' (m,n) -> G+ (m,n),

CCVf(m,n)

(CG(m/n)

(2)

and V(m,n) + G (m,n) ,

V(m,n) + G+ (m,n),

The same is true for and

CDV (00,n )

are understood as

lim (V (m,n) ,in), with

m = 00

(CV1 (°°,n) ,

m = m,

and

if

(CV(m,n)

V 1 (°°,n) ,

lim (V1(m, n ) ,in) ,

lim (CCV (m, n ) ,in) ,

(CG(m,n). (CV1 (°°,n) ,

and

CCV(°°,n)

and the projections

(2),(3)

m < 00.

V't“ ^ ) ,

are called Stiefel spaces. m < 00

It is clear that for

V(°°,n),

lim ((CV* (m,n ) ,in) ,

as the limits of the projections (21,(3),

V(«>,n),

(3)

the canonical right actions of

the structure groups on the above total spaces (see 3.2.10) are exactly the right actions described in 2.3.12 and 2.3.13, while for

m = °o

they are the limits of the latter.

The Bundles asso (Gra 0(1) ,0(1) ) 10.

and

as so (Gra U (1 ) ,U (1 ))

The principal bundle associated with

Gra 0(1)

is

0(1)-isomorphic to Mi0(1) . The principal bundle associated with Gra U(1) is U (1 )-isomorphic to Mi U (1 ) . PROOF. tl Mi 0(1 )

It suffices to find an 0(1)-homeomorphism

tl asso (Gra 0 (1 ), 0 (1 )) , OO

tl asso (Gra 0(1),0(1)) = V (°°,1) [= S ] viewing

tlMiU(1)

and

when we regard

tl Mi 0(1 )

as right 0(1) -spaces ;

and

similarly ,

tl asso (Gra U (1 ), U (1 ) ) = (CV (00,1 ) [= S°°]

as

right U (1)-spaces, we need only exhibit a U (1)-homeomorphism tl Mi U (1 ) + tl asso (Gra U (1 ) ,U (1 )) ; see 3.1.9 and 3.2.10. such a homeomorphism is given by the formula (pr (g± 't±) }”_ 1 -

.

In both cases

343

The meaning of the left-hand side was explained in right-hand side the elements

g.

of

0(1)

or

numbers (the following inclusions are used: 0(1) = S° c ]R, and U (1) = S1 c (C) .

4.

4.3.2, while in the

U(1)

V^l)

are thought of as cnR°°,

(CV(°°,1) c (E°°,

The Most Important

Reductions of the Structure Group 1.

The use of Grassman bundles enables us to apply the scheme

presented in Subsection 4.4 to the problems raised in Subsection 1 concerning reductions of the structure group.

This is the subject of

the present subsection. Recall that the reductions corresponding to the inclusions 0 (n) c= GL (n,3R) ,

SO (n) c GL+ (n,HR) ,

U(n) c GL(n, ske

n-s

G(°o,n),

G (°°,n-s) z> ske G (°°,n) + n-s +

and (EG (°°,n-s) => ske2n_2s+-,(I:G (°°,n) . From the first inclusion it follows that the pair (G(°°,n) ,G(°°, n-s))

is (n-s)-connected (see 2.3.2.2),

implies (by Theorems 2.3.2.4 and 2.3.2.5) that the map tt

(

id,in) :

7T

(B,G (°°,n—s ))

tt

(B,G (°°,n) )

which in turn

345

is invertible for any cellular space

B

surjective for any cellular space

with

B

with

dimB

dimB

$ n-s,

= n-s.

and

Consequently,

ext: Stee (B,GLlRn-S) -+ Stee (B,GL]Rn ) and ext: Stee (B,03Rn-s)

Stee (B,0]Rn )

are invertible for any cellular

B

for any cellular

= n-s.

inclusion

B

with

dimB

with

G+ (~,n-s) => sken_sG+ (°°,n)

dimB

$ n-s,

and surjective

In exactly the same manner the

leads to the invertibility

(surjectivity) of the mappings ext: Stee (B ,GL+3Rn_S) -* Stee (B,GL+]Rn ) and ext: Stee (B, S01Rn-S) -» Stee (B,SOUR11) for any cellular

B

with

dim B £ n-s

(respectively,

while the inclusion

(CG(o:',n-s) => ske„ __ (CGi^n) ^n ^ S 1 invertibility (surjectivity) of the mappings

dimB

= n-s),

implies the

ext: Stee (B,GL(Cn-S) -* Stee (B,GL(Cn ) and ext: Stee (B,U(Cn-S) -+ Stee (B,U(Cn ) for any cellular = 2n-2s+1).

B

with

dimB

£ 2 (n-s)

(respectively,

dimB

=

Therefore, every n-dimensional real (complex) vector bundle

with cellular base of dimension

£ n-s

(respectively,

£ 2n-2s+1)

is

GLIRn -equivalent (respectively, GL(Cn-equivalent) to the s-fold suspension of an (n-s)-dimensional bundle; furthermore, if given two (n-s)-dimensio­ nal real (complex) vector bundles with cellular base of dimension (respectively,

< 2n-2s+1)

< n-s

their s-fold suspensions are GLIRn -equivalent

(respectively, GL(Cn-equivalent), then the bundles themselves are GL3Rn S -equivalent (respectively, GL(Cn S-equivalent) .

5. 1.

Let

asso(£,IRn \ 0)

Let asso(Ç,Dn )

and

be an n-dimensional real vector bundle.

is equivalent (in the sense of 1.1.2) to the bundle

with total space restriction of

Ç

Exercises

{x G tl K | x f 0} pr Ç

£

and whose projection is the

to this subspace of

tl£ .

be an n-dimensional Euclidean bundle. Show that A assoit,S ) are equivalent to the bundles whose total

Show

346

spaces are the subspaces of £ 1

and

= 1,

Show that

consisting of the vectors of length

respectively, and whose projections are the appropriate

restrictions of 2.

tl £

pr £ .

Let

£

be an n-dimensional real (complex) vector bundle.

asso(£,V'(n,k))

(respectively,

asso (£ ,(CV1 (n,k ))

is

equivalent with the bundle with total space {(x^ . . . ^ ^ )

G tl £ x ...

x

tl £ | pr £ (x1 ) =

k

x ,... ,x \

K

... = pr£(xk ) , linearly independent} ,

and whose projection is the restriction of the composite map tl £ x . .. Let Show that

£

x

^r l pr£ tl £ --- -— > tl £ ■ ^ > bs £ .

be an n-dimensional Euclidean (Hermitian) bundle.

asso (£ ,V (n,k) )

(respectively, assso (£ ,(CV (n ,k ))

is

equivalent to the bundle with total space { (x1 , . ..,xk ) G tl £ x . .

x

tl £ | pr £ (x1) =

k

x^,...,xk

... = pr £ (xk ) ,

is an orthonormal frame},

and whose projection is the restriction of the composite map tl £ X ... X tl £ 3. 1.2. 9. 5. Clearly

Consider

Now

!— » tl £ ■■Pr 5 , bs £ .

the spaces

GL+ (1 ,HR) acts on

(T v 0)/GL+ (1,]R)

= S.

T and

S

introduced in Exercise

T\ 0

from the right by

Show that the

({x^},t)

{tx^}.

GL (1,3R) -bundle

defined by this action is locally trivial, but not trivial.

Show that

the associated oriented one-dimensional real vector bundle does not admit a Euclidean metric.

§6.

1.

r C , point

SMOOTH BUNDLES

Fundamental Concepts

1. Let 1 £ r £ a. A bundle r or a C -bundle if tl £ and bs £ bQ € b s £

£

is called a bundle of class r ------------- -— ~ are C -manifolds, and for each

there are a neighborhood

U

of

b ,

a Cr-manifold

347

F

with

dF

-1

-+ pr Ç

-

if

0

(U) ,

9U ф 0 ,

such that

and a Cr-diffeomorphism

pr Ç (h(b,x) ) = b

for all

h: U

b € U

F

x

and

x £ F.

The С -bundles with s ^ r will be referred to as bundles of class ^r ^r >1 С , or С -bundles. The C ' -bundles are called smooth. r If Ç is a С -bundle, then p r £ is obviously a r С -submersion. In particular, the fibers of a smooth bundle are neat submanifolds of the total manifold

tl ç

(see 3.1.5.8).

Moreover, the

fibers over points belonging to the same component of the base of a r . r С -bundle are pairwise С -diffeomorphic. If bs £ is connected and _

9 b s £ / 0,

then the fibers have no boundary, and

whereas if

3bs Ç = 0,

then

3tl £ = U ^ b s

situation, the restriction

(3tl Ç,ab pr Ç, 3bs Ç)

9bs £ is a С -bundle, whereas in the second x C -bundle. and

3tl

= 0,

the product

Ç. £

x

and £2

(3bs£),

Эрг £ ”*(b) ; in the first

X;

Given two Cr-bundles,

-i

3tl £ = p r £

of the bundle

£

(9tl £ ,ab pr £ ,bs £ )

such that r is a С -bundle.

to is a

3bs Ç . = 0

The restriction of a С -bundle to a neat submanifold of its £ base is clearly a С -bundle. r r Suppose that Ç is a С -bundle, В is a С -manifold, and r —1 f: В -> bs Ç is a С -map such that the fiber pr £ (f (b )) has no I xr boundary for all b £ ЭВ. Then f £ is aС -bundle, and we say that 1 2T‘ the bundle f "£ is neatly induced. For example, given a С -bundle £, I in’£ is always neatly induced when in is either the inclusion of a neat submanifold in bsÇ, or the inclusion 3 b s £ + b s £ ; obviously, ! jo in *£ coincides, as a С -bundle, with the corresponding restriction of Ç. 2.Let

0 £ s £ r.

A map

ф

>r from one C ' -bundle into another

is said to be a ÇS-map (a СS-isomorphism) if

tl £

СS-maps (respectively, CS-diffeomorphisms for for

s =

and

s ^ 1,

bs Ç

are

and homeomorphisms

0). A CS-isomorphism which is also an equivalence is called a

С S-equivalence. A C^r-bundle

£

is said to be CS-trivial if it is

CS-equivalent to a standard trivial bundle F

is a C^r-manifold (such that

3F = 0

if

(bsÇ x F,pr^,bsÇ) , 9bs Ç i 0 ) .

Every Cr-bundle

is obviously locally Cr-trivial, meaning that each point of a neighborhood

U

such that

Ç|y

where

bs £

has

is Cr-trivial; in particular, every

smooth bundle is topologically locally trivial. If f,

then

Cr-map,

ad f where

1

f'£

>r is neatly induced from the C ' -bundle

: £

f !Ç + U s and

Ç'

a Cr-map.Furthermore, if

are C^r-bundles,

and

(bs

injective on for all

(p(F) = yQ x f we see

is of class F;

x G F.

Cr ;

and the Since

F is

where

(U) ,

(see 3.1.5.5).

Using once

that the last neighborhood contains

V

is a neighborhood of

be a smaller neighborhood of -1

y^ G int Y ,

cp defines a diffeomorphism of a neighborhood

a neighborhood of

more the compactness of Let

(p

for

cj>(x) = (f (x) ,prT (j (x) )) .

is nondegenerate

we conclude that

Fonto

We show

from 3.4.8.2), it

and in both

cf> are immediate:

(tub^p))) c= 3 (Y x f ) ; d^(p

X

a Cr-transversalization

(j): j 1 (tub^p) + Y x f ,

differential

Y.

x G F.

is a neat submanifold of

and a neat submanifold of

-1

and closed

G Y there are a neighborhood U of y ,a r —1 F, and a C -diffeomorphism h: U xf -* f (U) ,

From 3.1.5.8 (or, if it is more convenient,

IR^,

indeed,

y

f(h(y,x)) = y

follows that

= Y:

yn ,

such that

and we can finally set

j (f

y —

1

(in

Y).

(u) ) c= tub p.

h = (ab tl £'

by x ^ pr^, (f(pr £(x)),j ’ (F(x))) . Obviously,

($(F,f),f) £ CS (£,£')

f(F,f) = ((F,f) ,f) ,

and the map

y : U -*■ C (£,£'),

JO U D (C (tl£,tl£')

is a retraction which takes

x

x Cr (bs £,bs £’)) into Cr (£,£’). Since Cr (tl£,tl£') x Cr (bs £ ,bs £ ’) is dense in CS (tl£,tl£’) x CS (bs£,bs£') (see 3.4.4.2), the existence r s of such a retraction implies that C (£,£') is dense in C (£,£'). >r 4. Let s < r s; °°, let £ and £' be arbitrary C ' -bundles such that

t l £ , tl £' , bs £ ,

f : bs £ -> bs £'be a Cr-map. is dense in

{

provided that

and

Then the

£ CS (£,£')| bs

tl £ , tl £'

PROOF.

Let

consisting of the

F

maps

bs £'

are closed manifolds, and let

set

{£ Cr (£,£')|

= f}.The same holds

'

of

j'

of class

U LS (£,£' ;f) , given by { [$() ] (b') } (y' ) = [pr2 : bs £

X

3Rm +

3Rm ]

(tl o p' (b* ,y' ) )

and [tl (T (h))] (b •,y ’) = p (f (b ') , th (b ')] (y 1)) ^

(where

r is a compact C -manifold with 1 £ r £ 00, then £ is

GLIRn -equivalent (GL(Cn-equi valent) to a real (complex) vector C^r-bundle. g If the base of the n-dimensional real (complex) vector C -bundle £ is a compact C^r-manifold,

where

1 £ s < r £ 00,

then

5

is CS-GLIRn -

-equivalent (CS-GL(En-equivalent) to a real (complex) vector C^r-bundle. We shall prove again only the real case.

Let

£ >r

be an

n-dimensional real vector bundle with b s £ a compact -manifold. n 1 By 5.3.8 and 3.5.2.13, £ is GLIR -equivalent to f *Gra (m,GL (n ,JR) ) , where If

£

m

is large enough

and

f

is some continuous map b s £ G(m,n). s is an n-dimensional real vector C -bundle such that bs £ is a

compact C^r-manifold, then by Theorem 5 £ is CS-GLIRn -equivalent to i g f *Gra (m, GL (n, IR) ) , where m is large enough and f is some C -map bs £

G(m,n) .

In both

cases

f

is homotopic to a C ' -map

g: bs £ -v G(m,n) (see 3.4.6.5, 1.3.6.6, and 3.4.5.10), so that £ n * is GLIR -equivalent to g *Gra(m,GL(n,IR) ) (see 4.1.5). This completes the proof of the first claim; as for the second, we need only add that, by 11,

£

is CS-GLIRn -equivalent to

g "Gra(m,GL(n,IR) ) .

Constructions 13. We conclude this subsection with a short review of the constructions described in § 5. s By definition, a C -subbundle of a (real or complex) vector C -bundle

£

is a subbundle of

£

in the sense of 5.2.2 or 5.2.3,

whose total space is a CS-submanifold of clearly a vector C —bundle.

tl£ .

A CS-subbundle is

The C —subbundles of Euclidean or Hermitian

C -bundles are similarly defined. simply referred to as subbundles.

The C -bundles of C -bundles will be

359

According to 5.2.5, every subbundle

n

of a Euclidean or

Hermitian bundle £ has an orthogonal complement n , and it is clear j_ g that: n is a C -subbundle of £ together with • n; the canonical equivalence

n'L -*■ £/n

(see 5.2.6) turns

£/n

into a Euclidean or

Hermitian CS-bundle (and thus becomes a C-equivalence). the (real or complex) vector Cs-case, by introducing on

£

£/n

We see that in

becomes a vector Cs-bundle

a (Euclidean or Hermitian) CS-metric.

Recall,

however, that we have established the existence of such a metric only under the assumptions that the base is compact and Let

£^

and

boundaryless base.

£2

s ^ a

(see 6).

be real vector Cr-bundles with a common

Then the construction of

£

© £.

shows that this sum is again a real vector C -bundle.

(see 5.2.9) The difficulty

occuring when the base has a boundary (i.e., the fact that the product £>1 x

not defined as a Cr-bundle) can be circumvented with the aid of the formulas ^~s

ti(?1 ® ?2) = ti( (Pr

h 2)

and p r ( ^ @ £2) = pr ?2 ° pr ((pr

) 1£2) .

Tf the conditions in 5.2.9. are satisfied, then these formulas are equivalent to the definition of

and this remains valid under

our present circumstances, provided that the base has no boundary; the same formulas are now taken as the definition of the sum when the boundary is present.

One can repeat the argument for complex vector, 27

Euclidean, and Hermitian C -bundles. In particular, we can define the 27 suspension (see 5.2.10) of a C -bundle. The C -variants of the other constructions described in §5 and their mutual relations are already evident. conjugate of a complex vector (Hermitian)

In particular, the

C -bundle is a complex

27

(respectively, Hermitian) C -bundle; the realification (see 5.1.12) of a complex vector (Hermitian) Cr-bundle is a real vector (respectively, Euclidean) Cr-bundle; the complexification (see 5.2.11) of a real vector (Euclidean) Cr-bundle is a complex vector (respectively, Hermitian) Cr-bundle; and in the Cr-versions of Theorems 5.2.13 and 5.2.14, the equivalences

conj

and

4. 1.

K

become (^-equivalences.

Tangent and Normal Bundles

The basic notions of tangent and normal bundles have

actually already been introduced and used in Chapter 3.

However, only

360

now,that we have acquired the ideea of a smooth vector bundle, can we present the full-fledged definitions of tangent and normal bundles and give them the general, correct treatment that they deserve.

Tangent Bundles 2.

Recall that in Chapter 3 we defined, for an arbitrarily

given Cr-manifold with r ^ 1, the real vector spaces Tang X the Cr-1 -manifold Tang X , and the projection p r : Tang X X 3.1.4.1 and 3.1.4.2).

(x € X) , (see

Comparing these objects with the general

definitions given in 5.1.2 and 3.2, we readily see that

(Tang X ,pr,X)

is a real vector bundle of dimension dim X and, for r > 2, a real r— 1 vector C -bundle of dimension dim X , calledthe tangentbundle of the manifold

X,

and is denoted by

tang X .

Similarly, confronting the definition of the differential df: Tang X

Tang Y

of a Cr-map f: X

Y

(see3.1.4.3)

with

the

general definitions given in 5.1.14 and 3.2, we conclude that (df,f) r— 1 r is a linear C -map tang X -*■ tang Y . If f is a C -dif feomorphism r—1 then (df,f) is a linear C -isomorphism. 3.

The notion of vector field has been defined twice: once

for smooth manifolds (see 3.1.4.5), and once for vector, Euclidean, and Hermitian bundles (see 5.1.15).

Now it is plain that the second

definition generalizes the first one: a vector field on a smooth manifold

X

is simply a vector field in its tangent bundle tang X . 5 In particular, the parallelizability (C -parallelizability) of an

n-dimensional smooth manifold X is equivalent to the GL3Rn -triviality s n (respectively, C -GLIR -triviality) of the bundle tang X . Comparing this with Theorem 3.11, we see that a parallelizable compact Cr-manifold r— 1 with r £ 00 is C -parallelizable. A smooth manifold is stably parallelizable if its tangent bundle is stably trivial.

The discussion in 5.4.4 and Theorem 3.5.2.13

show that if a compact manifold is stably parallelizable, then the stabilization occurs already at the first step, i.e., the bundle su tang X manifold

is GL}Rn+1 -trivial for any stably parallelizable n-dimensional X. 4.

each chart

Recall that, given a point £ Atlxx

x

of the

smooth

manifold

defines a (j)-basis for the tangent space

Tang X,

and the matrix of the transformation from the (j)-basis to the ifj-basis is just the Jacobi matrix of the map

loc (■ Z] (a result

of the discussion in 1)

whenever

X

is closed but Y is

and,in particular,

degf

= 0

not.

As examples, consider the maps f: (Dn/,Sn ^) (Dn ,Sn ^) and n“ 1 nw1 ab f : S S ,defined by an orthogonal (nxn)-matrix V (n ^ 2) . Obviously,

deg f

V € SO(n),

= deg ab f = det V ,

anddeg f = deg ab f = -1

degree of

the antipodal map

even and

-1

if

n

Sn ^

i.e.,

deg f = deg ab f = 1

if

£ 0(n) ^ SO(n).

V

Sn \

x -xf equals

if

Thus, the

1

if n

is

is odd.

The Nonoriented Case 5.

The discussion in 1, 2, and 3 can be carried over to n

oriented manifolds if we replace integers by integers modulo 2. enables us to define f: (X, 3X) and

Y

(Y ,3Y ) ,

deg f



where X and

for any continuous Y

map

are smooth, compact

is connected (no orientability needed).

the integral degree listed in 4 are preserved.

This

manifolds,

All the properties of For the case of oriented

manifolds, when both degrees (the integral and mod 2) are defined, we continue to use the same notation for both, because misunderstandings are usually eliminated by the context.

370

Applications 6.

Smooth closed manifolds of positive dimension are not

contractible. This is plain if the given manifold is not connected. connected case, the identity map of a closed manifold is

1,

In the

whereas

the

degree of any map which takes the whole manifold into one of its points is zero (here we use the 7.

If

-degree defined in 5).

n i m, then

Indeed,

if

m < n,

Sn and then

Sm

are not homotopy equivalent.

every continuous map

Sm + SD

is

homotopic to a constant map (see 2.3.2.3 and 2.3.1.6), whereas id: Sn

Sn

is not homotopic to a constant map (see 6).

8.

The boundary of a nonempty, compact, smooth manifold is

not a retract of the manifold. It suffices to assume that the given manifold smooth, connected, and with and let X —

Z be X

any component of >

10.

be a retraction,

Consider the composite map

On the other hand, this degree equals the

degree of

which is 1,

Every continuous

the

Then the map Sn ^

Sn ^

from the point

is a retract of

Dn :

id Z .

is continuous and has no

taking each point f(x)

Euclidean q-simplex.

into

is a retraction, and

locally Euclidean space is homeo-

morphic to an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space, then (Cf. 3.1 .1 .4) . Every point of

x E Dn

contradiction (see Theorem 8).

If an m-dimensional

PROOF.

0

Dn has a fixed point.

f :Dn + Dn

Dn

X,

last map being

map Dn

Suppose that

its projection on Sn ^

3X

degree is

PROOF.

hence

p: X

is compact,

its

ab(in ° p) : Z -* Z,

fixed points.

9X.

Let

X. Since its image is not all of

(see 4 and 5).

9.

9X / 0.

X

3Rq

n = m.

can be covered (in ]Rq )

by a

Therefore, every point of a q-dimensional locally

Euclidean space lies in the interior of a finitely-triangulated subset, and its link in this subset is homeomorphic to 2.2.6.4, spheres

Sg_1.

By Theorem

this link is a homotopy invariant, and 7 shows that the S

and 11.

S

cannot have the same homotopy type unless

m = n.

Theorem 10 clarifies not only the definition of a locally

Euclidean space, but also that of a cellular space.

Namely, it shows

that the dimension of a cell is uniquely determined by this cell.

371

Therefore, the dimension function which we introduced into the definition of the cellular decomposition as an additional element of its structure, is actually redundant, being completely determined by the decomposition itself. 12.

n ]R_

The boundary of the half space

ri“ 1 _is 3R^

(Cf. 3.1.1.4.) PROOF.

It suffices to show that the point

neighborhood homeomorphic to

3Rn ;

0

has in 3R^

no

see 3.1.1.4.

Assume that such a neighborhood exists.

Then

0

is an

interior point of a finitely-triangulated subset of this neighborhood, where its link is homeomorphic to On the other hand,

0

S

(cf. the proof of Theorem 10).

is an interior point of a finitely-triangulated

subset, where its link is homeomorphic to n-simplex which lies in of its (n-l)-faces.

3R^

Since

Dn ^:

and contains Sn ^

0

take any Euclidean

in the interior of one

is not contractible, whereas

Dn ^

is,

we contradict Theorem 2. 2. 6. 4.

6. 1. X

and

Y

(X,f ,Y )

Let

r £ 00,

and let

are Cr-manifolds, is a Cr-bundle.

that for

r

Cr-manifold

< °°, and

Exercises

X

f : X -> Y

be a Cr-submersion, where

compact and

Y

closed.

(Combined with Theorem 1.3, this result shows

(X,f ,Y )is a Cr-bundle whenever Y

Show that

is a Cr-manifold, while

f:

X is X ■+Y is

a compact a

C -submersion.) 2. base.

Show

k(z x I)

c 3.

Let

1 £ r £ °°, and let

that there isa collaring pr £ Let

9tl E,

= pr

and

1: 9tl E, x I

(pr £ (z))

k: 9tl E,

for every point

1 bs £

372

4. compact

Show that if

bs £

and

tl F3,

>r then for every C ' -bundle

r £ °°, Secr£

is dense in

(This generalizes Theorem 2.7 for r f a.) >r 5. Show that every C ' -bundle £ tl£

with

for any s < r.

with compact

bs £

and

r 00 _. is C -isomorphic to a C -bundle (cf. 2.8). 6.

Show that

sum of n+1 copies of

su tang ]RPn

7.

is Ca-GLIRn +^- equivalent to the

Gra (n+1 ,GL (1 ,3R) ) ,

Ca-GLCCn+^-equivalent to the sum of

G(m,n)

SecS£

£

n+1

while

su tang CCPn

copies of

is

Gra (n+1 ,GL (1 ,CC) ) .

Show that the normal bundle of the Ca-embedding

-+G(m+1,n),

Gra(m,GL(n, 3R) ) ,

described in 3.2.2.3, is Ca-GLIRn -equivalent to while the normal bundle of the Ca-embedding

(CG(m,n) -+ CG(m+1,n),

described in 3.2.2.1 ,

is Ca-GL(Cn-equivalent to

Gra (m, GL (n ,CC) ) .

degree m

8. in

Let P'l ' ***'Pn + 1 ke homogeneous complex polynomials of n+1 variables, whose only common zero is the point 0.

Show that the map

(EPn

CCPn

given by

* ,P1 ( Z 1 .....2 n +1 > " ■ • :pn + 1 < Z 1 .....!„ . l " has degree

m11.

9. Show that for n ^ 1 every continuous map degree is not (-1)n+ has a fixed point. 10.

Show that for

n ^ 1

every continuous map

Sn -> Sn

whose

Sn -> SR

having odd degree transforms some pair of antipodal points into another such pair. 11 .

Show that for odd

n > 1

the degree of any map

Sn -+ IRpn

is even. 12.

Let

f

be a simplicial map of the standard 2-simplex

onto the standard 1-simplex. Show that the symplicial mapping cylinder, Scylf , is not homeomorphic to Cyl f .

Chapter 5. Homotopy Groups

§1.

1. 1.

Let

THE GENERAL THEORY

Absolute Homotopy Groups

(X,Xq )

be a pointed space, and let

r 5 0

be an

integer.

To simplify the notation, let us agree to write Sphr (X,xQ ) 27 x 2T r for the set C (I ,FrI ;X,xQ) of all continuous maps (I ,Fr I ) (X,Xq and denote theset of homotopy classes of such r r tt ( I ,Fr I ; X ,xq ) ) by 7Tr (X,xQ). The elements

maps (i.e., of

Sphr (X,xQ ) will be

referred to as r-dimensional spheroids (or simply r-spheroids) of the space

X

with For

origin x^. r > 0

define their product,

and two arbitrary spheroids (pip,

as the spheroid in

(p,\p

€ Sph (X,Xg),

Sph^iX^^)

0

and

(b) .

d £ G2

c £ G^

cf>3

-1

((>4

i.e., £G3 .

= e. . 3 is an epimorphism.

h^ ° ^ 2 ^)

= 4>4 ((0 4 1

h^ o ^ (d )= a(cf)^(b))

a =

\

Let

a £ G3 .

= Imh^ .

Let

(b) ) _1 ) = ° h^ (a) ) (h3 (b) )_1 )

h^ (c) = ai^ib))

= ^3 ° h 2 (d) , and

Consequently,

On the

and so

o h 3 2 *

are h 3 ~ '

h 4 “ 'and

h^-homomorphisms, respectively; h 2 (oj)h^(a) = h 2 (00a)

for all

oj £

and

a £

An isomorphism is a homomorphism such that all isomorphisms. -

12.

11^.

h.'s

Among conditions (i)-(vi) above, tworefer to H4

are

p^,

namely (iv) and (v).

From (iv) it follows that if

on

IIc-,

is contained in the center of the group

(v)

it follows that if

then

Im p^

IT4

acts identically on

Abelian, and that the converse is true provided

n5 , p^

acts identically then

H5

IT^. From is

is an epimorphism.

395

In general,

(v) implies that

Ker

is contained in the center of

The Tr-sequence (6 ) is exact if ----and, in addition, the preimages of the 13.

i ^ 0

are nothing but

Ker p . = Im p . „ for all 'l i+1 elements of under p^ IT3 on n2 -

the orbits of the action of

If the ii-sequence (6 ) is exact and obviously the homomorphism

i ^ 0 is arbitrary, then

piis trivial if

and only if

P^ +1

epimorphism, while Ker p^ is trivial if and only if Pj_+^ In general, wheni ^ 3, Ker p^ is trivial if and only p^ injective, of

because

p. is a group homomorphism.

is an

^-s trivial. is

Further, the triviality

Ker p2

P2 (a3

-1

means that p2 is injective: if p2 (ct) = p2 (3), then _1 1 1 ) = p2 (a) 3 = p2 (3)3 = P2 (3B )= P2 (en ) [see condition (vi)

in 11], and hence the injectivity

a = 3. of

The triviality of

p^,

Ker p^

does not imply

and this is also valid for Ker p^

However, in thecase of an exact 7T-sequence (6 ), the is guaranteed if the group on

n^.

and

p^.

injectivity

of p^

is trivial, or if it acts identically

TI2 • The above discussion makes clear that, in the case of an exact

7T-sequence

(6 ) and for

i ^ 1,

equivalent to the invertibility of H^ + 2

and

14. n2

-*-s

Pj_+i' that the triviality of

IK

implies the triviality of

triviality of

on

P.^+2

the triviality of

^i +2

an and since

-1

£ Ker p2

B = P2 (en )3 = P2 (l3) = Y

Consequently,

= Im p ^ ,

is an epimorphism and that a £ II^

[see

and

y £ n2 ,

Bp3 ■ are

between pairs with base point.

(X' ,A' ,Xq) ,

all

r 5 1,

f* : Trr (X,x0> ■+ *r ( x ' ,

for

all r>.

are isomorphisms, then so 1; if f*: ^ (x,xQ)+ n (X’,x'Q) ,

401

all

r £ 1,

and

f*:

finally , if

f*

:

f* :

f*:

-*

7Tr ( X / A / x Q )

7t ^ ( X , A , X

q

->

)

tt ^

tt

', A

1, x^

+

TTr ( X 1 , x ^

all

r ^ 0,

TTr ( X , x Q )

(abf)* : tt^(A,Xq) + tt^ (A1 /xq ) / are

(X

),

all

r * 1,

(abf)* : 7Tr (A,x0 ) + tt (A',x^),

isomorphisms, then so are r > 1;

+ t\^

TTr ( X , A , x Q )

^ (X 1 ,A 1 /xq ) ,

(X* , A ' , X

q

),

all

are

for all

r ^ 0,

and

are isomorphisms, then so

for all

r ^ 2,

while

is an epimorphism with trivial kernel.

)

f*: tt^(X,A,Xq) -+ tt^ (X 1 ,A 1 ,x^)

In the last case,

necessarily injective; see 3.3.8.

is not

However, this map is certainly

injective (and hence, an isomorphism) if we assume, in addition, that all the homomorphisms

(abf)*: tt (A,x) + tt (A *,f (x) ) ,

epimorphic.

To see this, let

and let

and

w^

there is a path = f o w 2 (1 ),

w2

such that

f* (co^ ) = f*(w2 ),

and

m

are

s'(0)= f o w^(1),

a^.

Then

s'(1) =

and the loop

((f

o w ^ ) ( [i n : A 1 -*■ X 1] o s , ) ) ( f o w 2 ) 1

is homotopic to the constant loop. is an

with

^

be spheroids in the classes

s': I + A*

x G A,

isomorphism and

(abf)* :

epimorphism, there is a path s(1)

=w 2 (1) /

such

achoice of

and the path s,

Since

(abf)* : tTq (A,Xq )

(A,w (1

s: I A

(9)

tTq

(A',Xq )

)) -* tt^ (A ',f (w^ (1 )))isan

such that

ab f os: I + A*

s(0)

= w^(1),

is homotopic to

s'.

f takes the loop

(w^([in: A -*■ X] ° s))w2^ into

(10)

aloop homotopic to (9), and therefore homotopic

loop.

For

to theconstant

Finally, from the fact that f*: tt^(X,Xq) ■+ tt^(X',Xq)

is an

isomorphism, it follows that (1 0 ) itself is homotopic to the constant loop,

w^ and w 2

i.e., the spheroids

are homotopic, and

= w2 .

The Homotopy Sequence of a Triple 10. Xq

£

B.

Let

According

TTr (X,A,xQ ),

(X,A ,B )

be a t o p o l og ic al

to S u b s e c t i o n 4, w h e n

TTr (X,B,xQ ),

and

in* : TTr (A,B,x0 ) + TTr (X,B,xQ ) i n d u c e d by the

inclusions

are w el l defined.

9:

If

in:

r > 2,

(X,A ,xQ ) -> TTr _ 1 (A,B,xQ ) ,

homomorphism TTr_i(A,xo)

r ^

TTr (A,B,xQ ), and

tr iple wi th b a s e po in t

1

the h o m o t o p y g roups

and the h o m o m o r p h i s m s

rel* : TTr (X,B,xQ ) + TTr (X,A,x0 ),

(A,B)

■+

(X,B)

an d

rel:

(X,B)

(X,A) ,

we de fi ne an ad di t i o n a l h om om orp hi sm ,

as the composition of the boundary

TTr (X,A,x0) + Trr_1 (A,xQ)

and the homomorphism

TTr_1 (A, B,xQ), induced by the inclusion

(A,x0 ,xQ) -> (A,B,xQ ).

402

N ow we may ass em bl e homomorphisms

these three

series of g r o u p s and three

into a l e f t - i nf in it e

series of

sequence

tt2 (A, B ,xQ ) -— ■*-> 2 (X ,B ,xQ ) - rel*^ tt2 (X,A ,xQ ) —

...

(11 )

tt1 (A ,B ,xQ ) As was

(7),

(11)

is a ir-sequence:

2

(X,A , X q )

on the gr oups

tt (X,A fx Q ),

tt 2

(X,B ,Xq )

on the groups

Trr (A,B,xQ )

the ac tions

of

n

(A,xQ ) and

3: Tr2 (X,A,xQ ) + tt (A,xQ ) right act io n of of

tt ^

(A,X q )

tt2

4.5,

4.7,

5.11

are satisfied.

the triple

and

(X,A, x q )

the r i g h t g r o u p - a c t i o n s

and

tt^ (X ,B ,x Q ) ,

via

tt, j

(A,B, x 0 )

Tr-Sequence

i n du ce d by

the h o m o m o r p h i s m s similarly,

the

is ind uced by the a c t i o n

3: tt2 (X,A, x 0 ) -+ tt^(A, x 0 ); finally,

and 4.8 show that the c o n d it io ns

(X,A,B)

are

3: Tr2 (X,B,xQ ) -> tt^ B ^ X q ); on

of

and the rig ht g r o u p - a c t i o n s of

tt1 (B,xQ )

via the h o m o m o r p h i s m

4.4,

rel* » TT1 (X, A,xq )

^ (X,B,x0 )

(11)

i mposed by D e f i n i t i o n

is cal led the h o m o t o p y s e q ue nc e of

with base poi nt

xQ .

Sequence (11) is exact; cf. 2. Given any path

triple

B,

with base point

(X,A,B)

s(0)

with base point

Given any continuous map base point

xQ

Xq G B 1),

the t r a n s l a t i o n s

and

(X,A, s (0) )

tt^ (A, B ,s (0 )) ->

define an isomorphism of the homotopy sequence of the

(X,A,B)

the triple

I

(X,B,s (0) ) -+ 7rr (X,B, s (1 )),

TT^ (X, A, s (1 ) ) , -> it (A,B,s(1))

s:

into a triple

the homomorphisms

s(1); f

cf. 3.

from a triple

(Xf,A,,Bf) and

(X,A,B)

with base point

f*: Trr (X,A,xQ)

tt^_(X 1 ,B 1 ,Xq ) ,

f* : TTr (X,B ,xQ )

into the homotopy sequence of with

x^

(x

€ B,

tt^ (X ',A 1 ,x^ ) ,

(abf)* : TTr (A,B,xQ) -> tt^_ (A 1 ,B 1 ,x^ ),

constitute a homomorphism from the homotopy sequence of the first triple into the homotopy sequence of the second triple; cf. 4.

7.

The Local System of Homotopy

Groups of the Fibers of a Serre Bundle 1. fibers of and

Suppose that

£,

and

(f)^ G Sph^ (F^ fx

[in: Fq

tl £]

G Sph^_ (tl £ ,x^) spheroids of 4>0

and

c|)

o

xQ G F Q ,

£

x1 G F1 .

is a Serre bundle, Two spheroids,

FQ

and

F

Q G Sphr (F0 ,xQ )

) , are said to be fiber homotopic if the spheroids

(J)0 G Sph^ (11 £, x^)

and

[in: F ^ + tl ?]

o

G

can be connected by a free homotopy consisting of

tl £which take are fiber

ir

into fibers of

homotopic if there is a map

£.

In other words,

h: lr x I + tl £

are

403

such that:

h

is constant on each set

Fr ir x t,

t £ I,

h(y,0) =

= c()q (y) ,

h (y,1) = cf) (y) , y G Ir , and the map pr E, ° h is constant 3T on each set I x t, t G I. We say that h is a fiber homotopy from ^0



^1

along the path 2.

Given any spheroid

there is afiber homotopy tl£ . tl E,

t h* h(Fr ir x t) .

of

(y)

is manifestly a fiber homotopy of

s. To prove the second assertion of the theorem, it suffices to

show that two spheroids, along a loop

4>^

s: I + tl^

homotopic

homotopic in the usual sense. from

t}) to

ip

along

to the constant loop. H: Ir + 1

x I

G Sphr (F0 ,xQ),

s,

bs E, and G:

with the constant loop, are

Choose

a fiber homotopy

and a homotopy

Now define

f

Fr lr + 1

which are fiber homotopic $: I

h: I x I -*• tl E,

from

s

: lr + ^ ->• tl E, and homotopies

x I -»• tl E, ,

by the formulas

f~(tr ...,tr+1) = $((t 1 f...,tr ),tr+1), = pr E, ° h (tr + 1 ,t) ,

x I -* tl E,

=

and (t^/...ft^)f

if

tr+i — 1 t

^ (t^ / •• • h (tr+ ^ ,t) ,

— ^'

if

(t^ , ...

G Fr X

.

Since H (y,0) =pr£(f~(y)) for Y € Ir+1, and G(y,0) = f~(y) for y G Fr Ir + 1 , there is a homotopy H~: lr + 1 x I -> tl E, which covers H

and satisfies

= f (y) and note

H~(y,t) = G(y,t)

for y G ir ^ . thaty :

Now

ir x i -> fq

for

y G Fr lr + 1

4>0 € Sphr (FQ ,x0 )

H~(y,0) =

let ¥( (t , ... ,tr ) ,t) = H ((t^/..., t^_,t ) ,1 ) is a (usual) homotopy from

Let us prove the last part of the theorem. spheroids

and

and

., G Sph^F^x.,)

to

\p.

Suppose that the are fiber homotopic

404

along the path ^

u: I + tl £ ,

Sphr (F0 ,xQ) ,

e

I^ e Sphr (F1 ,x1), and the path

suppose that the paths that

(J)Q

and that the same holds for the spheroids

and

pr £ ° u >Pr £ ° v: I

bs E,

wQ = [in: FQ

tlEj o w.

pr £ ° (u ^ (wnv )) : I

bs £

tl E, .

Further,

are homotopic, and

are freely homotopic along a path 0

last means that there is a fiber homotopy from path

v: I

w: I + FQ . to

\J/Q

The

along the

It is clear that the loop

is homotopic to the constant loop, which in

turn implies that the path u w 1 : I -> tl £ with w 1 (I)c F

-1

[x E tl £]

(pr £ ^1 (pr £ ^ (tl cp(x))) ,tl cp(x) )

combine to define a homomorphism of the upper local system

of the r-th homotopy groups of the fibers of for bs cp

Furthermore, and

if the fibers of

abtlcp*: TT^(pr£ ^ (b) )

£

£

into the similar system

and

arer-simple,

(pr £^ (bs cp(b)))

then

[b E bs £]

combine to define a homomorphism of the lower local system of the r-th homotopy groups of the fibers of

8.

Then pr

into the similar system for

and let

Let B

£

be a Serre bundle with a base point

be a subset of

: TTr (tl£,pr£ 1 (B),xQ)

pr

.

The Homotopy Sequence of a Serre Bundle

1 (LEMMA). Xq E tl £ ,

£

: TTr (tl£,pr£

-

1

(bg) ,bg)

bs £

with

^ (bs £ ,B ,xQ )

7Tr (bs £ ,bQ)

bQ = pr £ (xQ) E B. and, in particular,

are isomorphisms for any

r > 1. PROOF. Let homotopies,

pr

is epimorphic.

(p E Sph (bs £,B,bn ) . r — 1 ^" H: I x I bs £ and

^ r— 1 Define f : I -+ tl £ and two r— 1 G: Fr I x I -> tl £ , by

H ((t1 , ...,tr _ 1 ) ,t) = 4>(t1 , ...

f~(lr_1) = xQ , G(FrI r _ 1

x i) = X(). SinceH(y,0) ^ r—1 G (y,0) = f (y) for y £ Fr I , and equals

,1-t) ,

y £ ir 1 , and ~ r—1 there is a homotopy H : I x i -*■ tl E,

= pr£(f~(y))

G on Fr I

r- 1

(see 4.1.3.6 ).

H

the formula

(t ,. ..,tr ) = H~ ((t 1 ,...,tj._1),1-tr ) such that

x I

for

which covers

ip £ Sphr (tl £ ,pr £ ~ 1 (B) ,Xq )

and

pr^ ^ (ip)

Now

defines a spheroid

= .

2)

pr £* is monomorphic. 1 Let ip £ Sphr (tl £ ,pr £ (B) ,Xq ) , _

prt^(ip)

£ Sphr (bs E, ,B,b0)

and suppose that the spheroid

is homotopic to the constant spheroid.

406

Choose a homotopy

spheroid, and define H: Ir x I h

x I -* bs £

0: I

bs £

f : ir -+ tl £

and

((t 1 ,...,tr ),t)

from

G: F r l r x I + tl[ ,

,tr- 1 ,1 -t),

Since

(t1 ,...,t^) G Fr I

if

H(y,0) = pr£(f~(y))

for

there exists a homotopy equals

G

on

Fr I

x I.

y G I ,

tl £

Let -1

Set

Fq = pr £

(b^)

Now it is plain that

Co

is the component of

for

by

Fq

a

.

bn G bs i .

then the loops

a G it^ (bs £ ,bQ ) ,

a.

That this action is

a path which ends

in

C and covers

of the pair

and which is carried into a loop in class w

s2 G Sph^ (tl

is a path in

pr^(s ^ w )

Now Lemma 1 implies that the spheroids

C

with

£,FQ ,x2) w(0) = x^

and p r ^ ( s 2)

and

coincide.

and

are homotopic.

s^w,s2 G Sph^ (tl£,FQ ,x2 )

homotopic, which, in turn, implies that the components of s^(0)

7T^(bs£;,bQ)

which contains the origins of those paths

C,

are two such spheroids, and w( 1 ) = x2 ,

with base point

s G Sph 1 (tl C/FQ ,x1 )and

If

comp(FQ )

can be regarded as a spheroid

with origin in

pr ^

on

and cover loops in the class

a loop in the class a

£ ,b Q )

C G comp(FQ) and

well defined follows from Lemma 1: (tl £,Fq)

defines a homotopy

and define a right action of the group

comp(FQ) as follows : C

tt^ (bs

£ be a Serre bundle

on

which end in

and

from ip to the constant spheroid

The Action of 2.

tr / 0 .

G(y,0) = f (y) which x I -> tl £

H : I

v ( ( t y . . . ,tr ) ,t) = H~( t^ , .. .,tr_-j 't ) ,1 -tr)

y : ir x I

t = 0, r

if

^^ ‘0 '

G Fr I H and

by f~(lr ) = x, ko ' and

= $ ( (t1 ,...,tr _ 1 ,1-t),tr ),

G ((t-j f •••

to the constant

and two homotopies,

>p (t1,

for covers

pr£^(ijj)

Fq

are

containin

It is readily seen that this is indeed a

right action. This action is compatible with the action of the fundamental group

oftl ^ on the homotopy groups of the fibers of

namely

Cpr ^(o)

a G tt1 (tl ?,xQ) ,

= T^C and

for all xQ G FQ .

£

(see

7 .3 ),

C G comp(FQ) = 7Tq(Fq,Xq), Moreover, if

f: £

£;1

Serre bundles, then fact ab tl f : comp (FQ ) -+ comp (pr £ '” 1 (bs f (bQ )) ) , whereab tl f = [abtlf: FQ + pr £ '” 1 (bs f (bQ ))] ,

is a

is a map of

407

[bs f* :tt ^ (bs

+

tt

1 (bs ^ 1 ,bs f (bQ) )]-map.

3. I_f C € compiF^) and X q G C, tt ^ (bs £ /bQ ) at xQ (see 4.2.3.4) equals

of

pr£* : TT1 (tl^,x0) +

morphism

tt

1 (bs ^ ,bQ) .

In fact, the equality s:

I •+ tl £ such that

a.

then the isotropy subgroup the image of the homo­

Co = C

s(0),s(1) G C

means that there is a path

and

s

covers a loop in the class

This, in turn, guarantees the existence of a loop with origin

which covers a loop in the class

x^

a.

Construction of the Sequence 4. Let

bQ

Let

E,

be a Serre bundle with base point -1

= pr^(x^) ,F q = pr £

(bQ) ,

and apply Lemma

the homotopy sequence of

the pair (tl^F^)

a new sequence.

for each r ^ 1,

TT^_(tl ^,Fq,Xq)

Namely, by

7T^(tl ^,Fq,Xq)

TT^ibs^bg) ,

xn G t l £ . 1 to transform

with base point

Xq

we replace thehomotopy

into group

rel* : Trr (tl 5 /XQ ) +

the homomorphism

- by its composition with the isomorphism

pr ¿3*: tt (tl ^,Fq,Xq)

3: 7T^(tl ^ , F q , X q)

->

(bs^bg) , and the homomorphism

tt

■> TTr _'|

^f q /Xo^ ”

the comPos:i-t:i-on

-1

A = 3 o (pr^*) :tt^ (bs £ ,b^ ) + TTr_'| 'X0 ^ # since the composition of the inclusion rel: (tl^^x^x^) (tl^/F^^x^) with the projection pr ? : (tl£,F 0 ,xQ) + (bsC/b 0 ,bQ) we see that else but

[pr £* : tt (tl^/F^x^)

is simply

-> tt^ (bs £ ,b^)] © rel*

pr E,* : tt (tl£,xQ) ■> TTr (bs^,b0 ) .

homotopy group

TT^(bs^,b0)

means of the homomorphism

(tl£,x0 ,x0) ■> (bs 5,bQ,b0),

pr

is nothing

Finally, if we attach the

to the right of the resulting sequence by pr

: ^(tl^x^)

-* tTq (bs £ ,b^) ,

we obtain

the sequence ... tt2 (Fq/Xq) tt1 (Fq ,x0) ^0 (F0 ,x0)

> ^2

^'X 0 )

> tt1 (tl ?/XQ ) P— ttq

> ^ 2 ( b3 ^/b0 ) tt1 (bs S/bQ ) —

(12^

(tl g,xQ) Pr ^ * -> ^0 (bs?,b0) .

By 3.3, 7.3, and 2, there are right group-actions of tt

1 (bs £, bQ )

and

on

TTr (FQ,Xp) ,

tt0 (F0 ,x0).

TTr (bs£,bQ ) ,

and of

TT.|(tlf;/x0)

and also a right action of

The homomorphisms

in*, pr

,

ir^ (bs 5,bp) and

these actions, as required by Definition 5.11 Therefore,

on

A

TTr (tl^,xQ ) on the set

are compatible with

(see 3.6, 4.5, 7.3, and 2).

(12) is a Tr-sequence, called the homotopy sequence of the

408

bundle

with base point

E,

5.

xQ .

Sequence (12) is exact.

This is a corollary of the exactness of the homotopy sequence of the pair

(tl£,F )

pr £* : tt^ (1 1 E,, x^)

the kernel of

TTgltl^Xg) ;

in*: 77q (Fq /xq . a € tt (bs £ ,b^) 6.

and of two additional and evident facts:

such that

Given a map

Ti^bs^h^)

and given

equals the image of

a,B € ^ q ^Fq 'Xq ),

if and only if

Q = ao

f: E,

there is

in* (a) = in*(B).

of Serre bundles, the vertical

homomorphisms •..

V

P0 ' V

^ ( t l C,xQ ) Pr

irr (bs £/bQ )

A 7Tr- 1 (F0 ,X0 ) •**

I

(ab tl f)*

...

where

bs f*

tl f*

v (Fo'xo)

7Tr (tl£',X^) ■Pr a > TTr (bs

x^ = tlf(xQ) ,

b^ = bsf(bQ ) ,

and

(ab tl f )

7Tr - 1 { F 0 ' X0 ]

Fg = pr £ 1 1 (b^) ,

constitute a homomorphism of the first homotopy sequence into the second. The commutativity of the first two squares follows from 1.7, while the commutativity of the third follows from 4.2 and 4.3.

The

compatibility of the vertical homomorphisms with the actions of the fundamental groups was established in 3.6, 4.5, 7.5, and 2 .

The Most Important Special Cases 7.

If

A: TTr (bs£,b0)

If bs E,

If

bs E,

is k-connected

A: TT^fbs^bg) TTr_ ^ FQ'X0^ ‘*‘S an isomorPhism f°r A: 7Tk+ ^ (bs E, ,bQ ) ^(Fq'Xq) is an ePimorphism. If then the converse is true in both cases. is “-connected, then all the homomorphisms

in* : 7Tr ^F0'X0^ and k < “ , then r £ k,

is “-connected, then all the homomorphisms

-* 7Tr_'| (F q 'xo ^ are isomorphisms • If tl £

and k < °°, then all r £ k, while tl £ isconnected,

all

tl £

TTr ^t l ^'xo^ are isomorphisms. If bs ^ is k-connected in*: ^(Fq/Xq) TTr (t l 5 ,x()) is an isomorphism for

while

in*:

^ (FQ ,XQ )

^ (1 1 ^ ,xQ )

is an epimorphism.

is connected, then the converse is true in both cases. If F q

is “-connected, then all the homomorphisms

Pr 5* : ]rr (tl £,xQ)

■> 7Tr (bs S,bQ )

k-connected and

< “,

k

isomorphism for all

then

r * k,

are isomorphisms.

pr ^*

while

pr

If

FQ is

: 7Tr (tl^,xQ)-+iTr (bs^,b0 )

is an

: * k + 1 (tl £ ,xQ ) -* 7Tk+ (bs EJ f b Q)

409

is an epimorphism.

The converse is true in both cases

(with no

supplementary conditions). 8.

If the bundle £ has a section s such that s ^q) = xq / sequence (1 2 ) splits from the right at the terms tt (tl&xQ ) , and

then

s* : 7Tr (bs £ ,bQ) section,

from

tt (tl £,xQ )

s: (bs£,bg) PROOF.

Since

9.

Fq

I_f

the left at

are splitting homomorphisms for any such

-> (tl£,xQ) . pr C ° s = idbs^,

TT^itl^Xg) ,

induces splitting homomorphisms PROOF.

Since

p

and any retraction

p*: 7Tr(tl£,x0)

in = id FQ ,

o

10. If the inclusion

(bs £;,b^ ) .

tl £ ,then sequence (1 2 ) splits

is a retract of

the terms

pr ^ ° s^ = id

p: tl £

FQ

-> 7Tr (Fo'xo^#

P* ° i-n* = ^dTTr^F0'X0^ *

in: Fq -* tl £

is^ XQ-homotopic to the

constant map, then sequence (1 2 ) splits from the right at the terms 7T^(bs £,bg) .

in

Moreover, given any Xp-homotopy

to the constant map, consider the maps

-»•Sphr + 1 (bs 5,b0)

h: FQ x I

Given an arbitrary spheroid

and

= y

pr

()-

,... ,t_) ,tr+1)

7rr+ i ^ s i'bo^

( € Sph^ (Fq ,xQ )) . Then the homomorphisms induced by y^ split the sequence.

) ] (t1 , •. •,tr+1) = h(, 2 ,

and a

is a covering (in the narrow sense) ,

factA :

(bs C,bQ)/Im pr C*

F0'

induced

410

A: it (bsC,bQ) > 7To (F0 'X 0 ) = F0 '

by

is invertible.

This is a corollary of the exactness of the homotopy sequence of the bundle

TT0 (tl£,x0 ) = 0whenever

and

13. Xq

ofthe fact that tt^CFq/Xq) = 0

and

t l

£

Set

LetE,

and Xq £

E,

bg = pr r,(xQ ) ,

and b^

r

> 0

is a covering in the narrow sense.

E,

be Serre bundles with basepoints

E,'

tl E,'

for all

,and let

f: E,

E' , with tlf(Xg)

Fq = prf/ 1 (bQ) ,

=pr^'(x^),

= x^.

F^ =p r f / ' 1 (b^).

From Propositions 6 and 5.19, we derive the following conclusions. If

bs f * : nr (bs£,b0 )

TTr (bs £ ',b^) ,

all

r 5 1,

and

(abtlf)*: tt (F.,x.) i t (Fi,x'), all r ^ 0, are isomorphisms, x r u u r u u so are tlf* : tt^,(tl £ ,xQ) -*•tt (tl E,',x^), for all r ^ 1. If

then

tl f* :it (tl£,xn) ->• tt (tl £' ,x') , allr ^ 0 , and IT U IT u (abtlf).: tt (F.,xn ) tt (F',x'), all r ^ 0, are isomorphisms, then x r u u r u u so are bsf * : u ^ ( b s ^ , b ^ ) -+tt^ (bs £ ',b^ ), for all r ^ 1. Finally, bs f * :7Tr (bs£,bQ)

if

tl f * : TT^(tl£,XQ)

Trr (bs^',b^) , tt^ (tl £ ',Xg) ,

so are (abtlf)*: 7Tr iFo /Xo^ (abtlf)*: We

r ^ 0,

all

7Tr^F 0 /X0 ^/

and

and

s 1 : I^ F q

while '*‘ S an e P im o r P ^ is rn with trivial kernel.

tl f (x^) be

Indeed,

r

> ^t

(abtlf).: TTn (Fn ,xn) -* * u u u

lie in the

-* tt ( t l ^ ^ x ^ )

tlf* :

tt^ (tl£ ,x^ )-+ TT^(tl^',tlf(x^)) such that

I tl ^

tlf o

s:

I tl ^ 1is homotopic to the path

from the fact that it follows that

bs f * :

pr£ o s

tt

(x^ ) ,

s ' (1 ) = tlf (x2 ) .

is an epimorphism,

s:

pr £ ' ° tlf ° s

s(0)

the fiber F q ,

is an isomorphism,

path

= x^ ,s(1)

with

be such that

same component of

a path with s ' (0) = tl f

tl f * : 7TQ(tl£,XQ)

Then the loop

tt^ (tl £ 1 ,tl f (x) )

£ FQ

let

Since

= x ,

[in: F q

and

there is

a

and tl £

1] o s'.

is homotopic to the constant loop, and

1 (bs £,bQ) +

tt

(bs £ ', b ' Q)

is an isomorphism

is also homotopic to the constant loop.

applying Theorem 4.1.3 . 6 to the map s to

^°r

tl f * : TT^(tl£,x)

are epimorphisms.

tlf(x^)

pr £ o

are isomorphisms, then

is also an isomorphism if we make the additional assumption

that all the homomorphisms

let

0 , and

r ^

remark that in the last case,

TT0 (Fi ,xi )

x E Fq

all

s,

Now,

an arbitrary homotopy from

the constant loop, and the constant homotopy of the

s |Fr I 9 weobtain a homotopy from s to a path u(I) c: Fq, u (0 ) = x 1 , and u( 1 ) = x .

map

u: I -+ tl £such that

9.

The Influence of Other

Structures Upon Homotopy Groups 1.

In this subsection we discuss the most elementary

properties of homotopy groups which are due to the presence of an additional, group-like structure, compatible with the topology of the space under consideration. consider is simplicity.

The most important such property we shall

The Case of Topological Groups 2.

I_f

X

is a topological group and

arbitrary path, then the translation for any

r ^ 0,

s: I

X

is an

7rr (X,s(0 )) + tt^(X,s(1))

with the isomorphism induced by the left group [s(1 )][s(0 )]

translation by the element

-1

In fact, there is even a canonical free homotopy from -

spheroid

coincides,

$ € Sph^(X,s(0))

to

[s(1)][s(0)]

1

along

s,

any

given by

((t1 , .. .,tr ) ,t) h- [S (tn ts(0 ) ] ' % ( t 1 ,...,tr ). 3 (COROLLARY). simple spaces.

The components of a topological group are

In particular, the fundamental groups of these

components are Abelian. 4.

If

X

is a topological group, then, besides the

multiplication on the sets

Sph (X,e=e ) defined in 1.1, there is r X another one, resulting from the group operation on X [the product of two

spheroids

€ Sph (X,e)

the

second product makes also sense for

is not even defined. r s 0,

is given by

y*-»■ ( y ) * My ) ] .

r = 0,

Moreover,

when the first product

Obviously, this new multiplication turns

Sphr (X,e)

into a group; the spheroids homotopic to the constant one form

a normal subgroup, and the resulting quotient group equals, as a set, TTr (X,e). XQ

When

r = 0,

is the component of

•nr (X,e)

ir0 (X,e) e.

When

equals the quotient group r £ 1,

where

the new group structure on

coincides with the original one; in fact, given

the formula

X/XQ ,

TTr (tl ^,u (1 ))

T Trr (tl£,v(0 )) --- 2 -- » Trr (ti C,v( 1 )) where the vertical isomorphisms are induced by the transformations x h- xgQ and x >+ xg , commutes. PROOF.

Recall that the canonical right action

tl £ x G -> tl E,

415

is free and its orbits coincide with the fibers of v(t)

lie

in the same fiber, for each

such that

u(t)g(t) = v(t).

homotopy from

Q e

then

h(y,t)g(t)

(y,t)

y ** ^giyigQ

r ^ 0.

Sphr (tl £ ,u (0 ))

to

y

Suppose that

£

c|>.j(y)g

tt^ (tl £ ,s (1 ))

groups

tt(tl£,x)

£

on t l £

We shall call the

r >0

and a set with tl£

s : I + bs £ ,

which covers

we define

Tg :

over

(tl £ ,s (0 ))

Ts~ : “ ^ ( t l ^ s (0 ))

from Lemma 13.

Obviously,

2.1

Therefore, we have produced a local system on

(bs £ ,{tt^ (tl £,b)},{Ts}) ,

s.

(1 ))

n^itl^s

s~

That this is well defined follows

Tgare homomorphisms and satisfy

conditions bs£ ,

which we call the lower local system of the

r-th homotopy groups of the total space of It is clear that the pr £

and

with

along any path

system via

u,

TT^(tl£,b) .

as the translation

(i)-(iii).

along

b € bs £,

r = 0 ) the r-th homotopy group of the space

Given a path

is a free

structure group of

and so we may identify these groups.

and we shall write

€ G

v.

is a principalbundle,

group (which actually is a group for

identity for b,

tl £

g(t)

€ Sph (tl £ ,u(1))

r

(b) ,

resulting

there is a unique

along

induces isomorphisms between the homotopy x £ pr 5

u(t) and

yields a free homotopy from the spheroid

The right canonical action of the —1

Since

Therefore, if h : ir x I

to the spheroid

14.

t €I

£•

£.

local system on

tl£

induced by this

is nothing but the usual local system of the r-th

homotopy groups of

tl£ .

Given a monomorphism the Steenrod G-bundle

£

cp: G -* G'

and

r ^ 0,

into the Steenrod G 1-bundle

every cp-map of £'

induces a

homomorphism of the lower local system of the r-th homotopy groups of tl £

into the corresponding system of

tl £ 1 .

The Homotopy Sequence of a Principal Bundle 15.

Let

K

be a principal G-bundle with base point (F 0 'xo)by the Pair

If

in sequence (12) we replace

is to

canonically homeomorphic to (fq'xq^ v^a ^ ^ x 0 ^ an it2 (tl S,x0 )

TT1 (tl 5,x0 )

pr •*"»TT2 (bs £,bQ ) —

TT1 (bs £,bQ ) — 1T0 (tl 5 ,x0 ) -Pr

(bQ = pr £ (xQ ) ) .

(G,e=eQ )

TT0 (G,e)

(G,e) •

7tq (bs 5»b0 ) ---► 1

xQ € tl £. [which 1

-in*-> (13)

416

7T0 (G,e)

Recall that is Abelian (see 3).

It is immediate that

a group homomorphism. (see 5 ),

TTr (G,e)

(see 3.3) and action

while

G

= comp(tl£) , tt

e; see 4.

Moreover,

tt^ (bs £ ,b^ )

tl £

The

acts similarly on both (see 14).

is

G

G

tt

clear that the homomorphisms

on

TTgitl^Xg) =

on tt^ ( 1 1 £ ,x^ ) .

tt^ (G,e )

as the quotient group of

i\^ (bs £ ,bQ

The canonical right

induces a right action of

action of this component on

Finally, it is

7iQ(G,e)

acts from the right on

and thus a right action of

^ (G ,e )

7T^(G,e)

A: tt^ (bs £ ,bg )

TT^iG/e)

tt (tl£,xQ) = Trr (tl£,b0)

tl £ x

[We regard

is a group(see 4) and that

by the component of

^ (11 £ ,x^ ) is identical.] in*/ pr*,

and

A

are

compatible with the above actions, as required in Definition 5.11. Consequently, G-bundle

^

(13) is a Ti-sequence, called the homotopy sequence of the with base point

Obviously, pr

x^. 7TQ (bs£;,b0) is an epimorphism,

: tTq (tl £ ,xQ )

and the partition of

tTq

exactly

Therefore, sequence (13) is exact.

zer(pr ^ ) .

(tl £ ,x^ )into the orbits of

Given a monomorphism principal G f-bundle G-bundle

£

£f

tp: G 1 -> G,

with base point

with base point

x^ £ tl £ ,

every cp-map £ tl £ '

such that

induces a homomorphism of the homotopy sequence of sequence of

tt^ (G ,e )

f

is

of the

into the principal tlf(x^) = x^,

£ 1

into the homotopy

£•

10.

Alternative Descriptions of the Homotopy Groups

1. The spheroid DS ° ID £ Sph^(Sr ,ort^) (see 1.2.8 .9) is called the fundamental spheroid of the sphere Sr , denoted IS, and we let

sphr

denote the

spheroid

element of

7rr (Sr ,ort ) that it

ID £ Sph^(Dr ,Sr \ort^)

of the ball Dr , that it defines.

and

Obviously, We let

we let

Sph^(X,x^)

denote the whence

(Sr ,ort1)

defineIS# : Sph°(X,xQ)

+ Shpr (X,xQ)

tt

r (Dr ,Sr ~ 1,ort )

9(kug^) = sph^_^.

into the pointed space by

IS^()

=

(X,x ),

and

o IS. Clearly,

is invertible, and 1.3.7 . 6 implies that two maps, 0

4>,ip £ Sph^ (X,Xq) ,

IS ({¡i)

elementof

denote the set of all continuous maps

from the pointed space

this map

The

is called the fundamental spheroid

kug^

9 (ID) = IS,

defines.

are

are homotopic if and only if the spheroids

homotopic.

u

IS () ,

Consequently, replacing our "cubic" spheroids

417

and their homotopies by the "spheric" spheroids from

Sph°(X,x0 )

and

their homotopies, we are led to an equivalent description of the set TTr (X,xQ) . It is readily seen that the identity spheroid to the class spheroid

s ph^

and that the element of

f: (S^ort^) If

Sphr (X,XQ)

r £ 1, to

(X,xQ ) then

IS

Sph^(X,XQ)

u

equals

ir^iX^^)

id Sr

belongs

given by a

f*(sph ).

transfers the multiplication in

The resulting multiplication in

may also be described directly:

Spli^iX^^)

the product

: (Sr ,ort^) = (s\ort^) 0 ... ® (s\ort^) + (X,Xg) of the spheroids is given by

cf>,ip: (S^ort^)

= (S1,ort ) ® ... 0 (S^ort^)

(X,xQ)

2

(y1 , Y 2 ’ • ••'Yr > ' ( Y

1

* Y 2

'





*

,

y

r

)

if

i m y 1 ^ 0, (14;

=

2

^ (y1 ' Y 2 '*““ 'yr * '

if

i m y i ^ °'

where y-| /y 2 * •••/yr are complex numbers of modulus 1 , and im denotes the imaginary part. The multiplication that this operation induces on

tt^ îX jX q )

coincides with the existing one.

One can use

(14) to study directly the homotopy properties of the multiplication in Sph^(X,Xg) tt^ Î ^ X q )

and get an independent description of the homotopy groups in the language of

spheric spheroids.

It is particularly simple to describe in this language the spheroid spheroid

(f) ^ = (IS^) ^ ( [IS^ (cj))] ^) , that is, the inverse of the O —1 0 € Sph^ (X,Xq): (£> (x^ ,x^ ,x^ ^ •,x^^^ ) ~ x -j/—^2 '^3 '***' 3.

Let

Sph^(X ,A ,X q )

(Dr ,Sr _ 1 ,ort ) -> (X,A, xQ ) , by

u

ID ( = (S1 ,ort^) ® ... ® (S1 ,ort^)

(1,1) ■+ (X,Xq ),

formula (14), where Y ‘ • ’ Yr --\ are comPlex numbers of modulus 1 and yr G I, defines a map ip: (Dr ,ort1) (X,xn ), and this map

418

belongs to

Sph°(X,A,xQ) -1

absolute case, spheroid

7Tr (Sphg (X,xQ ),const) s > 0,

Cub

then the multiplication in

which arises from the fact that element

is transferred by

in the homotopy sequence of the

£ = (C(1 ,0;X ,xQ ),ab C ( [in:Fr I -> I] ,id) ,X =C(Fr 1 ,0;X,xQ )) f

Serre bundle

whose fiber over the point

Xq

is

Sph^(X,XQ>.

That

£

is a Serre

bundle follows from 4.1.4.2.

1. that

d^,...,dm

r d^ , ...,d^ c D ,

g(C) c A, ^ map

Let



Additional Theorems

where -----

be pairwise disjoint balls in IR O g E Sph^ (X,A, x^)

and let

C = Dr \ Um „ Intd. . 1 =1 l

(y) = (center of

d^) + (radius of

the segments joining the points contained in Y

C. ■

(T

Then, Y ^ I T

1

where

for

s^

is the path In

i = 1,...,m. d 1 ,...,dm

.: Dr + Dr l

d^)y.

denote the ----------

Suppose further that

t^(ort^) , . . . , ( o r )

T2 )...(T

to

ort^

are

V

'

m and

represented by the spheroids and

t

r > 2,

2

y € irr (X,A,x0)

Let

such

be a spheroid with

-

11.

A

y^ 6 irr (X, A ^ o t ^ (ort1) ) g

and

given by

g °

are the elements

6 Sph^(X,A, go-t ^ (ort^ ) ) ,

s^(t) = g ((1-t)

The same conclusion holds true for

(ort^ ) + tort^) ,

r = 2,

provided

are indexed naturally, i.e., each of the 2 -frames

(xi (ort1) - ort 1 ,xi+ 1 (ort1) - ort^)

defines the natural orientation

of* IR . PROOF.

We proceed by inductionon

remarks, denoting by t the (rectilinear) path ¿^(t) = (1 - t ) ( o r t 1) + t o r t 1 .

m.

We make

two preliminary

in C given

by

421

First remark: for given d„,...,d , it suffices to prove the r 1 m theorem when (X,A,x0> = (D , C , o r t ^ ) , g = rel id D , and si = l ± . Indeed, rel id D

g*: r

(Dr ,C ,ort ) -+ iTr (X,A,XQ)

into

y,

translated along

while it takes the class of the spheroid

T y.. s. 1 l Second remark: for a given

£., 1

into

theorem for a standard choice of 1 /2 m

radius

takes the class of the spheroid

centered at

m,

it suffices to prove the

d^,...,d^,

namely, for the balls of

2 L-J-Ort0 , m--^ort0 , ..., — ort., -— —ort0 . m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2

To see this, consider, along with these standard balls and the corresponding

C,

arbitrary balls

d*,...,d^

satisfying the

conditions of the theorem, with the corresponding C 1, t !, £!. Clearly, r r r1 there exists a continuous map h: D D , which is S -homotopic to id Dr

and satisfies h(C) c= C ', h o t. = t!, and h o I . = £!. Then r r 1 1 1 1 rel h* : tt^.(D ,C,ort^) -* tt^ (D ,C*,ort^) takes the class of the spheroid id D

r

T^f

into the class

of id D

translated along

,

r

,while taking

the class of the spheroid

into the class of the spheroid

i = 1 ,...,m.

translated along

Now to our induction. trivial; consider

m

The cases

= 2.By our remarks,

m = 0

and

m = 1

are

we may assume that

(X,A, X q ) = (Dr ,C,ort ) , g = id, and are the standard b a l l s (with radius 1/4 and centers ort^/2 and -ort2 /2). Let p denote r the rotation of D by an angle



t

m = 2,

d 1 f...,dm

and

be the ball of radius

„ ,d cd) ,

m-1

As in the case

t.

Since

to the paths

Z, u, t

m- 1

and

(ort.)

v to

1

We let theproducts

/

= Ti /1 r - - Tim —2V t ' V . - i V . ' -

1161

Now apply the theorem, first for the case of two factors, and then for the case of ’. V i V ,

m- 1

factors, to conclude that

= s-

(17)

and T£ , V " T f ,Tm- 2 T 6 1 m- 2

= Y-

(,8> r (X,A,xQ) = (D ,C,t (ort ))

(In the first case, the theorem is applied to g = t, take

(d ) ,t 1 (d ) , while in the second case we m- I m (X,A,Xq) = (Dr ,C,ort1), g = id, and the balls d ^ ,...,d^_ 2 ,d ) .

At last,

and the balls

(16),

t



1



(17), and (18) yield (15).

2.

Let

x £ X, Xq £ Xq, x^ E X^ ,... some

r

PROOF. 27

I

bepoints

where

suchthat

27

I

X

X^,

are

-spaces, and le

imm^(x^) = x.

If for

^r ^Xk + 1 'Xk + 1 ^

all the homomorphisms

isomorphism, then so are ' r) . spheroid

X = lim (X^.,c^) ,

(imm, )+ ..: tt_ (Xn_,x^) jc r r K. k.

tt

(X,x) r

(with the

are same

Notice that, according to Theorem 1.2.4.5, every may be expressed as the composition of a spheroid

with the embedding imm, , for 1 large enough; similarly, r every homotopy I * I -> X is the composition of some homotopy 27

I

+ X..

x I > X^

(imm^.)*

with

imm^,

for

1

large enough.

Now the fact that

are epimorphisms and monomorphisms is seen to be a consequence

of the analogous properties of the compositions

423

° (4>l-2 )*r ° •••

{h - l ] * r

12. 1.

Let

°

(V * r :V

W

" V

W

*

Exercises

(X,Xq ) be a pointed

given a right group-action of

space and suppose that there is

tt^(X,Xq ) on

exists a local system of groups,

a group

(X,{G },{T }), x s

G.

Show

with

that

G = G, xQ

there which

determines the given action. 2.

Let

and suppose that

(X,A) X

be a

cellular pair with base point x^ £

is countable.

Show that all the groups

A,

7Tr (X,A,XQ)

are countable. 3.

Let

(X,A)

be a

and suppose that the groups generated

(for all

4. tl ^

Let

tt^ (X /Xq )

and

r ^ 1). Show that if

7Tr (X,A,XQ)

the groups

cellular pair with base point x^ £

£

with r ^ 2

^ ( A ^ q) X

are finitely

is simply connected, then

are also finitely generated.

be a Serre bundle, and let

E

be a subspace of

such that

any point

A,

(E,pr5 l^fbs 5) is also a Serre bundle. I-k x £ E and any r ^ 1

in* : Tir (pr5 1 (pr ^ (x) ) ,pr 5

1(pr £ (x) )flE,x) +

Show that for

TTr (tl£,E,x)

is an isomorphism. 5.

Show that if the base of a covering is k-simple, then its

total space is also k-simple. 6.

Let

cub,buc :

r > 0 tt

IT •s

and

s > 0.

(X,xn) -* u

tt

r

differ only by the constant factor

Show that the homomorphisms

(Sph (X ,xn ),const) s

ITs (-1 )

u

424

§2.

THE HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF

SPHERES AND OF CLASSICAL MANIFOLDS

1.

Suspension in the Homotopy Groups of Spheres

1. spheroid

6 £ Sph^iXjXp)

The suspension of a spheroid

su £ Sphr + 1 (su (X,xQ) ,bp) ,

= pr (0 (t1 ,...,tr ) ,tr+ 1) ,

where

given by

is the

su (t.j / ,• .• .• ./ ,tr + 11 ) = r+

pr = [pr: X x I -+ su(X,xQ )].

Obviously,

suspensions of homotopic spheroids are homotopic, the suspension of the product of two spheroids of positive dimensions equals the product of their suspensions, and the suspension of the constant spheroid is again the constant spheroid. homomorphism

Consequently, the mapping

Trr (X,XQ) ->

(su (X,

) ,bp) ,

^ su

for any

yields a

r ^ 0.

homomorphism is also called suspension and is denoted by

This

su.

Recall that we have already defined the suspension of a continuous map on two occasions: in 1 .2 .6 .2 , for maps of topological spaces, and in 1.2.8 .5, for maps of pointed topological spaces.

The

present, third definition, is more special; it concerns maps from the IT pair (I ,FrI ) into pointed spaces, and ha^ no intersection with the previous ones.

At the same time, it is compatible with the second

definition, in the sense that we may obtain the third definition from the latter by shifting from spheric spheroids to cubic ones. precisely, the spheroids in

Sph^(X,x^),

More

being maps between pointed

spaces, have suspensions in the sense of 1 .2 .8 .5, and the diagram

Sphr (X,Xq) ----- > Sphr + 1 (su(X,xQ),bp) commutes. Let us add two important, yet obvious remarks. f: (X,xQ) + (Y,yQ)

Firstly, if

is continuous, then the diagram

+ T Sph 1 (su (X ,xQ ),bp)

(X,xQ)

Namely, every spheroid

$ £ Sphr (X,xQ)

by the composition

lp „ Sphr (X,xQ) ---- > Sphr (Sph1 (su(X,xQ ),bp),const) —Cub > Sphr +1 (su(X,xQ),bp) (see 1.10.6), and hence the homomorphism may be defined as

su = cub o lp^

(to check this facts is routine).

A new description of the homomorphism su(X,xQ)

as the quotient space of the cone

(which is identified with (4> (t^

emerges if we view (p

by its base

£ Sphr (X,xQ ),

defined as

The latter is taken into

su SO(n).

The triviality of the groups tt2

r = n-1 .

for

TZ>2

generated by the class of the inclusion is trivial for all

Tr^(SO(n))

and

tt3 (SO(4))

(S0(2).),

tt^

SOU))

tt-^ (SO

(2 ) ),

~ 7L ,

~ Z2 0 Z2 all result

is

440

from the equalities

SO(3) = IRP3 ,

SO(2) = s \

SO(4) = ]RP3

and

x

(see 3.2.1.2, 3.2.3.1, and 3.2.3.3), and Theorems 2.2, 2.7, and 5.1. The rest is a consequence of the honotopy sequence of the bundle (SO(n+1),pr ,sn ) 2.

with base point

The inclusion homomorphism

isomorphism for

r £ 2n-1

is isomorphic to

inclusion

S 1 = U (1) -* U(n).

inclusion

= id

tt

(LJ (n))

and an epimorphism for

TT^(U(n))

is trivial, while

see 4. 6 .1.4.

id G SO(n+1);

2Z

Tr^(U(n))

ffr (U(n+1)) r

= 2n.

If

n ^ 1,

and is generated by the class of TT2 (U(n))

is trivial for all

is Isomorphic to

homomorphism Tr^(U(n))

ZZ

Tr^(SO(2n))

for all

is an the

n. tt^(U(1) n ^ 2.

is epimorphic

The

for all

n.

These are corollaries of the equalities [in: U (1)S O (2)] = 1 3 and U(2) = S x S , and of the homotopy sequence of the bundle

(U (n+1),pr,S2n+^) 3.

with base point

id € U(n+1);

The inclusion homomorphism

an isomorphism for particular, if

r £ 4n+1

r £ 5

and

see 4. 6 .1.4.

(Sp (n )) ^ ^(Spfn+I))

and an epimorphism for n ^ 1,

Tr^(Sp(n))

r = 4n+2.

is In

is isomorphic to

irr (Sp(1 )=S3) . This can be seen from the homotopy sequence of the bundle (Sp(n+1),pr,S4n+3)

with base point

id € Sp(n+1);

see 4. 6 .1.4.

Stabilization 4.

Theorems 1-3 show that for

5 1 , each series ofgroups

r

Trr (SO(1)) -+ Tir (SO (2) ) ■+ tt^ (SO (3) )

...,

Trr (U(1)) + Trr (U(2)) -*■ Trr (U(3)) - ..., irr (Sp(1)) -> 7Tr (Sp (2) ) + irr (Sp (3) ) -> ..., stabilizes:

the first one, starting with

withTTr (U ([r+2)/2] )) , groups 7Tr (SO(n)) rrr (Sp (n) ) by

with

irr (SO),

tt1 (SO) s 2Z ,

and

with

the third one, with n > r+2,

n > [(r+2)/4]

fTr (u),

and

tt2 (SO) = 0,

By Theorem 2, Theorem 3,

(U) = ZZ

TTr (U(n))

ir^Sp), and ,

direct meaning:

the second one,

tt(Sp( [(r+2)/4] ) ) with

.

n 5 [(r+2)/2],

The and

are said to be stable, and are denoted respectively.

tt2 (u) = 0, and

tt^JSO),

By Theorem 1,

ir3 (SO) s (a © ZZ)/ (cyclic subgroup).

(Sp) = 0, Tt2 (Sp) = 0, The notations

i\^ (SO (r+2)) ,

and

tt^ (U)

,

tt (U) s a .

Finally, by

tt3 (Sp) = ZZ . and

TTr (Sp)

have also a

they represent the ordinary r-th homotopy groups of the

441

limit spaces

SO = limSO(n) ,

U = limU(n) ,

and

Sp = limSp(n) ,

respectively (see 1 .1 1 .2 ).

Information 5.

The homotopy groups

been explicitly computed. isomorphisms

Namely, for any

TTr (SO) -* TTr+8 (SO),

tvr (U ) -> TTr + 2 (U) ,

tt^SO), r i 1

2

TTr (SO)

ffi2 0

TTr (Sp)

3

0

a

0

2Z

4

5

6

7

0

0

0

7L

*2

*2

0

7L

^(Sp)

and

and the first seven homotopy groups of

1

and

there are canonical

7Tr (Sp) -+ TTr +8 (Sp) ,

together with the first two homotopy groups of following tables.

r

irr (U),

U

SO

and

Sp,

are displayed in the

8

S 2

r

1

2

7Tr (U)

7L

0

0

For a proof, see [17]. There are also many unstable homotopy groups of the manifolds SO(n),

U(n),

TT2n^U ^n ^

and

" ffin! '

Sp(n)

which have been computed.

TT4n +2^S p ^n ^

71 a l0 (Sp(n) ) = Z20 r / 0

4n+ z Z [ [zn +1 ) !J for the proofs, see [7].

“ S (2n+1)!

for

7.

n

odd.

for

n

For example, even' and

For details and references

The Homotopy Groups

of Stiefel Manifolds and Spaces 1 (LEMMA). manifold

V(n,k)

(V (n+1 ,k+1 ) )

+

r = n- 1 ; and if

Let

is an isomorphism forr < n-1 n

tt

(3HV(n,k))

and

(CV (n ,k )

and

3HV (n ,k )

and an epimorphism for + tt^ CHV (n+1 ,k+1 ) )

an epimorphism for

are all .simple.

n (■ 7Tn K, (V(n,k))

The manifold

TT2 n- 2 k +1 of the inclusion

(V(n-k+1,1)) = TTr (Sn_k)

) = irn_k (V (n-k + 1 ,1 ) ) -»• t

n-k

tt^ (S 2n

■+ tt^ (CCV (n,k) ) 4.

= 0,

^ (V (n-k + 2 ,2 )) ->

even and an epimorphism for

(CV (n ,k )

is

n-k

odd.

2 (n-k)-connected .

is isomorphic to 7L and is generated by the class S2n ^k+1 = £v(n-k+1,1) -+ (CV(n,k).

This is a corollary of Lemma 1 : when sequence

r < n-k,

all the maps are isomorphisms, except for the firs~

which is an isomorphism for 3.

when

r £ 2n-2k+1 ,

in the

^k+1) = tt^ (EV (n-k+1 ,1) ) -+ tt^ ((CV (n-k+2 ,2)) ->■... -*

all the arrows are isomorphisms. The manifold

lV(n,k)

is (4n-4k +2)-connected.

tt-n—4k+3

(n 'k) ) is isomorphic to ZZ and is generated by the class 4n —4k + 3 of the inclusion S = HHV (n-k+1 ,1) HV(n,k) . This is also a corollary of Lemma 1 : (actually, if

r

£ 4n-4k+5),

if

then in the sequence

= TTr №V(n-k+1 ,1 )) -+ TTr (lV(n-k+2,2) ) +

...

r £ 4n-4k +3 tt^ (S

4 r, — 4 V + 7

TTr (H V (n ,k ))

) =

all the

arrows are isomorphisms. 5. as

The spaces

V(°°,k)

and

,k)

G+ (n,k),

G(°°,k),

(CG(n,k),

G (°°,k) ,

(EG(°°,k)

= lim (IHG (n,k) ,in : 3HG(n,k) -> IHG(n+1,k))

is reduced to the computation of the homotopy groups of the corresponding classical groups. thus

n

Grassman manifolds and spaces are taken care of together, and may also take the value «>. 2.

If

isomornhic to tt

k > 0

and

_^(SO(k)),

(G (n ,k) )

0 < r < n-k,

then

tt

(G+ (n,k))

is

and the inclusion homomorphism is an isomorphism for all

TTr n.

The first claim results from Theorems 7.2 and 7.5, and the homotopy sequence of the bundle (V(n,k),pr,G (n,k)), k n 4.6 .1.4, with the inclusion IR -+ 3R as base point

defined in The second claim

results from the commutativity of the diagram A

Tir (G+ (n,k)

(so(k))

in* = id

in. 77 r

< G +

( n l

' k )

^r_1 (so(k))

)

(see 1 .8 .6 ] tt

to

(G(n,k)),

(G+ (n,k)).

tt

and to

ZS,

tt^

for

Since

with

(G(n,k) )

0 < k < n, G (2,1)

r ^ 2,

and

0 < k < n

for

7L

is isomorphic to

is isomorphic n - 2,

1,

n > 3. ,1

is homeomorphic to

S',

Theorem 2.2 yields

^ (G (2 ,1 ) = Z5 . If we now apply Theorem 1.8.12 to the canonical two-sheeted covering (G_£n,k ) ,pr ,G (n,k )) , the rest is plain. tt

4. to

If 0 < r < 2n-2k+1,

TTr ^(U (k )), and

then

tt^ ((EG (n ,k))

the inclusion homomorphism

is an isomorphism for all

is isomorphic

tt^.((EG (n ,k)

) -*•TTr ({CG(nf,k) )

n 1 > n.

The proof repeats that of Theorem 2, with obvious changes. 5. to

ttr ^(Sp (k)

I_f 0 < r < 4n-4k+3, ),

and the inclusion

then

tt^

(3HG (n,k ))

homomorphism

is an isomorphism for all

is isomorphic

tt^_(3HG (n,k)

n* > n.

) -*

444

Again, the proof repeats that of Theorem 2, with obvious changes.

9. 1.

Let

q

Exercises

= 2,4,8,

Show that for any integer

pr: S 2 q ~ 1 -*Sq

and let

be the Hopf map.

k 2

(k sphg )

o pr*(sph2g_1) = k pr* (sph2g-1) .

2.

that for any positive integer

Show

n,

lRPn

is

(n+1 )-simple. 3.

Let

n

be even and

k

be odd.

Show that G(n,k)

4.

Let

3

5.

Show that the inclusion homomorphisms

is

simple. £ n £ 00.Show that

7rr (SO(3)) -+ 7Tr (SO (4 )) , 7Tr (U(1)) + TTr (U(2)),

G(n,2)

is not

2-simple.

Tir (S0(7)) -Trr (S0(8)),

7Tr (U (3) ) ->■ TTr (U(4))f

and TTr (Sp(1 )) + 77^ (Sp(2) ) are monomorphic for any integer 6.

k-frame n of CE , TT2n-2k+1

Consider the map

(v1,...,v )

which takes each

En into the frame (v1fiv ,...,v ,iv, ,v ) 2n “1 .K l X. IR . Show that the homomorphism k+1 (V(2n,2k-1))

generator indicated in 7.3 of indicated in 7.2 of

(EV(n,k) -+ V(2n,2k-1)

of

considered as (n,k)) ■> *

r.

induced by this map takes the

Tr2n-2k+1

Tr2n-2k + 1 (V (2n ,2k-1 )) .



into the generator

445

§3.

HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF CELLULAR SPACES

1.

The Homotopy Groups

of One-dimensional Cellular Spaces 1. bouquet

In this subsection we compute the homotopy groups of a

B =

{S^=S

,ort^) of circles.

constructed from an arbitrary family,

As usual, the base point

bp

will be the

center of the bouquet. To simplify the exposition, we let loop defined by the inclusion imm^

o

IS: I + B,

respectively.

imm^: S

u

B,

and

i.e.,

and the homotopy class of

u ,

a

denote the

the loop i.e.,

imm *(sph^),

A loop will be referred to as standard if it is of the

(...((v.v0 )v0) ...v .)v , where each of the factors v.,...,v I Z o n-In _^ I n is either one of the loops u or one of their inverses u and, in 1 y y addition, two loops u , u^ with the same \i are not allowed to be form

adjacent.

The case

n

the constant loop with 2 (LEMMA).

= 0 is

not excluded: then, the product is simply

origin bp. There

is a covering

(B~,p,B) with the following

two properties: (i)

B~

(ii) some point Fq ,

and

the paths which cover standard loops and originate at

x^ Fq

is contractible;

of the fiber

set M.

We equip

form the bouquet A = V

xGF(M).

(bp)

end at distinct points of

Let us agree to denote by

group generated by the A

-1

is exhausted by the ends of these paths.

PROOF. topology,

Fq = p

Further, let

p

GF(M),

GF(M)

(D^ =E)1 ,0) ,

with the discrete and then the product

be the partition of

pairs { (imm (1),g),(imm (-1),gy)} the points which do not appear

with

as usual, the free

y G M

A x GF(M)

into the

and g G GF(M),

in any of these pairs, and denote

and by

p

the composition pr A x GF(M) --- -— ► A Then

p

is obviously constant on the elements of B~ = [ Ax GF(M)]/p,

where

a^

V (DS = DS) U u------ ► B. p. Now set

p= [factp : B~ + B] ,

is the center of the bouquet

A,

xQ = pr(aQ ,e),

e = eQp (m )'

anc^

446

pr = [pr: A x GF(M) -► B~] . a covering with

Then it is readily seen that

F q = pr(a^ x GF(M))

The contractibility of in fact, the subspaces

B~

and

(B~,p,B)

is

€ Fq .

follows from Lemma 2.3.3.4:

pr(A x [GF (M) \ GF^_^ (M)])

of

B ,

where

GF (Ml is the part of GF(M) consisting of words of length £ n, n satisfy the conditions of this lemma. The path with origin X q which covers the standard path

(...(u

G1 e 2

u

En

)...)u y2 yn

[e

G 1 G2 en at the point pr(a^,g), with g = y^ y 2 ***^n * of these paths are pairwise distinct and exhaust

3. tt^ (B ,bp)

The groups

(B )

with

is a free group with free generators

= ± 1 ],

,...,e

ends

Clearly, the ends of Fq. r > 1

are trivial, whereas

a .

The proof is based on Lemma 2 and uses the same notation. Since

B~

is contractible, all its homotopy groups are trivial, and

hence so are the groups

tt (B)

A:

is invertible (see 1.8.12).

tt

^ (B,bp)

tI q

invertibility of

(Fq , x A

q )

with

r > 1;

moreover, the map Combining the

with property (ii) of the covering

(B ,p,B),

we

see that the homotopy classes of the standard loops are pairwise distinct and exhaust group with generators 4.

TT^(B,bp). a ,

Consequently,

Tr^(B,bp)

is a free

y £ M.

The fundamental group of a connected one-dimensional

cellular space is free, whereas its higher homotopy groups are trivial. This is a corollary of Theorem 3, because every connected one-dimensional cellular space is homotopy equivalent to a bouquet of circles (see 2 .3.3.6 ).

2.

The Effect of Attaching Balls

1. Let X = A topological space, and cp

[J_____ (Dy= D^+ ^ )] / where A is a connected is a continuous mao 1 I ^W (S = S k ) -> A -*— Ly£M y (see 2.3.2.1), and let X q € A. In this subsection we exhibit a system of generators for the group tt (X,A,xn) [ k ^ 1 ] . K+1 u We remark that the homotopy groups trivial (see 2.3.2.1) , whereas for

irr (X,A)

r > k+1, tt^_(X,A)

more complicated object: in the simplest case, when and the family irr (Sk + 1 ) .

{D }

consists of a single ball,

In Theorem 2 below,

f

with

r $k

are

is already a much A

is just a point

tt (X,A)

equals

denotes the composite map

447

t_,1 m D ------- | | D

imm U— X,

J— -V V

€ 'fTk + 1 (X, A, f (ort1 ))

and

'

is the

class of the spheroid

fy • ’ (Dk + 1 ,Sk ,ort1) -+(X,A,f (ort1 )) . 2. Let an(3 v1

: I ->• A k ^ 1,

Xq.I_f

by the classes

be an arbitrary path then nk = Tw

usual sense, by the classes

(X,A,xQ) is generated

in ±1 3 - J~j [T^ _ (3y )]

the class

[i.e., it is generated, in the

0). €

(yi € M,

and similarity transformations

, ...,a

the point of

d ,...,d

d^ having

ske,_X, with k 5 1, then tt_(X,A) is trivial for jC r Moreover, TTk + 1 (X,A,xQ) is generated over tt^ (A,xq ) by

the classes of the characteristic maps of the (k+1)-cells in X ^ A (regarded as spheroids), translated to xQ along arbitrary paths. The inclusion homomorphism tt (a,x„) tt is an isomorphism for ----------------1-----r 0 r (x,xn) 0 -----------*-------r £ k- 1 and an epimorphism for r = k ; the kernel of the latter is generated over the

tt

^ (A,Xg)

by the classes of the attaching spheroids of

(k+1)-cells in X ^ A ,

translated to

xQ

along arbitrary paths.

When

and 3.

X ^ A c ske, all these assertions follow from 1, 2, k+ 1 The general case is reduced to this special situation by

Theorem 2.3 .2 .4 .

3. The Fundamental Group of a Cellular Space 1.

In this subsection we pressenti an effective method for

computing the fundamental group of a cellular space possessing a single 0-cell.

This last condition is not a serious limitation, since, firstly,

it is fulfilled in the most important cases and, secondly, every connected space can be transformed, by taking a rather simple quotient, into a homotopy equivalent space which meets our requirement (see Subsection 2.3.3).

It is by no means difficult to generalize the computation scheme

to arbitrary cellular spaces; however, the exposition is cumbersome. 2. Let Since

Xq

X

be a cellular space with a single 0-cell

isalso the unique 0-cell of

homeomorphic to a bouquet of circles.

ske^X,

this skeleton

Consequently,

tt

xQ . is

^ (ske ^X ,xQ)

is

the free group generated by the homotopy classes of the characteristic loops, i.e., of the characteristic maps of the 1 -cells (see 1 .3 ). According to 2.4,

in*: 7^ (ske1 X ,xQ )

epimorphism whose kernel is generated over

t^

tt (X,xQ ) (ske X,xq)

classes of the attaching maps of the 2-cells of along arbitrary paths.

In our case,

inner automorphisms, and hence of

tt1

tt

Kerin*

X,

1 (ske 1X ,x )

is an by the homotopy

translated to

xQ

acts as a group of

is the smallest normal subgroup

(X,xQ ) containing the above elements.

Thus, the fundamental group

that we want to compute is canonically isomorphic to the quotient group of tt^(s k e X ,X q ) by this normal subgroup.

449

3.

1

The discussion above

shows

that in order to compute

) i1: suffices to know the 1-skeleton of X and the attaching maps of the 2-cells of X. Given these data, we can exhibit a system

tt

( X

' x q

of generators and relations for

tt ^

( X ,

x

to each 1-cell corresponds

q ):

a generator, namely the class of the respective characteristic loop; each 2 -cells defines a relation, namely that the class of the attaching map of the given 2 -cell, when translated to

Xq

and expressed in terms

of generators, must be equal to the identity element of

tt^(X,Xq).

In

a very simplified fashion, we may say that a set of generators of tt^(X,Xq)

consists of the 1-cells of

X,

while a system of relations

consists of the 2 -cells. We remark that the system of relations is not entirely canonical, because it depends upon the choice of the paths along which we do the translation;

consequently, the left-hand sides of the relations

are determined only up to conjugation. 4 (COROLLARY).

The fundamental group of a finite connected

cellular space has a presentation given by a finite number of generators and relations.

An Additional Theorem 5.

If

A

and

B

are subspaces of the topological space

with inclusions

and

xQ G A H B,

morphism

then the rule

(A,xq ) *

TT

tt

^

(B ,xQ )

+

a * 3 -> i^(a)j^(6 ) TT1

(X,xQ )

[

*

denotes the free product],

whose kernel contains all the elements of the form with

6 €

(A il B,xQ ) .

tt

[ tt

where tt1

(A,xQ ) *

vk(X,A,B,xQ)

(A,xq)

*

tt

^ (B, X

q

)

tt1

defines a homo­ i*(

r

)

a

^

r

But we have already proved that the upper that

( B 1 ,bp)

TT

>TY(B,bp)

Imm

also lies in the image of our (lower)

c

.

is an isomorphism, so Imm.

Therefore, the

latter is an epimorphism and this, combined with Theorem 4, implies that Imm

and

Pr 6

are isomorphisms. (COROLLARY).

constructed from a family groups ^(B) with r < n

Let

B

be a bouquet of n-dimensional spheres,

= Sn ,orti ) H n ^ 2 , then the are trivial, whereas 71^(3,bp) is a free

Abelian group with free generators

6.

imm^*(sphn ).

The Homotopy Groups

of a k-Connected Cellular Pair 1 (ALGEBRAIC LEMMA).

Consider the following commutative

diagram of groups and homomorphisms □ — aI

1—

n —s

>□ I6

456

If

a, 6 ,

and

y

Ker 6

epimorphic,

PROOF. 6

morphic, also that

Ker 6 ^ a(Ker y) /

are epimorphic and = a(Ker y),

a, 6

Ker 6 c y(Ker a) •

Y(Kera) c: Ker 6. Let us verify that

and

d £ Ker 6 .

Pick

are epi­

The commutativity of the diagram implies

Ker 6

alKery) c

(again by commutativity), whence

If

d = y(a) , then

£ Ker 6

a(a)

a(a) € a(Ker y ) / i.e., there is -

c £ Ker y

such that

and we have 2. If

A

a(c) =a(a).

d = y (a) Let

Thelast equality yields

(X,A)

be a cellular pair with base point r £ k,

pr*: TTk + 1 (X,A,xQ) •+(X/A,pr (xQ))

tt

(X,A) = 0,

k = 0,

1

CKera,

for k ^

^ (X,A,x^ )

a £ ^ + 1 (X,A,Xq)

(T^a)a ^ with

and

xQ £ A.

then

is epimorphic, and

is the smallest subgroup of

"ratios"

ac

= Y(ac ^) £ y (Ker a) .

is connected and, for

Ker pr*

is

Ker 6 = Y(Ker a) .

and

Since the diagram is commutative and

is epimorphic.

6

then

1

containing all the

o £

(A,x^) . For

the situation is described by the commutativediagram tt1

(A,

x q

)

ln*

> tt 1 ( X

,xQ)

>

tt^

X

jA

^

q

)

Pr< •n1 (X/A, pr (Xq ) ) , where

abs pr*

and

rel*

are also epimorphic, and

the smallest normal subgroup of

Tr^(X,xQ)

Ker(abspr*)

which contains

is

Ker rel*

=

= Im in* . (This theorem will be generalized in the next section; see 4.3.14.) PROOF OF THE CASE

k ^ 1.

Suppose first that

only of (k+1)-cells and, as a consequence, -dimensional spheres.

For each cell

X/A

X \ A

consists

is a bouquet of (k+1)-

e £ X \ A,

consider the homotopy

class of its characteristic map (viewed as a spheroid of the pair and translate it to by

a^.

Set

a £ t^(A,x0 ) Theorem 5.6,

xn , 0

denoting the resulting element of ^

r

Be = pr*(ae ).By Theorem 2.4, the classes form a system of generators of the classes

of the Abelian group

B0

ti,

k+1

(X,A)), (X,A,x ) 0

T0ae with

Trk+^ (X,A,xQ ) , and by

form a system of independent generators

7Tk+ ^ (X/A,pr (x ) ) .

Moreover, it is obvious that

Pr* (Tga ) = Pr*(a) for all a € Trk+ 1 (X,A, x Q) and o e u (A,x ) , and these facts will suffice to complete the proof of the theorem for k > 1.

Since

Se = pr*(ote )generate

Trk + 1 (X/A,pr (x )) ,

pr* is epi­

pr*(T o cx) _ = pr. we have (Tact)cx- 1 G Ker L pr,. - * (a), * Let us show that the ratios (Toa)a generate Ker pr* . If k > 1

morphic.

Further, since

457

and the class

T1 l 1, (e ,a)

£

A( e, a ) j

nonzero integers for any cell

e

(T a

a e

)

X ( e , a)

belongs to

(because

[with only a finite number of Ker pr* ,

pr* (a)

Y [Y X(e,a)]B Le La e

£ A( e; a) = 0

then o:

and thus

■ “1 -iÀ (e ,a ) T # , [ (T a a e ) a e '] When k = 1, this argument is valid 1( e , a) only after we factor (X,A,Xq ) by its commutator subgroup, and it k +1 only demonstrates that every element of Ker pr* is a product of the above form multiplied by some commutators. However, since in rr2 (X,A,xq) each commutator y ^ 6y6 ^ equals (see 1.4.7), (T 9 Y 6) 6 1 -1 we obtain again the desired decomposition of £ into ratios (T a)a 5 =

1

a

In the general situation, we first transform k-connected pair, removing those components of x

0'

X

(X,A)

into a

which do not contain

and then replace it by a homotopy equivalent pair

(X ’,A *)

such

ske, X 1 c= A ’ (see 1.4.6 and 2.3.3.1). Thus, we may assume that k ske, X c A. Now set Y = A U ske, 1X and consider the commutative k K +1 diagram that

Tk + 1 (Y,A,x q )

l =in*

P ’ = pr,

P

7Tk+1 (Y /A,Pr (XQ ) ) — --

Here

i , i ', and

p'

= prv

-» 7Tk +1 (X/A,pr(xQ)).

are epimorphic:

i

because

ske^^X c Y,

ske, 1 (X/A) c Y/A, and p' because of the proof above. K.+ 1 We claim that our diagram also satisfies the last condition of the i'

because

algebraic lemma:

Ker i' c

p'(Ker i) .

To see this, note that every (k+2)-cell from is the image under

p

of some cell

e

from

X ^ Y,

corresponding attaching map can be expressed as 2.4, this implies that

Ker i'

c p r j K e r inj ,

(X/A) \ (Y/A) and its

pr ° att0 . where

By Theorem

in* =

= [in*: TTk + 1 (Y,x0 ) ^k+ 1 (X,x0 )] and pr* = [pr* : ^k+ 1 (Y,x0 ) " -*• TTk + 1 (Y/A,pr (xQ) )] . Since the diagram in* Tk + 1 (X'x 0 ) rel.

rel^ ^k+i k ^ :

desired properties (see 2 .1.5. 6 and 1 .1 1 .2 ). To produce where Let

F B

(Xq/Xq),

is a free group if and

B'

TTn (B,bp) = F

n = 1,

tt

as a quotient group

F/F1,

and a free Abelian group if

n > 1.

be bouquets of n-dimensional spheres such that

and

,bp)

f: (B',bp) -+ (B,bp) TTn (B,bp)

write

= F'

(see 1.3 and 5.6).

be a continuous map such that

equals the inclusion

F * -> F

Further, let

f *: TTn (B',bp) -*

(one can construct such a map

out of a family of spheroids whose classes in

TT^(B,bp) = F

constitute

a free system of generators for F 1). Now replace each sphere in B* by the ball that it bounds and take X^ to be the result of attaching this new bouquet (of balls) to show that

Xq

and (ii) for

and

B

by

f.

Theorems 1.3, 5.6, and 2.3

xQ = imm^ (bp) [= imm2 (bp)]

satisfy conditions (i)

k = 0.

Assume that for some i ^ 1, pointed spaces ^Xk'xk^' k i' , , k < i-1 , are already constructed and satisfy conditions iC (ii), and (iii) . Represent Trn+i (Xi _ 1 / x i _ 1 ) as the quotient group

and maps (i),

of a free Abelian group, say

G,

and then construct a bouquet

(n+i)-dimensional spheres, together with a map such that G

g,

g*:

C

of

g: (C,bp) ->• (X± _ 1

. (C,bp) + tt (X ,x ) equals the projection n+ 1 n+ 1 1-1 1 “! tt . (X. „,x. „). [To establish the existence of such a C and a n+i i- 1 i- 1 one may procced as in the proof of the existence of B 1 and f tt

above; however, here Theorem 1.3 is not necessary.]

cellular

Now .replace each

* Translator's note. A space with such homotopy groups is known as a K(7T,n) -space or as a cellular space of type (7r,n).

)

460

sphere of

C

bouquet to

X. by g to obtain X.. 1^ I ~ 1 = imm2 . The fact that (X^x^)

and

4k

k = i,

by the ball that it bounds and then attach the resulting

and

(Jk

satisfies (iii)

Finally, set satisfies k = i- 1 ,

for

x

1

(i),

= inutu (X. .) ¿J_~l (ii) for

is a consequence of

2.3. 2.

Given an arbitrary group

2 , tt3, ...,

TTr (X) s 7Tr

0-cells

it

and arbitrary Abelian grou

there exists aconnected cellular space

X

such that

(r = 1 ,2, ...) .

PROOF. Let

X^,X2 ?...

x ,x ,...as

basepoints, such that the groups

1

z

trivial for

r i k,

cellular spaces

whereas

Yg,Y ,...

be connected cellular spaces

^(X^)

" 71^

(see 1).

tt

r

with

(X, ) K

are

Define inductively

and cellular embeddings

:

^ Yk +1

^

Yq = D°, Yk+1= Yk xc xk + 1' and ^ k (y) = (y,xk+1) * A p p ling Theorems 1.1.9 and 1.11.2, the space X = lim(X^,ipk ) has the desired properties.

8.

1.

If

Eight Instructive Examples

r > 1,

then the r-th homotopy group of a finite,

connected cellular space is not necessarily finitely generated (cf. 3.4). r 1 The bouquet (S ,ort^) V (S ,ort^) is a simple illustration of this phenomenon:

its r-th homotopy group (r > 1) is a free Abelian group r 1 of infinite rank. Indeed, (S jOrt^) V (S jort^ has a covering space which is homotopy equivalent to an infinite bouquet of r-dimensional spheres:

to produce such a space, attach one copy of

at each integer point of the real line INFORMATION.

Ker rel* Example:

in one point

HR .

The homotopy groups of a finite cellular space

with finite fundamental group are finitely generated. [19] . 2.

Sr

For a proof, see

Under the conditions of Theorem 1.6.6, the subgroup

= Im in* X

of

tt^(X,Xq )

is the bouquet of

is not necessarily normal two circles,

the center of the bouquet, and

p takes the

A

(cf. 1.5.14).

the first circle,

second circle into

xQ xQ .

3. Under the conditions of Theorem 1.6.7, the right splitting of the homotopy sequence of the pair (X,A) at tt (X,xQ) is not necessarily normal (cf. 1.5.17). 1

1

A = (S ,ort ^) V(S ,ort1)f h = [imm2 : S 1

X] °

[p^:

Example:

X = (D^ort ) V (S1,ort ), 1

1

Xq is the center of both bouquets, X ->S 1].

and

461

4. A

For any

k ^ 0

there exist k-connected pairs

connected, which are not (k+1)-simple; moreover,

of Theorem 6.2, and for any k ^ 0, ^k+l (X/A,pr (x q ))

5. A

is not necessarily Abelian, even when

and 1

X

i\2 (A)

The simplest example:

is the result

+ A

given 0,

=

pr* : tt

(X,A,xn) + k+ 1 U Example:

(cf. 1 and 3).

The second homotopy group of a pair

simply connected.

S

the epimornhism

A = imm2 (S1)

with

under the conditions

^-s not necessarily an isomorphism.

X = (Sk+ 1 ,ort1) V (S1 ,ortr),

(X,A)

(A)

it

1

1

A = S

(X,A)

with connected

is Abelian and X is M x S , xQ = (ort^ort^,

of attaching two copies of

D

2

to

A by the

maps

y h- (y ,ort ) and y *+ (ort1 ,y) • Then tt (A) = ZZ @ 2Z, I I 9 tt^ (X ) = 0, ^2 ( X) = 2Z (Xis homotopy equivalent to S ), by

and we have the exact sequence 0 -iS-*— > ZZ

rel* > tt2 (X,A,x0) —

which shows, in particular, that tt2 (X,A,Xq)

3

» E © ZZ

in-*— > 0, (5)

is epimorphic.

Assuming that

is Abelian, it follows from 1.4.7 that

identically on

- ^ ( X / A ^ q ),

tt^ (A,Xq)

whence, by Theorem 2.2,

acts

rank tt^ (X,A,x^) £ 2.

The latter contradicts the exactness of (5). I

6.

There exist 1-connected pairs

pr* : tt^ (X ,A ,X q ) X = D

2

,A = S

1

,

tt2 (X/A) s ZZ(X/A 7.

tt^ (X/A,pr

xn =

such that

(xQ)) is not even epimorphic.

ort . Here

(X,A) r 2 S ).

tt

is homeomorphic to For anyk > 2,

k-connectedcellular pairs

(X,A)

= 0for

r ^ 2,

there are (k—1)-connected (X,A)

with

X and

contractible.

Example: whereas

but not

A

connected and X/A 1 k 0 € ir^ ((S ,ort^)V(S ,ort^),bp)

To construct an example, let 1 k and a € tt, ((S ,ort ) V (S ,ort ) ,bp) designate the classes of the K I I 1 1 k k spheroids imm^ : S (S ,ort^)V (S ,ort^) and imm2 : S -*■ 1 k k +1 (S ,ort^) V (S ,ort^), respectively. Next, attach D to 1 k k 1 k (S ,ort1 ) V (S ,ort^) by an arbitrary spheroid S -+ (S ,ort^)V (S ,ort^) in the homotopy class

2a - Taa. Take the resulting cellular space as

and the circle

as

ske.X

A.

as the result of attaching to

id Sk ,

The quotient space X/A may be described k+ 1 k k k D to S by a map S -»■ S homotopic

which implies that

is evident that

X

and

A

X/A

is contractible (see 1.3.7.8 ).

are connected and that

(X,A)

a

= T^a (n = 0,±1,...),

while

(X)

It

is (k—1)-con­

nected; therefore, it remains to check that tt, (X) is not trivial. 1 k 1 , iTk ((S ,ort 1 ) V (S ,ort1) ,bp) is a free Abelian group with free generators

X,

is the quotient

By

462

group of

tt ,

elements

2a

K.

1 k ((S ,ort ) V (S ,ort ) ,bp) I

by its subgroup generated by the

I

. (see 6.2). Consequently, n+ 1 the additive group of binary rational numbers. n

- a

8.

The homomorphism

by a continuous map

f: (X,A,xQ)

and

(ab f)* : tt (A,Xg)

tt^ (A ' to be any map in the class

Further, given arbitrary continuous maps

M

X,

it follows

from the same first part of Theorem 2 that if the compositions f o $ and f o (f)^ are homotopic, then so are cJ>Q and : indeed, take K

= M x

I,

l = (M x 0)

U (M x 1 ) ,

and

X,

and take for

anyhomotopy

cf)(x,0) = (J)q(x), cf)(x , 1 ) = (j>^ (x) , x € M, M x I X from f o (J)q to f o (j)^ .

ip

The Case of Cellular Spaces 4.

X

Tf

homotopy equivalence PROOF.

are cellular spaces, then every weak

X «+ Y

is a homotopy equivalence.

Suppose

By 3, the mapping there is a map

and Y

f: X + Y

tt (id,f ) : tt(Y,X)

g : Y -> X

into the class of

is a weak homotopy equivalence. -* tt(Y,Y)

whose homotopy class is taken by

idY .

That is to say,

and it remains to verify that

g ° f

same element (indeed, 5.

X -+ Y

Y,

f

og

o

id X .

Ti(id,f): tt(X,X)

f

and

Tr(id,f)

is homotopic to

this mappingtakes the homotopy classes of

into the

and

fog

is homotopic to

is a consequence of the invertibility of because

is invertible, and hence

f

g 0f

idY ,

The latter

tt(X,Y),

and

id X

are homotopic) .

Theorem 4 states that two connected cellular spaces,

X

are homotopy equivalent whenever there is a continuous map which induces isomorphisms of the homotopy groups, but it

certainly does not guarantee if theirhomotopy

that

X

and

Y

groups arejust isomorphic.

examples

to show that the latter is not true.

Y = Sq x

]RPP ,

and suppose that

1< p < q .

are homotopy equivalent In

fact, we have simple

Take

X = SP x ]RPq ,

By 2.5.1

and 1.1.9,

Tir (X) ~ equivalent.

f°r r * However, X and Y are not homotopy Indeed, the map pr^ : Sp x nRpq + s p induces a group

isomorphism

tt

continuous map

P

(Sp

3RPq ) -> tt (Sp ) . We next show that there is no Q p P p f : S^1 x ORP*^ -> S- which induces a group isomorphism x

(Sq x 1RPP ) •> tt (Sp ) . P P composition it

SP _£2L_ mpP

Assuming that such an

*

induces an automorphism of every continuous map

(ort1rx), ir (Sp ) .

1RPP -> Sp

f

sq x mpP

exists, the

gP

On the other hand (by 2.3.2.4),

is homotopic to a map which takes

(1)

466

IRpP"1

into

ort ,

and

thus(1) ishomotopic

the composite projectionSP -+ 3RPP continuous map

SP

SP .

to the composition of

IRPP /IRPP^ = Sp

Consequently,

with some

(1) cannot have degree

since the above composite projection has degree

0

when

p

±1,

is even

and degree

2 when p is odd. Contradiction. The following example illustrates the same phenomenon in the 3 °° 2 simply connected case. Set X = S x (CP and Y = S . By 2.2.10,

2.5.2,

and 1.1.9,

(X) ~ tt (Y) for all r. However, X and Y have ^ 3 00 3 not the same homotopy type. Indeed, or : S x EP S is not null 1 3 °° homotopic (because it induces a group isomorphism tt^ (S x £p ) = S ■> 3 2 3 -> (S ) = 2Z) . On the other hand, every continuous map S -► S is tt

null homotopic. 6.

We say that a topological space is homotopy fit if it is

homotopy equivalent to a cellular space. if

X

X -> Y fit

and

Y

From Theorem 4 it follows that

are homotopy fit, then every weak homotopy equivalence

i£ a homotopy equivalence. By Theorem 3.5.2.13, all smooth compact manifolds are homotopy

.

An example of a space whichis not homotopy fit was given in 2.3.5.4.

This space is not connected.

(and even ^-connected) space which is INFORMATION.

Every CNRS is

For an'example of a connected not homotopy fit, see 4.1 below. homotopy fit, and the same holds

true for every topological manifold (compact or not). homotopy fit spaces is homotopy fit. C(X,Y)

If

Y

is homotopy fit for any compact space

A product of

is homotopy fit, then X.

homotopy type of acountable cellular space, then

If

Y

C(X,Y)

has the homotop has the

homotopy type of acountable cellular space, for any compact space with countable base.

X

For proofs, see [16].

k-Equivalence 7. f: X

Y

Let X

and

Y

be topological spaces.

is a k-equivalence if, for all

is an isomorphism for

r < k

x E X,

A continuous

f * : Trr (X,x)

and an epimorphism for

r = k.

tt

map (Y,f(x))

Here

k

is a nonnegative integer; sometimes, weak homotopy equivalences are referred to as “-equivalences. A composition of two k-equivalences is obviously a k-equivalence. 8.

Let f: X ■+ Y

be a k-equivalence.

Then for any cellular

467

pair

(K,L)

4*: L -> X

withK \ L c:

with

ske^K

x |L = ^

true;

moreover, if f : X -> Y

for any continuous maps X

r _i sr

=

^

(j>: K -> Y

and

f o\p = (j)|t there is a continuous map y : K X such ,Li • — and f © ^ is L-homotopic to c(>. The converse is also

that

f ° $ =

and continuous maps

is continuous and has the property that

cf).: Dr

Y

and

ip:

Sr~1 -> X

(0 £ r £ k)

with

r_ 1

there is a continuous map y : Dr -> X such that r- 1 and f ° x is S -homotopic to , then f is a

S

k-equivalence. The proof repeats that of Theorem 2, with obvious changes: in the first pair, the pair second part, to see that (respectively, 9. M

Ij£

with

f*

is now k-connected; in the

is epimorphic (monomorphic), we take

r£ k

r < k).

Tr(id,f): tt(M,X) space

(Cyl f ,X)

f: X

Y

7T(M, Y) dim M

is a k-equivalence, then the mapping is invertible (surjective) for any cellular

< k

(respectively,

dimM = k) .

The proof repeats that of Theorem 3, except that we need Theorem 8 instead of Theorem 2. 10. dim Y

£ k,

rf

X

and

Y

are cellular spaces with

then every k-equivalence

X

Y

dim X

< k

and

is a homotopy equivalence.

The proof repeats that of Theorem 4, except that we need Theorem 9 instead of Theorem 3.

The Relative Case 11. map

If

f: (X,A) -+ (Y,B)

abs f : X + Y

and

all

r ^ 1

abf (=ababs f) :

(Y ,B )

f * : Tir (X,A,x) ->

and all

x G A.

A -+ B

are topological pairs, a conti

are weak homotopy equivalences.

f: (X,A) -+ (Y,B)

is a weak homotopy

(Y ,B ,f (x))

is an isomorphism for

To see this, apply the 5-Lemma (see 1.5.19)

to the homomorphism induced by (X,A)

and

is said to be a weak homotopy equivalence if

We remark that if equivalence, then

(X,A)

f

from the homotopy sequence of the pair

into the homotopy sequence of the pair

(Y,B).

As another

corollary of the 5-Lemma, we have the following result: suppose that f: (X,A^0) -> (Y ,B ) ab f : A

B

is continuous, that one of the maps

is a weak homotopy equivalence, and that for any

the homomorphisms

f*

ttq (X,x ) + 7Tq (Y ,f (x) ) , isomorphisms.

abs f : X

Then

f

:TTr (X,A,x) -* and

(Y ,B ,f (x)) ,

r > 1,

(abf)* :ttq (A,x) -> TrQ (B,f(x))

is a weak homotopy equivalence.

x £ A

(absf)* : are

Y, all

468

12.

Ij[

f: (X,A) ■+ (Y,B)

then the mapping

ir(id,f): tt(M,N;X,A) -*■ n (M,N;Y,B)

any cellular pair

(M,N)

(Y ,B)

Let us show first that every continuous map is homotopic to the composition of some continuous map

with

f.

By 2, there is a continuous map

whose composition with

ab f : A -+ B

Using 2.3.1.3, any homotopy from a homotopy of to

(p

Xwith

and

produce a continuous map r— 1 is S -homotopic to 0

such that any

with diameter less than e is contained in U or V. r— 1 Now triangulate S so that the diameter of each simplex is less than e,

D

and then extend the triangulation to

Let

K

V) .

It is clear that

that

(L)

D ,

preserving this property.

be the union of all simplices contained in

ip (Kn Sr

K

and

L

(respectively,

are simplicial subspaces of

1) c Int A , \p (L D Sr 1) c Int B ,

X

to be the map assembled from

to be

nr (yr ^ ) -

Applying Theorems 3.2.3

an r-equivalence, and it is clear that a cellular embedding. 3.

Let

topological spaces continuous map.

X

and

(K,^(g)

along the

Consequently, the

TTr (K,x) K

T Tj.ipr? 1 (bQ ) , (x) ) commutes

» TTr (pr £-1 (b1 ) ,ip (x) )

(the translation

T~ is defined in 1.7.3). Since T ~ is an s s isomorphism, the invertibility of * implies the invertibility of ip*.

Cellular Approximations of Topological Pairs 7.

A cellular approximation of the topological pair

is any pair

[(K,L ) ,] space

A

of

(X,A)

(K,L)

(p:

L

(K,L) anda weak

(X,A).

are points, a cellular approximation

is termed a cellular approximation of the pointed

(X,A ) . 8.

Every topological pair

approximations. the subspace (X,A)

and

consisting of a cellular pair

(X,A)

with

A,

there is a cellular approximation

Let

( M,x)

be a cellular map such that

X] ° ip (see 3 and 2.3.2.4).

homotopy

x

[(K,L) , ]

be a cellular approximation of

be the relativization of the map L x I ->

(L,i/0

of

of

ip = ab cj).

g: LM

[in: A

admits cellular

Moreover, given any cellular approximation

PROOF. and let

(X,A)

from

[in: A -> X] o ^

equivalence and

Set

K + X to

ab

is a weak

476

9.

Let

[(K ,L ) ,]

and

)

[(K',L 1) , lJ

N x I

[M, K

fl B)

and (B,B fl A),

L'J

|_Mr by the map

to

(x,0) h*in ^ (x ) ,

the resulting cellular space with their images in

(A,A

K.

and set

[(L*,N),(j)] as shown by 8.

(x ,1 ) *+ in2 (x),

Now identify

N x I,

L = (N x I) u Lj

(N,x)/

and call

L',

and

M*

M = ( N x i ) U M l.

The composite maps Pr 1

N x I L1 —

J »n — > A -^2— > X,

jointly define the map = K

and

homotopy

*A 0 B —

ab f : L -+ A,

and

M1

f: (K,L,M)

— ► X, ^ > B —^ — > X (X,A,B) . Obviously,

ab f : M -+ B, and

equivalences. Therefore, so is

Int L

a b f : L fl M + A fl B absf : K + X

U Int M = are weak

(see 2.2 and

2.4) . 12.

The homomorphism

[tt1 (A,xQ ) * tt1 (B,X q )]/vk (X,A, B ,X q ) ->- tt^ X jX q ), defined in 3 . 3 . 5 ,

is an isomorphism not only for a cellular triad

(X,A,B)

with

but also

for any triad (X,A,B)

and either

A, B, A n B

Int A

(2)

connected (as

U Int B = X

or

assertedby Theorem 3 . 3 . 6 ) ,

such that (A,A fl B)

A, B, A n B

are connected

is a Borsuk pair.

In fact,

this follows from Theorem 3 . 3 . 6 and Lemma 11, since the homomorphism (2) is natural. In particular, we see that the fundamental group of the bouquet of two spaces is canonically isomorphic to the free product of the fundamental groups of these spaces under the only assumption that each space forms, together with its base point, a Borsuk pair (cf. 3.3.7).

13.

Concerning Theorem 3.5.5, we can weaken the demand that

478

the pairs pairs.

(X ,x ) y

be cellular and instead ask only that they be Borsuk

y

That this is possible is guaranteed by Theorem 8, the discussion

of bouquets in 10, an the commutativity of diagram (3) in 3.5.1. 14.

Theorem 3.6.2 and its corollary 3.6.3 are valid not on

for cellular pairs, but also for arbitrary Borsuk pairs.

This

generalization follows from Theorem 8 and the last statement on quotients in 10.

4.

Exercises

1. Consider the union X x

sin(1/x)

on the interval

of the graph of the function

0 < x £ 1/tt and

the broken line made of

the four segments with the successive vertices (-1,0), and (0,0). 2. Let spaces

Show that

[(A x S )

and

Y = Aj

HR

(cf. 4.2.4.2) . 1

[(2Z x S )

3. Let I

X

Y

X.

denote the subset of

Show that

Show that the

X -> Y,

and no

(Cf. 3.5.) 3 * IRconsisting of the segment

and the sequence of segments withendpoints

(n = 1,2,...).

(-1,2),

are weakly homotopy

equivalent, but there is no weak homotopy equivalence weak homotopy equivalence

(1 /tt ,2 ) ,

is «-connected but not homotopy fit. (Cf. 1 .6)

A={0,2n |nEZ}c= 1

X = Sj

X

( 1 / tt, 0 ) ,

n

(X,(x^,x2 ,x^) x^,I)

ort^ , ort^ + ort^/n is a Serrebundle, but

there exists fibers which are not homotopy equivalent. 4. Z

Suppose

(X,Xq),

(Y,y^)

is a cellular space with a 0-cell

is a weak homotopy equivalence with abC(id,f): (Cf. 2.8.)

C(Z,Xq ,*X,Xq )

C(Z,ZQ;Y,yQ)

§5.

1. 1.

are pointed topological spaces, z^ for base point, and = Yq •

f: X

Y

Show that

is a weak homotopy equivalence.

THE WHITEHEAD PRODUCT

The Class

wd(m,n)

In this section we define and study some of the propert

of an operation on the elements of homotopy groups.

In a certain sense,

this operation generalizes the action of the fundamental group on the

479

homotopy groups.

The definition assumes that a pair

m,n

of positive

integers is given. The present subsection is devoted to a very specific preliminary construction.

Recall (see 2. 1.3.2 and 2. 1.5.2) that the

cellular decomposition of

Sm x sn ,

decompositions of

Sm

and

Sn

determined by the standard

(each having two cells) consists of

four cells: an (m+n)-cell and three other cells which form the bouquet (Sm ,ort^) V (Sn ,ort^). by

B.

We denote this bouquet by B(m,n)or, simply,

The standard characteristic map of the (m+n)-cell

composition of the canonical homeomorphism with the map

DS x D S ;

it takes

Sm+n ^

Dm+n into

is the

Dm x Dn B,

(see 1.2.6.9)

and takes the point

(ort. + ort ^->//2 into bp = (ort.,ortJ. Therefore, this characteris1 m+1 1 1 tic map defines an element of the group 7Tm + n ^s x Sn /B,bp) (see 2.2.5), which we call

Wd(m,n)

or, simply,

Wd.

Also, we write

simply, wd, for the element 9 (Wd) € ^m+n-l^B 'kp)/ the attaching spheroid Sm+n ^ B. We need two additional notations: B(m,n) -> B(n,m)

which

of the spheroids 2.

permutes

imm^

Sm

and

0

wd

or,

i.e., the class of

for the homeomorphism

Sn ,

and

,imm2 :(S^ort^) + (B(m,n),bp)

The class

wd(m,n)

yfor theproduct when m = n.

has infinite order.

It is enough to establish that

Wd

is of infinite order and

that 3: % +n (sm x Sn 'B 'bP> -

is

monomorphic.

The first is a consequence of the fact that the homo­

morphism pr* : % + n (sin x Sn 'B 'bP> takes

Wd

^ m + n ^ 3"1 * sn)/B=Sm+n'Pr (hp) ) =

into a generator of the right-hand group.

The second claim

follows from the exactness of the homotopy sequence of the pair (Sm x s n ,B) it

m+n

with base point

(Sm x sn ,bp) 3.

takes

wd(m,n)

because

in*: iTm + n (B,bp) +

is epimorphic (see 3.5.4).

The isomorphism into

bp,

0*: 1Tm+n_-|

(m,n) ,bp)

7Tm+n_i

(-1)mnwd(n,m).

This results from the commutativity of the diagram

s„m+n-1

B (m,n)

. „m+n-1 > ^

0

B (n,m)

(n,m) ,bp)

480

where the vertical maps are the attaching spheroids which represent the classes

wd(m,n)

and

is given by (x., is (-1)mn). 4.

If_

wd

(n,m) (see

xm+n) h- (*m + r

m = 1,

1), while the upper horizontal map xm+n 'X 1 ' '’'' V

(and itS de^ree

then

wd(m,n) = imm~.(sph ' 2* ^ n )[T.lmra^(sph^)^imm0 2*. (sphn )] In particular, ,a2

wd(1,1) =

c^ct^c^ a

denote the elements PROOF.

spheroid

Sn

—1

,

where (as in Subsection 3.1),

imm^ * (sph.|) ,imm2* (sph ^) £ tt^ (B (1 ,1 ) ,bp) .

According to 1,

wd(1,n)

is represented by the

B(1,n), imm^ o D S f / J x ^

,

, ...,x )) , imm.Z ° DS (/2 (x0 Z n+1

if

|x^| £ 1/ /2,

if

|x | 5 1//2. 1

This is obviously homotopic to the product of the spheroid bp,

if

x^ £ 1//2, (1 )

imm2 » DS (/2 (x2 , .. .,xn+1 )) ,

if

x1 5 1 / Æ

if

x 1 £ -1//2,

with the spheroid obtained by translating the spheroid imm2 o DS (/2 (x2 ,...,xn+1)) ,

(2 )

(X1.... Xn+1> * bp, along the path class of (1) is

t

if x^ ^ -1//2,

imm. ° DS(1-2t). Now it remains to observe that the ' _1 imm2*(sphn ), the class of (2) is [imir^* (sph^) ] ,

and the class of the above path is The class wd(m,n) following three homomorphisms:

belongs to the kernel of each of the

p r l * : ^ m + n - l (B'b P> pr2*:

V n - 1 , B ' b P>

"

imm^*(sph^).

rort^), % +n - 1 ( S n ' o r t 1 ) '

and in* : V n - i (B'bp) ■* w For

in*/

sequence of the pair

i

(sm x sn'bp)

this results from the exactness of the homotopy (Sm x Sn ,B)

with base point

bp.

For the first

481

and the second homomorphisms, use the equalities = tPr 1 : Sm x Sn + Sm ] o in 6.

and

^m+n-l((Sm'ortl) ^ (B(n,n),bp),bp)

now let

(is S takes

[(idSm

V imm^ )* (wd (m,n) )] [(id Sm

PROOF.

When

m > 1

and

n > 1.

or

n = 1

The bouquet

(id Sm

V imm^)*(wd(m,n)) .

wd(m,n)

into

V imm2)*(wd(m,n))] .

(Sm ,ort^) V (B(n,n),bp)

two (m+n)-cells with attaching spheroids (id Sm

V y)*: ^m+n_>| (B (m, n ) ,bp)

this follows from 4 and 3;

simply connected, and it yields the product belonging to the classes

Sm ] =

[pr2 : B ->• Sn ] = [pr2 : Sm x S11 + Sn] ° in.

The homomorphism

m = 1

[pr^: B

Sm x B(n,n)

is

when we add

Sm+n ^ + (Sm ,ort^) V (B(n,n),bp)

V imm^)*(wd(m,n))

and

Consequently, the kernel of the homomorphism

in* : ^m+n-l ^(sm^orti) v (B(n,n) ,bp) ,bp) + n +n-1 (S™ x B(n,n),bp) is generated by the indicated classes. class

(id Sm

V y )*(wd(m,n)).

This kernel contains also the

To see this, note that

wd(m,n)

the kernel of the homomorphism induced by the inclusion (see 5), while id Sm x y ; sm x (id Sm

id Sm V y sn - sm x

is the compression of the map B(n,n). Therefore,

k^ ,k^ £ 2Z ,

k V imm^)* (wd (m,n) )] [(idSm

V pr2) ° (id Sm

B(n,n)

onto

(id Sm

V pr^ )© (id Sm

= id B (m,n ) , (id Sm

Sn ,

k? V imm2 )* (wd (m, n) )] , (3)

and we shall presently show that

The compositions (id Sm

(idSm

V y) ,

V pr^ ) o (id Sm

where

pr^, pr2

are both homotopic to V imm1) =

while both

V pr2)o (id Sm

(id Sm

(id S™

V imrn^ )

pr B(m,n) --- 1 — >S

k^ = V y)

idB(m,n) .

At the same time,

V pr2) o (id Sm

V imm2 ) =

V pr1) ° (id Sm V imm2)

7. homomorphism

The class

and

imm ---- ! — ► B(m,n).

w d (m ,n ) = wd(m,n) k^ = 1,

and

are the projections of

(id Sm

V pr^)*

and

(idS

to both members of (3) and using Proposition 5, we get

by virtue of 2,

= 1.

equal the composition

Now applying the homomorphisms k1 = wd(m,n ) ,

B(m,n) -> Sm x Sn

Vy)*(w d (m ,n )) =

= [(id Sm with

sits in

k2

.

wd(m,n) =

Finally, these equalities yield,

k2 = 1. wd(m,n)

V pr2 )*

belongs to the kernelof the

482

su:

tt

„ (B(m,n),bp) ■> tt (su (B (m, n ),bp) =B (m+1 ,n+1 ) ,bp) . m+n-1 m+n

PROOF.

By 2.1.1, the diagram pr

Pr -|* ^m+n_-, (B(m,n),bP )

7rm+n- 1 (Sm'ort 1 )

,_m+1

commutes.

I ) % . /Cn (S ,ort. m+n-1 1

tt

su

SU

su .

pr 1* —

.

'ort 1 >

^m+n

2

n +1 r ort 1 ) m+n (S

^ 21 , (B (m+1 ,n + 1) ,bp) --m+n

tt

tt

This, combined with Theorem 5, shows that

belongs to the kernels of

pr^*

and

pr^*/

su(wd(m,n))

and thus to the kernel of

the homomorphism % +n (B(m+1'n+1)'bp) ^ 1Im+ n (sin+1'ort1) ® TTm + n (Sn+1 'orV given by

pr^*

and

Pr2*-

Finally, recall that the last homomorphism

is an isomorphism (see 3.5.5).

2.

Definition and the Simplest

Properties of the Whitehead Product 1.

Let

a £ tt^^Xq),

(X,Xq )

3 £ tt^^Xq).

h: (B,bp) -+ (X,Xq) and

be a pointed topological space, and let

defined by arbitrary spheroids

(S ,ort1) -+ (X,Xq)

representing

choice of these spheroids. is determined

Clearly, the homotopy class of the map

of a

and

is independent of the

3

Therefore, the element h* (wd(m,n))£ Tim+n_^ (X,x^)

solely by the classes

the Whiteheadproduct

a

(Sm ,ort^) -+ (X,Xq)

and

a

3,

and

g.

denoted

This element is called

[oc,3 ] .

Notice that in terms of this definition,

wd(m,n)

the Whitehead product of the classes of the spheroids n (B,bp) and imn^ : (S jort^) -* (B,bp), i.e.,

itself is

imm : (Sm ,ort1) -*

wd(m,n) = [imm. . (sph ),imm0 .(sph )]. 1* m z* n It is readily cheked that any

a £ ^¡ji(X ,Xq ) ,

Furthermore, and any path

T

2. [6,a]

8 £ iTn (X,x0),

( [ a , 3] )

s : I -+X If =

a

£

=

[T

and continuous

3] for any s s(0) = X q .

a,T

s

with tt^ ( X

f*([a,3]) = [f* (a),f* (3)]

,Xq )

( - 1 ) mn [ a , 3] .

and

3 £

a

£

iTn ( X , x 0 ) ,

for

f: (X,xQ ) tt

m

(X,xn ), u

then

3

(Y,yQ ). £

tt

n

(X,x_),

U

483

Indeed, spheroids, the classes

if

h: (B,bp) -+ (X,Xq )

(S ,ort^) ■> (X,x^) and a and 6, then

[6,a]

=(h

is the map defined by two

(Sn ,ort^)

(X,x^)

© 0)*(wd(n,m)) = h * (0*(wd(n,m))

which represent

=

= h * ( (-1)mnwd(m,n)) = (-1) mn [a , 8 ] (see 1.3). 3.

If

a £

then

[a,31 + B~]

and

B £ ^n(X'x q ) ,

\

(X,Xq )

and

G Un^X,X0^

= [a,B ] + [a,8-]. i z

z

then

If

with

n > 1,

a ,a„ € tt (x,xn ) with i z m o ----

[a1 + a ^ B ] = [a ,B]

ra> 1

+ [a2 ,S] .

Because of 2, one has to prove only the first equality. Consider the map

h: ((Sm ,ort.j) V (B(n,n) ,bp) ,bp)

arbitrary spheroids, ->■ (X,Xq ) ,

f: (Sm ,ort1) -► (X,xQ)

representing the classes

Then the map

(B(m,n),bp) -*■ (X,Xq)

and

a

and f

h

o (id Sm V imm^),

the map defined by

h

° (idSm V imn^) ,

and finally the map defined

of the spheroids [a,B1

g^ +B21

and

g2

equals

g ^ ,g 2 :

8.j,82 ,

defined by f

(X,xQ )

and

g^

g2

equals

by

f

h ° (idSm V y) .

= h*((idSmV imm^ )* (wd (m,n) ) + (idSm

(Sn ,ort1) -►

respectively.

and

= h* o (idSm V y)*(wd(m,n))

Hence,

=

Vimm2)*(wd(m,n))) =

V imm^ ))* (wd (m,n) ) +

+ (h o (idSm

V imm2 ) )* (wd (m,n) ) = [a,8.|] + [a,B2].

If^

[a,8] = B(Ta6)

-1

a £

.

tt^ (X,Xq)

and 8 £ TTn (X,xQ )

In particular,

[ot,B] = 8aB

equals

and the product

= (h o (idSm

4.

definedby

with

-1 -1 a

n S 1,

then

for any

a, B £ tt^ (X ,X q ) . This is a corollary of 1.4. 5.

[a,B]

For any■*- a £ tmt (X,x„) and x „), the -----u --- B £ tt_(X, n u ----product ------belongs to the kernel of the homomorphism su: TTm+n_1 (X,xQ ) -+

TT (su (X,xn ) ,bp) . m+n u This is a corollary of 1.7. 6.

For any

[imm1* (a),imm2 (B)]

a £ TTm (X,xQ) and

B £

the product

belongs to the kernel of each of the homomorphisms:

484

V n - i ((x'xo) v (Y' V ' bp) + W Pr 2* :

V n - 1 (,X ' x 0 )

V

(X,xQ)

is the identity. be spheroids in

(X,Xq ) by

h(x,y)

and spheroids = f(x)g(y),

f1 (y) = f (y)x q /